01DMM0196 - Keithley 196 Manual

Model 196SystemDMM

InstructionManual

ContainsOperatingandServicingInfonnation

KEITHLEY

Art isan Scient ific - Quality I nst rum entat ion ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.art isan-scient ific.com

WARRANTYKeithley Instruments,Inc. warrantsthis productto be free from defectsin materialandworkmanshipfor aperiodof I yearfrom ciateofshipment.

Keithley Instruments,Inc. warrantsthe following itemsfor 90 daysfrom the dateof shipment:probes,cables,rechargeablebatteries,diskettes,and documentation. -

During the warranty period, we will, at our option, either repair or replace any product that proves to be dcfcctive.-

To exercisethis warranty,write or call your local Keithley representative,or contactKeithley headquartersin Cleveland,Ohio.You willbe givenpromptassistanceand return instructions.Sendthe product, transportationprepaid,to the indicatedservicefacility. Repairswill bemadeandtheproductreturned,transportationprepaid.Repairedor replacedproductsarewarrantedfor the balanceof theorigi-nal warrantyperiod,or at least90days.

LIMITATION OF WARRANTY

This warrantydoesnot apply to defectsresultingfrom productmodification without Keithley'sexpresswritten consent,or misuseofany productor part. This warrantyalsodoesnot apply to fuses,software,non-rechargeablebatteries,damagefrom batteryleakage,orproblems arising-from norrilaf"wear or failure to (ollo-v;. instructions. ------ --

THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHEil.-WAIl.RANTIES, EXPRESSEDOR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIEDWARRANTY OFMERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESSFORA PARTICULAR USE.THE: REMEDIES PROVIDEDHEREIN AREBUYER'SSOLEAND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES.

NEITHER KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS,INC. NORANY OF ITS EMPLOYEESSHALL BE LIABLE FORANY DIRECT, INDI-RECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL ORCONSEQUENtIALDAMAGES ARISING OUT OFTHE USEOFITS INSTRUMENTSANDSOFTWARE EVEN IF KEITHLEY INSTRUMENtS, INC., HAS BEEN ADVISED IN ADVANCE OF THE POSSIBILITY OFSUCH DAMAGES. SUCH EXCLUDED ｄａｍａｇｅｓｾｈａｌｌ INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO: COSTSOF REMOVALAND INSTALLATION, LOSSESSUSTAINEDAS THE RESULTOF INJURY TO ANY PERSON,ORDAMAGE TO PROPERTY.

KEITHLEYTestInstrumentationGroup,Keithl,ey Instruments,Inc.' 28775AuroraRoad'Cleveland,Onio44139·(216)248-0400'Fax: (216)248-6168

CffiNA: Keithley Instruments, Inc.· 3 Holiday Inn Lido· Office Building 404C·Beijing, China, 100004·861-4362871·861-4362871FRANCE: Keithley Instruments SARL. 3Allee desGarnys· 8.1". 60·91121 ｐ｡ｬ｡ｩｳ･｡ Cedex·01-60-11-51-55·Fax: 01-60-0-17-26GERMANY: Keithlcy Instruments GmbH. LandsbergerSir. 65.82110Germering· 089-849307-0·Fax; 089-8.4930759GREAT BRITAIN: Keithlcy Instruments. Ltd .• TheMinSler • 58 Portman Road·Reading,Berkshire RG3 lEA· 0734-575666·Fax: 0734-596469ITALY: Keithley Instruments SRL· VJale S. Girnignano 38 • 20146Milario· ＰＲｾＴＸＳＰｪｏｏＺＸ '-'hx; 02-48302274JAPAN: Keithley Instruments Far East KK· Sumiyosbi24 Bldg., Room 201·2-24-2Sumiyoshi-cho·Naka-ku, Yokohama 231 ·81-45-201-2246·Fax: 81-45-201-2247NETHERLANDS: Keithlc}' Instruments BV· AvelingenWes149·4202MS Gorinchem· Poslbus559:·4200AN Gorinchem·01830-35333·Fax: 01830-30821SWITZERLAND: Keithley Instruments SA·Kriesbachslrasse4 • 8600Diibendorf· 01-821-9444·Pax: 01-820-3081TAIWAN: Keithley Instruments Taiwan· ｾｲ Floor, Number 6·Section3,.Mic Chuan East Road·Taipei, R.O.C.· 886-2-509-4465·Fax: 886-2-509-4473


Model 196 SystemDMMInstruction Manual

©1986, ｋ･ｩｴｨｬｾ Instruments,Inc.Test Instrumentation Group

All rights reserved.Cleveland,Ohio, U.S.A

fourth PrintingJanuary1992DocumentNumber:196-901-01Rev. 0


Thefollowing safetyprecautionsshouldbeobservedbeforeusingthis productandany associatedinstrumentation.Al-thoughsomeinstrumentsandaccessorieswouldnonnallybeusedwith non-hazardousvoltages,therearesituati6Ii.swherehazardousconditionsmaybepresent

Thisproductis intendedfor useby qualifiedpersonnelwhorecognizeshockhazardsandarefamiliar with thesafetypre-cautionsrequiredtoavoidpossibleinjury. Readtheoperatinginfonnationcarefullybeforeusingtheproduct.

Exerciseextremecautionwhenashockhazard is present.Le-thal voitagemay be presenton cableconnectorjacks or testfixtures.TheAmericanNationalStandardsInstitute(ANSI)statesthata shockhazardexistswhenvoltagelevelsgreaterthan 30V RMS, 42.4V peak,or 60VDC arepresent.A goodsafetypracticeis to expectthathazardousvoltageis presentin any unknown circuit before measuring.

Before operating an instrument, make sure the line cord isconnectedto a properlygroundedpowerreceptacle.Inspectthe connectingcables,test leads,and jumpersfor possiblewear,cracks,or breaksbeforeeachuse.

For maximum safety,do not touch theproduct, testcables,oranyotherinstrumentswhile poweris appliedto thecircuitundertest.ALWAYS removepowerfrom theentiretestsys-temanddischargeanycapacitorsbefore:connectingor dis-connecting cables or jumpers, installing or removingswitching cards,or making internal changes,suchasinstall-ing or removing jumpers.

Do not touchanyobjectthatcouldprovideacurrentpathtothe common side of the circuit under test or power line(earth)ground.Alwaysmakemeasurementswith dry handswhile standingon a dry, insulatedsurfacecapableof with-standingthevoltagebeingmeasured.

Safety Precautions

Do not exceed!:he maximum signallevelsof the instrumentsandaccessories, asdefined in thespecificationsandoperatinginfor.ma,tion, and a$ shownon the instru_ment or test fixturerear panel,or switching card.

Do not connectswitchingcardsdirectly to unlimitedpowercircuits. They are intended to be usedwith impedancelimit-ed sources.NEVER connectswitchingcardsdirectly to ACmain. When connectingsourcesto SW'itching cards, installprotectivedevicesto limit fault currentandvoltageto thecard.

When fusesare used.in aprod uct, replacewith sametypeandrating for continued protection againstfire hazard.

Chassisconnectionsmust only beusedasshield connectionsfor measuringcircuits,NOT assafetyearthgroundconnec-tions.

IfyouareusingatestfIXture, keepthelid closedwhilepowerisappliedto thedeviceundertest.Safeoperationrequirestheuseof a lid interlock.

Ifa @screwis presentonthetestfixture, connectit fo safetyearthgroundusing#18AWG or largerwire.

The f symbolonaninstrumentor accessoryindicatesthatｾＱＰＰＰ or moremaybepresenton thetenninals.Referto theproduct manual for detailedoperating information.

Instrumentation and accessoriesshould not be connectedtohumans.

Maintenanceshouldbeperformedby qualified serviceper-sonnel.Before perforining any maintenance,disconnecttheline cordandall testcables.


SPECIFICATIONS

UNEARITY: Linearity is definedasthemaximumdeviationfrom astraightline betweenthe readingsat zero and full range:10ppmof rangefor3V-300V ranges;15ppmof rangefor 300mV range;at 23QC ±lQC.

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE INPUT: 300V rms, 425V peak,whicheverisｬ･ｳｳ

DC VOLTS(6'12 Digits)

ACCURAcyl

TEMPERATURE± (%rdg + counts) COEFFlctENT

INPUT 24 Hr./ 90 Days, 1 Year, ±(%rdg +counts)/OCRANGE RESOlUTION RESISTANq '23" .:l;JOC l8°.-2c&°C _18°_28"C 0"_18" &,: ｾｳＮﾰＭＵＰﾰ｣［ＮＮ

300 mV 100 nV >1 en 0.0020 +.203 0.005 + 2.Cf 0.0.08 + 203 0.0006 + 103 V 1 p.V >1 ,GO - ＭＭｏｾｏｏＱ + 10 0.003 + 20 OJ)03$+".w 0.0004+ 1

3D. _V 10 p.V 11 MQ 0.0015 + 10 0.006 + 20 0.008 + 30 OJ)913"+ 3300 V 100 p.V 10.1MO 0.003 + 10 0.009 + 20 0+009 + 3d 0.0013 +- 1

lFor SVi-digit accuracy,divide counterrorbyJO. For 4Yz-cUgit ae<:uracy,counterror is 5 (except15 on 300mV range).For 3Y:z.digitaccuracy,counterror is 5.

2Relativeto calibrationstandards.3Whenproperly zeroed.

ANALOG SETTLINGTIME: <1ms«2mson 300mV range),to 0,01%of stepchange.

CMRR: >UOdB at dc, 50Hz or 60Hz (±0,05%)with ｬｬ､ｬｩｮｾ･ｩｴｨ･ｲｬ･｡Ｎ､

NMRR: >60dB at 50Hz or 60Hz (±0,05%),

TRMS AC VOLTSＨＵＱＮｊ Digits)

ACCURAcy1

±(O/ordg + l:o.unts) 1 YearT lS"-28°C ｟ＮＧＭ __

0.01 dB

0,01 dB

REsqgmoN

3'

0:4

1,1

0.2

20Hz-20kHzINPUT

-34 to +49 dB(20mV to 3OOV)...54 to -34 dB(2mV to 2OmV)ITypicaI.

TEMPERATURECOEFFICIENT(O"-18"C & 28"_50"0:< ± (0.1 x applicableaccuracyspecification)/OCbelow 20kHzT

±(0.2x) for 20kHz to 100kHz.CMRR: >60dB at 50Hz or 60Hz (±0.05%) with 1kll in either lead.dB (Ref. ｾ IV): ACCURACY idB

1 Year, 18"'-28"'CＲＰｾｺＺＭｾＰＹｊｩｬｩｺ

RANGE RESOLUTION 20Hz-50Hz2 SOHz-200Hz2 200Hz-I0kHz2 lQklh-20kHz2 ＲＰｫｬｬｺｾＱＰＰｾ

300mV 1 p.V 2 + 100 0.3 + 100 0.15 + 100 0.4 ... 200 2.0 + 3003 V 10 p.V 2 + 100 0.3 + 100 -0.15 + 100 0.3 + 20IJ 1.5 + 300

30 V 100 p.V 2 + 100 0.3 + 100 0.15 + 100 OA 200 1.5 + 300300 V 1 mV 2 + 100 0_3 .+ 100 0.15 + 100 OA ｾｏｏ 1.5 + 300

lFo. 4th_dlgit accuracy,divide counterror by 10. For 3lh-digit accuracy,counterror is 5. In 3lh· and4lh·digit modes,specifk.aHonsapply for inputs >200Hz. . --

2Porsinewaveinputs >2,000counts.3For sinewaveinputs >20,000counts.

RESPONSE:True root meansquare,ac coupled.CRESTFACTOR (ratio of peak to rms): Up to 3:1 allowable.NONSINUSOIDALINPUTS:Forfundamentalfrequencies<1kHz,crest

factor <3, add0.25%of readingto specifiedaccuracyfor 300mVand3V ranges;add0.6%of readingto specifiedaccuracyfor 30V and300Vranges.

INPUT IMPEDANCE: IMll shuntedby <l20pF.3dB BANDWIDTH: 300kHz typical.MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE INPUT: 300V =, 425V peak, 10' V'Hz,

whicheveris less.SETTLING TIME: 1 secondto within 0.1% of changein reading.

OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE: 5.5V maximum,LINEARITY: Linearity is defined asthemaximumdeviationfrom astraight

line betweenthe readingsat zeroandfull range:20ppmof rangefor3000-30kOranges,at 23°C ±1°C.

OHMS(61ft Digits)

ACCURAcyl

TEMPERATURE± (o/ordg + counts) COEFFICIENT

NOMINAL 24 Hr.,s 9Q ｄ｡ｙｉＡｬ c 1.'ye..ar,. .±(%rdg + countsWeRANGE RESOLUTION l-SHORT )30. .,#l°C - 18°_28"'C- 18°_28°C 0°_18'" '*' ,2,8°,-9qoC

300 02 100 p.O 1.7 rnA 0.0025+ 203 0.008 + 203 0.010 + 2Q3_ 0.001 + 73 kU2 1 m.O: 1.7rnA 0'.0025+ 20 0'.005 + ·20 0.007 + 20 0.0Q1 + 1

30 ｾ 10 mO 160 p.A 0.0025 + 20 0.005 + 20 0.007 + 20 OJ10l + 1300 Idl 100mIl 50 p.A 0.006 + 20 0.020 + 20 0,021 + 20 0.004 + 1

3 MO 1 0 5 p.A 0.007 -+ 20 O.OW + 20 0.021 + 20 0.004 + 130 MO 10 0 0.5 p.A 0.06 + 50 ILl + 50 0.1 +-50 0.030.+ .1

3OOM04 1 kO O.5..p.A 2.0 _+ 5 2.0 + 5 2.0 + 5 0.30 + 1

lFor 5Vz-digit accuracy,divide counterrorby 10. For 41h-digif accuracy,counterror is 5 (except15 on 3000: range).For 31h-digitaccuracy,count error is 5.

24-wire accuracy,3000-30kOranges.3Whenproperlyzeroed.4Resolutionon 3OOMO rangeis limited to 5Yl digits.5Relativeto calibrationstandards.

CONRGURATlON:Automatic2- or4-'Wire.Offsetcompensationavailableon3OOQ-30kOranges,requiresproperzeroing.Allowablecompensationof ± 10mV on 3OO11 rangeand ± 100mV on 3kll and30kll ranges,

MAX. ALLOWABLE INPUT: 300V rms, 425V peak, whicheveris Jess.


DC AMPS ACCURAcY'(5' h Digits) ±("/ordg H0unts)

RANGE _ RESOLUTION 1 Year, 18°-28°C

MAXIMUMVOLTAGEBURDEN

MAXIMUM READING RATES1DCV, DCA, ACV, ACA READINGS/SECOND

TRMS AC AMPS ACCURAcY'M.AXIMUM

(SIn Digits) 1 Year, ISO-28°C -VOLTAGE

RANGE RESOLUTION 20Hz-45Hz 45Hz-10klUBURDEN

ORM_S R,EADINGS1SECOND

Continuousinto ExternalTrigger into TriggeredviaInternal Buffer Internal Buffer lEEE-48SBus

RESOw Mt1X: MUX: MUX:--LUTION Off On Off On Off On

3Y1-Digit 53 25 57 25 37 234V,·Digit 43 20 47 21 30 19

_..5V,cDigit 16 (13) 9.5 (7.5) 18 (15) 9.5 (7.5) IS (12.5) ＹＮＵｾＨＷＮＵ

6'1z.Digit' 9 (7.5) 0.3_(0.25) 0.3 (0.25)

Continuousinto ExternalTrigger into liiggeredvialntemal Buffer Internal Buffer IEEE-488Bus

RESo- MUX: MUX: MUX:LUTION Off On Off On Off On

3'h-Digit 1000 1000 237 80 112 58c __ 4'h.Digit :ll3 333 145 _63 91 49

5'h-Digit 35 (29) 9 (1.5) 40 (33) 9 (7.5) 35(29) 9 (7.5)6'h-Digit2 9 (1.5) 0.3 (0.25) 0.3 (0.25)

OffsetCompensatedOhms:RatesareO.sx normalmux on ohmsrates.

I Readingratesarefor on-rangeon'scalereadingswith internalfilter off, for 3V, 3kO,and 3mA ranges.6'h- and 5'h-digit rates are for 60Hz operation. Values inparenthesesare for 50Hzoperation.

2lntemal filter- on.

IEEE-488BUS IMPLEMENTATIONMULTILINE COMMANDS: DCL, LLO, SOC, GET, GTL, UNT, UNL,

.- SPE, SPD.

UNILlNE COMMANDS: IFC, REN,EOI, SRQ, ATN.

INTERFACEFUNcr:id'NS:SH1, AH1, T6, TEO, IA, LEO, SIU; RL1, FPO,DCl, OIl, CO, ｅｬ

PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETERS:Range,Function,Zero, IntegrationPeriod, Filter, EOI, Trigger, Terminator,Delay,SOO-ReadingStorage,Calibration, Display, Multiplex, Status, SemceRequest,Self Test,OutputFonnat,TRANSLATOR.

OAV004 V0.4 V0.5 V2 V

0,01 dB

0,01 dB

--RESOLUTION

0.2

0.9

INPUT

-34 to +69 dB(20IlA to 3A)

-5410 -34 dB(4<A to 20IlA)

300 JLA 1 nA 0.09 + 203 rnA 10 nA 0.05 + 10

30 mA 100nA 0.05 + 10300 mA 1 p.A 0.05 + 10

3 A 10 p.A 0.09 + 10

'4lf,.digit counterror is 20. 3Yt·digit counterror is 5.

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE INPUT: 3A, 250V.OVERLOAD PROTECTION:3A fuse(250V),accessiblefrom rearpanel.TEMPERATURECOEFFICIENT(oo·lSoC& 2S°-50°C):

< ± (0.1 x applicableaccuracyspecification)f°c.

300 p.A 1 nA 2 + 100 0.9 + 100 0.4V3 mA 10 nA 2 + 100 0.6 + 100 OAV

30 mA 100 nA 2 + 100 0.6 + 100 0.4V300mA l/tA :2 +100 0.6 + iCKl O.5V

3 A 10 JLA 2 + 100 0.6 + 100 2 V, For sinewaveinputs >2000counts.For 4V,-digit accuracy,_dividecounterrorby10. For3'h-digit accuracy,counterror is 5. In 3V,·and4'12-digit modes,specifica-tions apply for sinewaveinputs >200Hz.

RESPONSE:True root meansquare,ac coupled.CRESTFACTOR(ratioof peakto rms):Up to 3:1allowableat 'h full scale.NONSINUSOIDAL INPUTS:Specifiedaccuracyfor fundamentalfrequen.

cies <1kHz, crestfactor <3.SETTLING TIME: 1 secondto within 0.1% of changein reading.MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE INPUT: 3A, 250V.OVERLOAD PROTECTION:3A fuse(250V) accessiblefrom rearpanel.TEMPERATURECOEFF£CIENT(OO-lS0C& :1,8°--5(1°C):

< ± (0.1 x applicableaccuracyspecificationWc.dB (Ref. = lmA): ACCURACY ±dB

1 Year, ISO-28°C20Hz-10kHz

GENERALRANGING: Manualor autoranging.

MAXIMUM READING: 3029999countsin 6Yz-digit mode.

ZERO: Controlsubtractson-scalevaluefrom subsequenfreadingsorallowsvalue to be progranuned.

CONNECTORS:Analog: Switch selectablefront or rear, safety jacks.Digital: TRIGGERinput andVOLTMETER COl\IT:'LETE outputon rearpanel, BNCs.

WARMUP: 2 hours to ratedaccuracy.

DISPLAY: 10, O.S-in.alphanumericLED digits with decimalpoint andpolarity. FunctionandIEEE-488busstatusalso indicated.

ISOLATION: InputLa to IEEELo orpowerline ground:500Vpeak5x10"max. V·Hz product. >10°0paralleledby 400pF.

DATA MEMORY: 1 to 500 locations,programmable.Measurementinter-vals selectablefrom Ims to 999999insor triggered.

BENCH READING RATE: 5 readings/second(2fsecondon 30MO and3OOMO ranges).

FILTER: Weightedaverage(exponential).Programmableweighting,1 to1/99. ---

OPERATINGENVIRONMENT: 0°-50°<:' 0%-80%relativehumidity upto 35°C; linearlyderate3% RHloC, 35°Cw50°C(0%-60%RH up to 28°Con300MQ range).

STORAGE ENVIRONMENT: _25° to +65°C.

.POWER;105wl25Vor 210-250V,rearpanelswitchselected,50Hzor60Hz,·--30VA max. 9o.:110Vand180-220Vversionsavailableuponrequest.

DIMENSIONS,WEIGHT: U7mmhigh x 216mmwide x 359mmdeep(5 in. x 8th in. x 14% in.). Net weight 3.7kg (8 lbs.). .

. .. ACCESSORIESAVAILABLE: .

ModeI1019A-l: ｓｾＭｩｮ Single Fixed Rack Mounting Kit. ModeI1019A-2: ｓｾＭｩｮ Dual Fixed RackMounting KitModel 10195-1: Slf4-in. Single Slide RackMounting KitModel 10195-2: STU-in. Dual Slide RackMounting KitModel 1651: SO-AmpereShuntModel 1681: Clip-On Test Lead Set ｾModel 1682A: RF Probe .Model 1685: Clamp-OnCurrentProbeModel 17S1: GeneralPurposeTest LeadsModel 1754: UniversalTest LeadKitModel 5806: Kelvin Qip LeadsModel 7007-1: ShieldedIEEE-488Cable,1mModel 7007-2: ShieldedIEEE-488Cable,2mModel 7008-3: IEEE-488Cable,3 ft. (0.9m)Model 7008·6: IEEE-488Cable,6 ft. (1.8m)

Pricesand specificationssubjectto changewithout notice.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1-GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 INTRODUCTION " 1-1 ..1.2 FEATURES , '. ". , .- :'- .- " 1-11.3 WARRANTY INFORMATION '" 1-11.4 MANUAL ADDENDA 1-11.5 SAFETY SYMBOLS AND TERMS . .. .. . . . . . ... . .. . . . . ... .. .... . .. . . . .. . . . ... .. . . .. ... . . . 1-11.6 SPECIFICATIONS " 1-21.7 INSPECTION " 1-21.8 USING THE MODEL 196 MANUAL " 1-21.9 GETTING STARTED : " 'L' " H1.10 ACCE5S0RIES , , o,o·,-:ci,·o.' ',,, ,..' , : .-.-, ".,.- " 1-3

SECTION 2-BASIC DMM OPERATIONS

2.12.22.2.12.2.22.2.32.2.42.32.3.12.3.22.3.32.3.42.42.4.12.4.22.4.32.52.62.6.12.6.22.6.32.6.42.6.52.6.62.6.72.6.82.6.92.6.102.6.n2.72.7.12.7.22.7.32.7.42.7.52.7.62.7.72.7.82.7.9

INTRODUCTION 2-1POWERUP PROCEDURES " 2-1

Line Power " 2-1Power-UpSequence : :.........................2-1FactoryDefault Conditions 2-1User ProgrammedConditions " 2-2

FRONT PANEL FAMILIARIZATION " 2-2Display andIndicators '" 2-2Controls . .. .. . .. .. . . . . .. .. . . . .. . . . . . ... .. . . .. .. .. . .. . .. . . . .. .. . . . . .. . . . . . 2-2Input Terminals 2-4CalibrationEnableSwitch.. . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . . .. .. . . . .. .. . . .. . .. . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . . . .. . . . .. .. 2-4

REAR PANEL FAMILIARIZATION '" 2-5Controls " 2-5ConnectorsandTerminals " 2-5Fuses -... . .. .... . .. . .. .. 2-6

ERRORDISPLAY ME5SAGES :. Ｚ : '- 2-6BASIC MEASUREMENTS " 2-6

Warm Up Period...........................................................................2-7Zero.................................... 2-7Filter " 2-8DC Voltage Measurements ;._.", c· ••• , ,..... 2-9

..Low-Level MeasurementConsIderations.....................................................2-10ResistanceMeasurements... .. .. . . .... . . . . .. . .. . . . .. .. . . .. . .. . .. .. .. . . . .. .. . . . .. .. . . . .. 2-11TRMS AC VoltageMeasurements... .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . . .. .. .. . .. . .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. . . . . .. .. . . . . 2-12CurrentMeasurements(DC or TRMSAC) :...............................2-13dB Measurements.. . . .. .. .. . . . . . ... . .. .. . .. . . . . . ... . . .. .. . . . .. .. . . .. .. .. . . .. .. . . . . .. .. . . .. 2-13'TRMS Considerations.. .. . . . .. .. .. .. .. ... . . . .. . .. . . . . .. .. .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. .. . ... 2-15dB Applications " : .-....... 2-17

FRONT PANEL PROGRAMS . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. .. ... .. .. .. .... . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. 2-17Program0 (Menu) ....... . .. .. .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . . .. .. .. ... .. .. . ... .. .. .. .. .. .... 2-18Program2 (Resolution). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 2-18Program4 (MX+B) 2-18Program5 (HI/LO/Pass) : .. .- 2-19Program6 (Multiplexer, Auto/CAL) 2-20Program30 (Save) 2-20Program31 (IEEE Address) 2-21Program32 (Line Frequency) _ 2-21Program33 (Diagnostic) 2-22


2.7.10 Program34 (MX+B Parameters) 2-222.7.11 Program35 (HI/LO Limits) 2-222.7.12 Program36 (Calibration) .. . . . .. .. .. . . . • . .. . . . . .. . .. . •.. . . . .. .. . .. . . . .. .. . .. .. . . . • •.. . .. . 2-232.7.13 Program37 (Reset) 2.232.7.14 ProgramlJ , , , 2:242.7.15 ProgramZERO : - : . :.- 2-242.7.16 ProgramFILTER _. . .. . .. . . . ... . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . ... . . ... .. .. . . • . 2-242.7.17 ProgramdB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . .•. .. . .. . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... .. . . .. 2-252.8 FRONTPANEL TRIGGERING , . .. .. ... .. • .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. 2-252.8.1 One-ShotTriggering : , . . . . ... . . .. . . . . .. . . . ... . .. 2-252.8.2 TriggeringReadingsInto DataStore , 2.252.9 EXTERNAL TRIGGERING 2-262.9.1 ExternalTrigger 2-262.9.2 VoltmeterComplete .. . .. . . . . .. . . . . . ... . . . .. . . . .. . 2-26 .2.9.3 . TriggeringExample 2-27

SECTION 3-IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

3.13.23.33.43.53.63.6.13.6.23.73.7.13.7.23.83.8.13.8.23.8.33.8.43.8.53.8.63.8.73.8.83.9 -3.9.13.9.23.9.33.9.43.9.53.9.63.9.73.9.83.9.93.9.103.9.113.9.123.9.133.9.143.9.153.9.163.9.173.9.18

II

INTRODUCTION 3-1A SHORT-CUTTO IEEE-488OPERtmON , .. . . .. .. . . 3-1BUS CONNECTIONS 3-4ｾａｃｾｃｔｉｏ CODES 3-5PRIMARY ADDRESSSELECTION 3-6CONTROLLERPROGRAMMING " 3.6

ControllerHandlerSoftware.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . .. . . . . . . . . ... . . . . ... . . . ... . .. .. 3'7BASIC InterfaceProgranxntingStatements , 3-7

FRONT PANEL ASPECTSOF IEEE-488OPERATION _.. 3-7Front PanelError Messages , . .- .-.. , '. 3-7IEEE-488StatusIndicatorsandLOCAL Key _ 3-10

GENERAL BUS COMMAND PROGRAMMING 3-11REN (RemoteEnable) 3-11!FC (InterfaceGear) 3-11LLO (Local Lockout) . . .. .. .. . .. .. . . . . . . . ... .. . .. . .. . . • .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .... . .. 3-11GTL (Go To Local) .. . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . .. . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . ... .. . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . .. 3-12DCL (Device Gear). . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . .. . . . . . . ... . . .. . . . . . . . . ... . . . .. . . .. . . . . . ... 3-12

.SDC (SelectiveDevice Gear) _ 3-13GET (GroupExecuteTrigger) , 3-13SerialPolling (SPE,SPD) .- ｾ . . . .. . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . 3·13

DEVICE-DEPENDENTCOMMAND PROGRAMMING 3-14Execute(X) : :.- : '- .. .- . . . ... . .. 3-17Function (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 3-17

ｾＡＨｧＩＮＺＺＺＺＺＺＺＺＺＺＺＺＺＺＺＺＺ :::::: ::::: ::::::::: :::::: ::::::: :::::: :::::::::::::::::::::: ::: ｾＺFilter (P) 3-19Rate(S) .- :-:: .: . . . . . . . ... . . .. . . .. . . . .. .. . . . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . ... 3-19Trigger Mode (T) . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . ... • . . .. .. . . . . .. .. . .. .. . . . . •.. . . . . . • . . . . 3-20ReadingMode (B) 3-20DataStoreInterval (Q) and Size (I) .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. . . . . ... . .. . .. . .. .. .. . . . .. .. . . . 3-20Value (V) and Calibration(C) .. . .. .. .. . .. • .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. . . .. • .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. •• 3-22Default Conditions(L) . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . .. . . . . . .. . . .. .. .. . . . .. .. . . . . .. . • . . . .. . . . . . . . ... . . . 3-23DataFormat(G) : : '- . .- ＳｾＲ .SRQ Mask (M) andSerialPoll Byte Format.. .. . .. . . . .. .. . . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. . .. .. . . 3-24EO! andBus Hold-off Modes(K) .. .. .. . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. . .. • .. . .. .. . .. . 3-26Terminator(Y) , , 3-27Status(U) 3-27Auto/Cal Multiplex (A). . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . ... . . . .. . . . . . ... . . . . .. .. . .. .. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Delay (W) _.. . . • • . . . . . . ... . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . ... . . .. • .. • . .• 3-31


3.9.19 Self-Testa> _._.._ _3-313.9.20 Hit Button (H) '" " ..............•." 3-313.9.21 Display (D) " 3-323.9.22 InternalFilter (N) .......................................................•.•.•.••...,....... 3-333.10 TRANSLAJDRSOFTWARE...................................................•....••......" 3-333.10.1 TranslatorFormat.............................................................•.....'....." 3-343.10.2 Wild Card ($) .........................................•.••..•••••.__ .•_••••..•,••.•.•.•.•" 3-353.10.3 NEW andOLD ,.•.. '," .. '," ',_'" ｾ 3-353.10.4 CombiningTranslatorWords .............•.................................................3-353.10.5 CombiningTranslatorWordsWith Keithley IEEE-488Commands 3-363.10.6 ExecutingTranslatorWords andKeithley IEEE Commands '" 3-363.10.7 SAVE :. ;. """ ' " 3-373.10.8 'LIST "co •••••• : •••••••••••••••••••••••••• : ••••• _ •••••••••••••••••• 3-373.10.9 FORGET : ............•.....•'"................................................3·373.11 BUS DATA TRANSMISSIONTIMES " 3-37

SECTION 4-PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

4.1 INTRODUCTION 4-14.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDmONS _ '" ._.•... ｾ '" 4-14.3 INmAL CONDmONS....•..•••......•..•...............'.•..............•.•....••........__ 4-14.4 RECOMMENDEDTEST EQUU'MENT ; _ '" 4-14.5 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES ''0 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • •• 4-24.5.1 DC Volts Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .•• .•. •. . . . . . . ... . . . ... . .. . 4-24.5.2 TRMS AC Volts Verification 4-24.5.3 OhmsVerification '.. ＬＬＬｾＬＬＬ ..........•.•.........','- ' ' 4-34.5.4 DC CurrentVerification : , .. ; : : :.:::':. . .. . . . .. 4-44.5.5 TRMS AC CurrentVerification. . . . . . ... .. ... . . . ... . . . . . . . . .•.. .. . . .. . . . . . . . ... . . . .. . . . . ... 4-5

SECTION 5-PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

5.1 INTRODUCTION ＭＮｾｾ .-..-.-.- 5-15.2 OVERALL FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 5-15.3 ANALOG CIRCUITRy............................................•............................,5-15.3.1 Input SignalConditioning " : •.. " , . . . . . . . . ... 5-15.3.2 Multiplexer 5-45.3.3 +2.1V ReferenceSource ｾ .. ; . .- :... '•................5-75.3.4 Input Buffer Amplifier " . ＺＺＺＭＺｾＺ . . •. . . .. . . .. 5-75.4 AID CONVERTER : :;; .. : ' ｾ '. . . . . . • . . ... .• . .. 5-75.5 CONTROL CIRCUITRY : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 5-85.6 DIGITAL CIRCUITRY .........................................................•..............5-85.6.1 Microcomputer '.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 5-85.6.2 Display Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . ... 5-95.7 POWERSUPPLIES... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . ... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 5-9

SECTION 6-MAINTENANCE

6.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................•........................6-16.2 LINE VOITAGE SELECTION.. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . ... . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ... 6-16.3 FUSEREPLACEMENT.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .• . . ••.. . . .. 6-16.3.1 Line Fuse.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 6-16.3.2 CurrentFuse , _...............•..'" _., , :, " "' , . 6-26.4 CALffiRATION 6·26.4.1 RecommendedCalibrationEquipment... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 6-26.4.2 EnvironmentalConditions ',' ,_, '" 6·3

III


6.4.3 Warm-UpPeriod ...............................•: ..........•......................, 6-36.4.4 CAL ENABLE Switch _........•..............., _. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . .. 6-36.4.5 Front PanelCalibration ...............••.............._ ,. 6-36.4.6 IEEE-488Bus Calibration '" . . . . . . . . ... . .. . . . . . ..• . •. . •••. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 6-46.4.7 CalibrationSequence..............••.. .•......,.... . ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..•. •. 6-46.4.8 DCVolts Calibration.. . . . . . . . . . ... . . . ... .. . .. . .. .. . . . . . ... . . . .. .. . . . ... ..... .. .. . . . . .... 6-56.4.9 ResistanceCalibration.. .. .. . . .. .. . . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . .. .. .. . .. . . . . . .. .. . .. 6-66.4.10 TRMS AC Volts Calibration : . : : " 6-76.4.11 DC CurrentCalibration ｾ _.. ,. 6·9 .6.4.12 TRMS AC CurrentCalibration _.. .. . . .. .. . 6·106.5 DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS , , , 6-116.6 SPECIAL HANDLING OF STATIC-SENSITIVF:.DEVICES. '.' , , .....••..•, , .. 6-126.7 TROUBLESHOOTING 6-126.7.1 RecommendedTestEquipment. __ , .. __ .. .. . . .. 6-146.7.2 PowerUp Self Test " _ , 6-146.7.3 Program33 - Self DiagnosticProgram " . . 6-146.7.4 PowerSupplies __.._.... . . . . . . . .•. . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 6_156.7.5 Signa] ConditioningChecks _ '" .. . . .. .. .. .. . 6-156.7.6 Digital andDisplay Circuitry Checks 6-15

SECTION 7-REPLACEABLE PARTS

7.1 INTRODUCTION :: : .. : '" : " 7-17.2 PARTS UST , . __ _ _ " 7-17.3 ORDERING INFORMATION .. __ . . . . . . ... .. .. . .. .. __ , '.' .701 .7.4 FACTORY SERVICE " :: :. ':."'0._:_' " , .,.•. ,.. __ ..•.. '.',' ........•...•..'.' 7-17.5 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND COMPONENTLOCATION DRAWINGS : 7-1

APPENDIX A

AScn CHARACTER CODESAND IEEE·488MULTIUNE INTERFACE COMMAND MESSAGES.... Al

APPENDIX B

ffiM PC/XT andMODEL 8573A PROGRAMMING B-1

APPENDIX C

CONTROLLERPROGRAMS Col

APPENDIX D

IEEE-488BUS OVERVIEW _ , 0-1

iv


LIST OF TABLES

SECTION 2-BASIC DMM OPERATION

2-1 FactoryDefault Conditions : . ; .-. : 2-22-2 Error Messages -..- , 2-62-3 ResistanceRanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 2-122-4 CorrespondingVoltageReferenceLevelsfor ImpedanceReference.. . .. . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . .. 2-152-5 COmparisonof AverageandTroviS Meter Readings : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 2-162-6 Front PanelPrograms ; -; ; . ; ..-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 2-172-7 Display Resolution ................•........................•_.................................2-182-8 ExampleMX + B Readings ; - : :.: ::. 2-19


3-1 IEEE-488CommandsUsedto SelectFunctionandRange.. , , 3-33-2 IEEE ContactDesignation .- , 3_53-3 Model 196 InterfaceFunctionCodes 3-63-4 BASIC StatementsNecessaryto SendBus Commands , 3-73-5 Front PanelIEEE-488Messages - : : , 3-83-6 GeneralBus CommandsandAssociatedBASIC Statements.- .-................3-103-7 FactoryDefault Conditioris ｾ : - ; : .- : " .. 3-123-8 Device-DependentCommandSummary 3-15.3-9 RangeCommandSummary , ,co •••••••••• " •• 'c' • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• 3-183-10 RateCommandSummary.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . •. . • . . . . ... . . . . . . . ... . . ... 3-193-11 High SpeedDataStore 3-223-12 SRQ CommandParameters..................................................•.............__ 3-253-13 Bus Hold-off Tunes .............•...._ _.. , _•..........: . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . ... 3:263-14 TranslatorReservedWordsandCharacter 3-333-15 TranslatorError Messages... : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-343-16 Trigger To Reading-ReadyTimes (DCV Function).. .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. .. . . .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. 3-37


4-1 RecommendedTestEquipment , 4-14-2 Limits for DCV Volts Verification 4-24-3 Limits for TRMS AC Volts Verification : .- , 4-34-4 Limits for OhmsVerification ; , 4-44-5 Limits for DC CurrentVerification , 4-44-6 Limits for AC CurrerifVerification :..............................4-5


5-1 Input Buffer Amplifier (U35) Gain Corifiguration. . . .. .. . . . .. .. . . .. .. .. ........ .. ...... .. .. ...... 5-7

v



6-1 Line VoltageSelection."" ...•"." " " " " .. " . .. .. .. . . . .. .. .. .. . .. ... . . . . ... . . . 6-16-2 Line FuseReplacement ". 6-26-3 CurrentFuseReplacement " . . . . .. .. . .. . . . .. . . . . . . ... . . ... . .. . •. . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . 6-264 RecommendedCalibrationEquipment 6-26-5 DC Volts Calibration " " " " " . . . . . . . .. .. 6-56-6 ResistanceCalibration " "." " .. "....................6-66-7 TRMS AC Volts Calibration " " ',' " .. 00 .. •• 6-76-8 DC CurrentCalibration 00 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ｾ " " 6-106·9 TRMS AC CurrentCalIbration " 00 00 " 6-116-10 RecommendedTroubleshootingEquipment " 00 00 00 .. .. • • • .. • • .. 6-146-11 Model 196TroubleshootingMode 00 .. • • • • •• • • .. .. .. • • .. • • •• 6-156-12 PowerSupplyChecks 00 00. •• • .. •• 6-186-13 Digital Circuitry Checks 00 • • .. • • 6-186-14 Display CircuitryChecks 00 00 00 , 00 • _ 00 6-19


7-1 Display Board,PartsList." "" ".:: :" _"" .. : .. : ,,: 00 7-37-2 Digital Board, PartsList. " _ " . . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. ... .. .. 7-87-3 Analog'Board,PartsList 00 00 _ • • • • • • 7-197-4 Model 196 MiscellaneousPartsList " 00 • • • .. .. .. • • • • .. 7-33

APPENDIX B

B-1 BASIC StatementsNecessaryto SendBus Commands.. 00 • • • .. • • • • • .. .. .. .. • .. • .. • .. .. .. • .. .. • •• B-1

APPENDIX D

D-l IEEE-488Bus CommandSummary 00 ••••••• 00 00 .. • .. • • • • • • • .. • •• D-3D-2 HexadecimalandDecimalCommandCodes 00 " 00 .. .. • .. .. .. .. • .. •• D-7D-3 Typical AddressedCommandSequence... " " " 00 " .. " .. • • .. • .. • .. .. .. • .. D-7D4 Typical Device-DependentCommandSequence "" " ;" " D-7D'5 IEEE CommandGroup.. 00 " " • • • .. • • .. .. .. • D-7

vi


LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

SECTION 2-BASIC DMM OPERATION

2-1 Model 196 Front Panel. " 2-32-2 Model 196RearPanel ...............................................................••.......2·52·3 DC VoltageMeasurements.............................•..........•.................••.•.•...2·102-4 Two.:ferminalResistanceMeasurements " 2-112-5 Four.:ferminalResistanceMeasurements '.' _....•.......'" ..__ .•....•..•.... 2-122-6 TRMS AC VoltageMeasurement.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ... 2-122-7 CurrentMeasurements " 2-132-8 ExternalTrigger PulseSpecifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . ... 2-262-9 Voltmeter CompletePulseSpecifications.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 2-272-10 ExternalTriggeringExample.........•.ｾｾ 2-27


3-1 Typical ProgramFlow C1lart '.'" .....•.................................•.................3-23-2 lEEE-488Connector : .................•.................:.. 3-43-3 lEEE-488Connections· ｾ , , ,. 3-43-4 lEEE-488ConnectorLocation.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .•. . . . . . . ... . . . ... 3-53-5 ContactAssignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 3-53-6 GeneralDataFormat '.' . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... .. . . . ... 3-233-7 SRQMask and SerialPoll Byte Format...............................................•...•, . •. 3-243-8 VO MachineStatusWord andDefault Values _. . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 3-283-9 Vl Error StatusWord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . .. . . ... . . .. . . . . . . . ... 3-303-10 Hit Button CommandNumbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . ... 3-32


4-1 ConnectionsJorDC Volts Verification " " 4-24-2 Connectionsfor TRMS AC Volts Verificatiou , " , "." 4-34-3 Connectionsfor OhmsVerification (30011-301>llRange) " 4-44-4 Connectionsfor OhmsVerification (300kll-300Mll Ranges) 4-44-5 Connectionsfor DC CurrentVerification 4-54-6 Connectionsfor TRMS AC CurrentVerification ._ 4-5


5-1 OverallBlock Diagram " 5-25-2 Input ConfigurationDuring 2 and4-TerminalResistanceMeasurement.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 5-35-3 ResistanceMeasurementSimplified Circuitry .. . .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. .... . .. . . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. . . . 5-45-4 JFETMultiplexer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . .. . . . . . . ...... . . ... .. . .. . .. .. . . . ... . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . . ... 5-55-5 Multiplexer Phases. . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . 5-65-6 AiD ConverterSimplified Schematic.. . . ... .. . .. .. . .. . .. .. ... . .. . . .. .. .. . . . •.. .. . . .. . . . . .. . 5-8

vii



6-1 DC Volts CalibrationConfiguration(300mV and3V Ranges). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 6-56-2 DC Volts CalibrationConfiguration(3OV-::!OOVRanges) 6-56-3 Four-WireResistanceCalibrationConfiguration(300rl-30kQRanges) 6-66-4 TwoWire ResistanceCalibrationConfiguration(300kQ-300MQRanges). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 6-76-5 Flowchartof AC Volts CalibrationProcedure... . . . . ... . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. ... . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. 6-86-6 TRMS AC Volts CalibrationConfiguration :: : : :: 6-86-7 TRMS AC Volts CalibrationAdjustments . . . .. .. . . .. .. .. .... .. . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. .. .. .. . .. . . . .. 6-96-8 DC CurrentCalibrationConfiguration... . . .. . .. . . . . .. .. . . . .. .. .. . . .. .. ... .. . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 6-106-9 AC CurrentCalibrationConfiguration. .. .. . . .. .. ... . .. .. .. ... .. . .. . . . .. . .. .. .... . .. ... .. .. 6-116-10- Analog BoardConnectors '" _ 6,126-11 Model 196ExplodedView .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . . .. .. ... . .. . . .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 6-13


7-1 Display Board, ComponentLocationDrawing. Dwg. No. 196-110..................................7-4 _7-2 Display Board, SchematicDiagram,Dwg. No. 196-116.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . ... 7-57-3 Digital Board, ComponentLocationDrawing, Dwg. No. 196-100 .' : .. .. . . . . 7-127-4 Digital Board, SchematicDiagram,Dwg. No. 196-106 : .. .7-137-5 AnalogBoard, ComponentLocationDrawing, Dwg. No. 196-120................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 7-247-6 AnalogBoard, SchematicDiagram,Dwg. No. 196-126.. . .. .. .. . . . .. .. . .. . .. .. ... . . .. .. ... . . .. ... 7-25

APPENDIX D

D-1 IEEE Bus Configuration D-1D-2 IEEE HandshakeSequence ;-;; ｾ D-3D-3 CommandCodes.... . .. . . .. .. . . . . ... .. ... . . . .. . . . .. .. . .. . . . .. .. ... .. .. . .. . . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. D-6

viii


1.1 INTRODUCTION

SECTION 1GENERAL INFORMATION

1.3 WARRANTY INFORMATION

The Keithley Model 196 SystemDMM is a five functionautorangingdigital multimeter.At 6'12 digit resolution,theLED displaycandisplay±3,030,OOOcounts.Tfierangeofthisanalog-to-digital(AID) converteris greaterthanthe ｮｯｲ

mal ±1,999,999-countA/Dconverterusedin many6'12 digitDMMs. The built-in IEEE-488interfacemakesthe instru-mentfully programmableovertheIEEE-488bus.TheModel196 canmakethe following basicmeasurements:

1. DC voltagemeasurementsfrom lOOnV to 30OV.2. Resistancemeasurementsfrom 1001'1l to300Mll.3. TRMS AC voltagemeasurementsfrom 11'V to 30OV.4. DC currentmeasurementsfrom 1nA to 3A.5. TRMS AC currentmeasurementsfrom 1nA to 3A.

In addition to the above mentioned measurementcapabilities,the Model 196 canmakeACdB voltageandcurrent measurements.

1.2 FEATURES

SomeimportantModel 196 featuresinclude:

• 10CharacterAlphanumericDisplay-Easyto read14-seg-mentLEOsusedfor readingsandfront panelmessages.

• High Speed MeasurementRate-lOoo readings persecond.

• Zero-Usedto canceloffsetsor establishbaselines.A zerovaluecanbe programmedfrom the front panelor overthe IEEE-488bus.

• Filter-Theweightedaveragedigital filter canbesetfromthe front panelor over the bus.

• DataStore-Canstoreup to 500readingsandis accessibleonly over the bus.

• Digital Calibration-The instrument may be digitallycalibratedfrom eitherthe front panelor over the bus.

• UserProgrammableDefaultConditions-Anyinstrwnentmeasurementconfigurationcan be establishedas thepower-updefault conditions. .

• TranslatorSoftware-Userdefinedwords(storedin non-volatile memory)canbeusedto replacestandardcom-mandstringsover the IEEE-488bus.

• OffsetCompensatedOhms-Usedto correctfor smaller-ror voltagesin the measurementcircuit.

Warrantyinformation may be found on the inside frontcoverof this.manual.Shouldit bec()menecessaryto exer-cisethe warranty,contactyour Keithley representativeorthe factory to determinethe proper course of action.Keithley Instrumentsmaintainsservice facilities in theUnited States,United Kingdom and throughoutEurope.Informationconcerningtheapplication,operationor ser-vice of yourinstrumentmaybedirectedto theapplicationsengineerat anyof theselocations.Checkthe insidefrontcoverfor addresses.

1.4 MANUAL ADDENDA

Informationconcerningimprovementsor changesto theinstrumentwhich occurafter the printing of this manualwill be found on an addendumsheetincludedwith themanual.Be sureto review thesechangesbeforeattempt-ing to operateor servicethe instrument.

1.5 SAFETY SYMBOLS AND TERMS

The following safetysymbolsandtermsare usedin thismanualor found on the Model 196.

The & symbolon theinstrumentdenotesthattheusershouldrefer to-theoperatinginstructionsin this manual.

The Mn the instrumentdenotesthat a potentialof300Vor moremaybepresentontheterminaI(s). Standardsafetypracticesshouldbeobservedwhensuchdangerouslevels are encountered.

TheWARNING usedin this manualexplainsdangersthatcould result in personalinjury or death.

TheCAUTION usedin this manualexplainshazardsthatcould damagethe instrument,

1.6 SPECIFICATIONS

DetailedModel196specificationsmaybefoundprecedingthe Thble of ContentsoHhis manual.

1-1


GENERAL INFORMATION

1.7 INSPECTION 1.9 GETTING STARTED

TheModel196SystemDMM wascarefullyinspected,bothelectricallyandmechanicallybeforeshipment.Mter un-packingall itemsfrom theshippingcarlon,checkfor anyobvioussignsof physicaldamagethatmayhaveoccurredduringtransit.Reportanydamageto theshippingagent.Retainandusetheoriginalpackingmaterialsin casereship-mentis necessary.The following itemsareshippedwitheveryModel 196 order:

TheModel 196SystemDMM is a highly sophisticatedin-strumentwith manycapabilities.To gettheinstrumentupandrunningquickly usethefollowing procedure.Forcom-pleteinformationon operatingtheModel 196consulttheappropriatesectionof this manual.

PowerUp

Model 196 SystemDMMModel 196 InstructionManualSafetyTestLeads(Model 1751)Additional accessoriesas ordered.

If anadditionalinstructionmanualis required,orderthemanualpackage(Keithley PartNumber196-901-00).Themanualpackageincludesan instructionmanualand anyapplicableaddenda.

1. Plug the line cordinto·therearlanelpower jack andplug the other end of the cor into an appropriate,groundedpowersource.Seeparagraph2.2.1for morecomplete information.

2. Pressin the POWERswitch to apply powerto the in-strument.Theinstrumentwill powerupin the300vDCrange.

.Making Measurements

ｾ Connectsafetyshroudedtest leadsto the front panelVOll'S HI andLO input terminals.Make surethe IN-PUT switch on the rear panel is in the in (FRONT)position.

2. To makeavoltagemeasurement,simplyconnectthein-put leadsto a DC voltagesource(up to 300V) andtakethe readingfrom the display.

3. To changeto a different measuringfunction, Simplypress the desired function button. For example, tomeasureresistance,pressthe OHMS button.

1.8 USING THE MODEL 196 MANUAL

• Section1 containsgeneralinformationabouttheModel196includingthatnecessaryto inspecttheinstrumentandget it operatingas quickly as possible.

• Section 2 containsdetailed operatinginformation on Using Front PanelProgramsusingthefront panelcontrolsandprograms,makingcon-nectionsandbasicmeasuringtechniquesfor eachof the Programselectionis accomplishedby pressingthePRGMavailablemeasuringfunctions. buttonfollowed by the button(s)thatcorrespondsto the

• Section3 containstheinformationnecessaryto connect programnumberor name.Forexample,to selectProgramtheModel196to thelEEE-488busandprogramoperating 31 (lEEE), pressthe PRGM buttonand thenthe 3 and 1modesandfunctions from a controller. buttons.Thble 2-7 lists andbriefly describesthe available

• Section4 containsperformanceverification procedures front panel programs.Once a program.is selectedthefor theinstrument.This informationwill behelpfulifyou following generalrules will apply:wish to verify that the instrumentis operatingin com-pliancewith its statedspecifications. 1,. A displayedprogramconditioncanbeenteredby press-

• Section5 containsa description of operatingtheory. ... ing the ENTER button.Analog, digital, power supply, and lEEE-488 interface 2. Programconditionsthatprompttheuserwith a flashingoperationis included. . digit canbemodifiedusingthedatabuttons(0 through

• Section6 containsinformationfor servicingthe instru- 9 and f).ment.This sectionincludesinformationonfusereplace- 3. Programs that contain alternate conditions can bement, line voltage selection, calibration and displayedby pressingoneof-the rangebuttons.Eachtroubleshooting. pressof oneof thesebuttonstogglesthedisplaybetween

• Section7 containsreplaceablepartsinformation. the two availableconditions.

This manualcontainsinformationnecessaryfor operatingandservicingtheModel 196SystemDMM. The informa-tion is divided into the following sections:

1-2


4. A programwill beexecutedwhentheENTERbuttonispressed.

5. A programcanbe exitedat any time and thus not ex-ecuted,by pressingthe PRGM button.

Paragraph2.7providesthe detailedinformationfor usingthe front panelprograms.

1.10 ACCESSORIES

The following accessoriesare available to enhancetheModel 196s,capabilities.

Models1019A and1019SRackMountingKits-TheModel1019A is a stationaryrack mountingkit with two frontpanelsprovidedto enableeithersingleordualside-by-sidemountingof the Model 196 or other similar Keithley in-struments.TheModel1019Sis asimilarrackmountingkitwith a sliding mountconfiguration.

Model 1301TemperatureProbe-TheModel 1301 is a rug-gedlow costtemperatureprobedesignedto allow temper-aturemeasurementsfrom -55 to 150°C.

Model1600BHighVoltageProbe-TheModel1600BextendsDMM measurementsto 40kV.

Model165150-AmpereCurrentShunt-TheModel1651isan external0.0010 ±1% 4-terminalshunt,which permitscurrentmeasurementsfrom 0 to 50A AC or DC.

Model 1681 Clip-onTestLeadSet-TheModel 1681con-tainstwo leads,1.2m(4 ft.) long terminatedwith bananaplugs andspringactionclip probes.

Model1682ARFProbe-TheModel1682Apermitsvoltagemeasurementsfrom 100kHzto 250MHz.AC to DCtransferaccuracyis ±1dB from 100kHz to 250MHz at 1V, peakresponding,calibratedin RMS of a sinewave. .

Model 1685 damp-On AC Probe-The Model 1685measuresAC currentby clampingon to a singleconduc-tor. Interruptionof the circuit is unnecessary.TheModel1685detectscurrentsby sensingthechangingmagneticfieldproducedby the currenUlow.

Model1751SafetyTestLeads-Fingerguardsandshroudedbananaplugshelpminimizethechanceof makingcontactwith live circuitry.

GENERAL INFORMATION

1-3/1-4


SECTION 2BASIC DMM OPERATION

CAUTIONBe sure that the power line voltage agrees withthe indicated range on the rear panel of the In-strument. Failure to observe this precautionmay result in instrument damage.

2.1 INTRODUCTION

Operationof theModel196canbedividedinto two generalcategories:front paneloperationandIEEE-488busopera-tion. Thissectioncontainsinformationnecessaryto usetheinstrumentfrom thefront panel.ThesefunctionscanalsobeprogrammedovertheIEEE-488bus,asdescribedin Sec-tion 3. . 2.2.2 Power Up Sequence

2.2 POWER UP PROCEDURE

2.2.1 Line Power

Usethe following procedureto connecttheModel 196 toline powerandpowerup the instrument.

1. Checkthat the instrumentis set to correspondto theavailableline power.Whentheinstrumentleavesthefac-tory; theinternallyselectedline voltageis markedontherearpanel.Rangesare105V-125Vor 21OV-25OV50/60HzAC. If the line voltagesettingof the instrumentneedsto bechanged,refer to Section6, paragraph6.2 for theprocedure.1£ theline frequencysettingof theinstrumentneedsto becheckedandlorchanged,utilize front panelProgram32 (seeparagraph2.7.8) after the instrumentcompletesthe powerup sequence.

2. Connectthe femaleendof the power cord to the ACreceptacleon therearpanelof theinstrument.Connectthe otherendof the cord to a groundedAC outlet.

WARNINGThe Model 196 is equipped with a 3-wire powercord that contains a separate ground wire andis designed to be used with grounded outlets.When proper connections are made, instrumentchassis Is connected to power line ground.Failure to use a grounded outlet may result inpersonal injury or death because of electricshock.

Theinstrumentcanbeturnedonby pressingin thefrontpanelPOWERswitch.Theswitchwill beattheinnermostpositionwhenthe instrumentis turnedon. Uron powerup, theinstrumentwill do a numberof testsonItself. Thstsareperformedon memory(ROM, RAM andPPROM).1£RAM or ROM fails, theinstrumentwill lock up. If E'PROMFAILS, themessageＢｕｎｃａｾ will bedisplayed.Seepara-graph6.7.2for a completedescriptionof thepowerup selftest and recommendationsto resolvefailures.

2.2.3 Default Conditions

Defaultconditionscanbedefinedassetupconditionsthatthe instrumentwill return to whena pariicularfeatureorcommandis asserted.TheModel196will returnto eitherfactorydefaultconditionsor usersaveddefaultconditions.

FactoryDefault Conditions

At the factory; theModel 196 is setup so that the instru-.ment is configured to certain setup conditions on theinitial powerup.Thesefactorydefaultconditionsarelistedin Thbles2-1and3-7(locatedin Section3). If alternatesetupconditionsaresaved(seeUserSavedDefaultConditions),theinstrumentcanbereturnedto thefactorydefaultcon-ditions by ｲｵｮｮｩｮ Program37 (Reset).Th retain the fac-tory defaultconditionsaspower-updefaultconditions,runProgram30(Save)immediatelyafterexecutingProgram37(Reset).

Sendingdevice-dependentcommand10overtheIEEE-488busis equivalentto runningProgram37(Reset)andthenProgram30 (Save).

2-1


BASIC DMM OPERATION

Table 2·1. Factory Default Conditions

ControlfFeature Default Condition

Function DCVRange 300vResolution(program2) 6'12 ｄｩｾｴZero DisabedZeroValue (programZERO) 000.0000dB DisableddB ReferenceValue 1.000000(programdB)Filter DisabledFilter Value (ProgramFILTER) 10MX+B Status(Program4) DisabledMX+B Parameters(Program34) M=1.000000

B=OOO.OOOOｍｵｬｾｬ･ｸ･ (Program6)' EnabledHII IPASS (Program5) DisabledHI/LO Limits (Program35) +3.030000,

-3.030000OhmsCompensation(program0) Disabled

NOTE: TheModel 196is initially setfor an IEEE addresRof 7. The line frequencyis set to 50or 60Hz.

UserSavedDefault Conditions

Each function of the Model 196 "remembers"the lastmeasurementconfigurationthat it wassetup for (suchasrange,zerovalue,filter value,etc).Switchingbackandforthbetweenfunctionswill notaffecttheuniqueconfigurationof eachfunction. However,theinstrumentwill "forget" theconfigurationson power-downunlessthey are saved.

Unique setupconditionscanbe savedby running frontpanelProgram30 (Save)or by sendingdevice-dependent'commandL1 over the IEEE-488 bus. These'user saveddefaultconditionswill prevailoverthefactorydefaultcon-ditions on power-up,or whena DCL or SDCis assertedover the bus.

IEEE AddressandLine Frequency

Any IEEE addressandline frequencysettingcanbesavedasdefaultconditionsby runningProgram30 (Save)or bysendingL1 over thebus. Seeparagraph2.7 for completeinformationon Programs31 (IEEE Address)and32 (LineFrequency).

NOTEAn "UNCAr' errorwill settheIEEE addressto 7and the line frequencyto 60Hz.

2-2

2.3 FRONT PANEL FAMILIARIZATION

Thefront panellayoutof theModel196isshownin Figure2-1. The following paragraphsdescribethe variouscom-ponentsof the front panelin detail.

2.3.1 Display and Indicators

Display-The10 character,alphanumeric,LED display isusedto displaynumericconversiondata,rangeandfunc-tion mnemonics(i.e. mY) andmessages.

Function Indicators-Theindicator that is on identifieswhichof thefive operatingfunctionsis currentlyselected.

RangeIndicator-Whentheinstrumentis in autorangetheAUTO indicator light will be on.

Modifier Indicators-Whenthezerofeatureis enabled,theZERO indicatorwill turn on. Whenfilter is enabled,theFIITER indicatorwill turn on.

IEEE StatusIndicators-Thesethreeindicatorsapplyto in-'strumentoperationover the IEEE-488bus. The RMT in-dicator shows when the instrumentis in the IEEE-488remotestate.TheTLK andLSN indicatorsshowwhentheinstrumentis in the talk andlistenstatesrespectively.SeeSection3 for detailedinformationon operationover thebus.

2.3.2 Controls

All front panel controls, except the POWER and CALENABLE switches,are momentarycontactswitches.In-dicatorsarelocatedabovecertainbuttonsto showthattheyareenabled.Somebuttonshavesecondaryfunctionsthatare associatedwith front panelprogramoperation.Seeparagraph2-7 for detailed information on front panelpro17ams.

ｾ POWER-ThePOWERswitch controlsAC powertotheinstrument.Depressingandreleasingtheswitchonceturnsthepoweron. Depressingandreleasingtheswitcha secondtime turns the poweroff. The correctpositionsfor onandoff aremarkedonthefront panelby thePOWERswitch.

[!] FUNCTION GROUP

DCV-The DCV buttonplacesthe instrumentin the DCvolts measurementmode.Thesecondaryfunction of thisbuttonis to enterthe ± sign.Seeparagraph2.6.4for DCVmeasurements.


BASIC DMM OPERATION

/f'/

IKEITHLEY! 196 SYSTEM DMM I

_I /-, nn II II 1-/ {ij ..... _TO_I. U U I_I I_I ,_, ,_, Ji ..... .....

ｾＺB FUNCTION IlANGE •0 0 0 0 0 0

ｾＺ0

DCV ::: N:V_ • DCA::: ACA_ ... .... AUTO

ｾｏｏｏＬ ,0,0 -0 -0·0-"'" - MAX

JOOV MAX 3AMAX .. MAX

:tV ｾPOWER TLK ...,. LSN CONTROL MODlf1EIIOFF ON 0 0 0 0 0 ｾ

ｾLOCAL ENmI - 2EIIO ...TEIl ..

o I 0 0 '0-0-0 @ --"AU """

ｾ /,

A H G F E

Figure 2-1. Model 196 Front Panel

ACV-TheACV buttonplacestheinstnunentin theAC voltsmeasurementmode.The secondaryfunction of this but-ton is to enterthenumberO. Seeparagraph2.6.7for ACVmeasurements.

ll-The lJ button places the instrument in the ohmsmeasurementmode.The secondaryfunction of this but-ton is to enter the number1. See paragraph2.6.6forresistancemeasurements.

DCA-The DCA buttonplacesthe instrumentin the DCampsmeasurementmode.Thesecondaryfunctionof thisbuttonis to enterthe number2. Seeparagraph2.6.8forDCA measurements.

ACA-The ACA button placesthe instrumentin the ACampsmeasurementmode.Thesecondaryfunctionof thisbutton is to enterthe number3. Seeparagraph2.6.8 forACA measurements.

[9 RANGE GROUP

Manual-Eachtime the .A. button is pressed,the instru-mentwill moveuponerange,while the.,..buttonwill move

the instrument down one range each time it ispressed.Pressingeither of these buttons will cancelautorange,if it waspreviousselected.Thesecondaryfunc-tions of thesebuttonsareto enterthenumber4 (.,..) andnumber5 (.A.).

Aura-TheAura button placesthe instrumentin theautorangemode.While in this mode,the instrumentwillgo to the best range to measurethe applied signal.Autoranging is available for all functions and ranges.Autorangingmaybecancelledby pressingtheAurabut-ton or oneof the manualrangebuttons.The secondaryfunction of this button is to enterthe number6.

mMODIFIER GROUP

ZERO-TheZERObuttonturnson theZEROindicatorandcausesthedisplayedreadingto besubtractedfrom subse-quentreadings.This featureallowsfor zerocorrectionorstorageof baselinevalues.Thesecondaryfunctionof thisbuttonis to selecttheZEROprogramandenterthenumber7. Referto paragraph2.6.2for detailedinformationon thezero feature.

2-3


BASIC OMM OPERATION

AMPS andW_TheAMPS andLO terminalsareusedformakingDC currentandAC currentmeasurements.

The input terminalsare intendedto be usedwith safetyshroudedtestleadsto helpminimize thepossibilityof con-tactwith live circuits.NotethattheterminalsareduplicatedsidewaysontherearpanelandthattheINPUTswitch(alsolocatedontherearpanel)determineswhichsetof terminalsis active.

the lOCAL buttonwill be inoperative.SeeSection3 forinformationonoperatingtheinstrument-overtheIEEE-488bus.

2.3.3 Input Terminals @]

VotI's OHMS HI andW-TheVOLTS OHMS HI and1.0terminalsareusedfor makingDC volts, AC voltsandtwo-wire resistancemeasurements.

dB-The dB button places the instrument-in the dBmeasurementmodeandmaybe usedwith the A0I andACA functions.Underfactorydefaultconditions,measure-mentsarereferencedto lV or lmA. However,thedB pro-grammaybeusedto changethereferenceIE!\'eL Thesecon-dary functionof thisbuttonis to selecttheaBprogramand-enterthe number9. Seeparagraph2.6.9for dB measure-ments. -

FIUER-TheFIll'ER bu.ttonturnson theFIITER indicatorandcausesthe instrumentto startweightedaveraging(1to 1199) thereadings.Thefactorydefaultweightedaverageis 1110,butmaybechangedusingtheFIUERprogram(seeparagraph2.7.16).Seeparagraph2.6.3for filter operation.SelectingtheFIUERprogramis oneof thesecondaryfunc-tionsof thisbutton.Theothersecondaryfunctionis toenterthe number8.

PRGM-Thisbuttonis usedto enterthe front panelpro-gram mode.

OHMSSENSEHI andW_TheOHMSSENSEHI and1.0ENTER-Thisbuttonis usedto enterprogramparameters. ｴ･ｾｭｩｮ｡ｬ areusedwith. the ｖｾＺ＾ｉＺｲ OHMS HI and1.0 ter-This buttonwill alsotriggerareadingwhentheinstrument-mmalsto makefour-wrre resIStancemeasurements.is in a one-shottrigger mode. -- --

[§] CONTROL GROUP

ffiI LOCAL-When the instrument is in the IEEE-488remotestate(RMT indicatoron), the LOCAL buttonwillreturnthe instrumentto front paneloperation.However,if local lockout (Ll.O) wasassertedovertheIEEE-488bus,

2.3.4 Calibration Enable Switch I:IICalibrationof theModel 196canonly be doneif the CALENABLE switch is in the enableposition. Seeparagraph6.4 for details.

2-4


BASIC DMM OPERATION

2.4 REAR PANEL FAMILIARIZATION

The rear panelof the Model 196 is shownin Figure2-2.

2.4.1 Controls

[Q] LINE VOtrAGE-Thisswitchmatchestheinstrumentto theavailableline voltage.Seeparagraph6.2 for thepro-cedureto set this switch.

ｾ INPUT-TheINPUT switch connectsthe instrumentto eitherthefront panelinput terminalsor therear panelinput terminals.This switch operates.in sameｭｾｮｮ･ asthe power switch. The front panel mput termmalsareselectedwhenthe switch is in the "in" position andtherearpanelinput terminalsareselectedwhentheswitch is..in the "out" position.

2.4.2 Connectors and Terminals

lEI AC Receptacle-Poweris appliedthroughthesuppliedpowercordto the3-terminalAC receptacle.Note thattheselectedsupplyvoltageis markedon the rearpanelnearthe line voltageswitch.

[9 Input Terminals-Therearpanelinput terminalsper-form thesamefunctionsasthefront panelinput temrinals.Paragraph2.3.3 contains the description of the inputterminals.

.[!!] IEEE-488 Connector-Thisconnectoris usedto con-nect the instrumentto the IEEE-488bus. IEEE interfacefunctions are markedbelow the connector.

[] EXTERNAL TRIGGERInput-ThisBNCconnectorisusedto applypulsesto trigger theModel 196 to takeoneor morereadings,dependingontheselectedtriggermode.

A B c

ADDRESS ENTERED WITHfRONT PANEL PROGRAM 31

." t", , • - r .... ｾ .... -,.

ｉＭＭＫＭＭＭＮＮＮｪＮｪＮＮ［ＡＭＭＭ 0

IKEITHLEylM.....OE. \N u.s......

UNERATINQ!SO-OOHz AC ONLY

30YA MAX

iNPUT..-_ fROI'fT

LINE VOLT....GESELECTED

Q 90-do\l 195-2Ql05-125V 210-2

<> O--puf:.O-l I 30V(n ｾｾｾｾｾ I ii!!: Q 0 ｊｾｍａｘＭ

IEEE 488 I'lITERF....CE n7

H G F

Figure 2-2. Model 196 Rear Panel

2-5


BASIC DMM OPERATION

ill VOITMETER COMPLETEOutput--TIUsBNCoutputconnectorprovidesaTTI.rcompatiblenegative-goingpulsewhentheModel 196hascompleteda reading.It is usefulfor triggeringotherinstrumentation.

2.4.3. Fuses

I]] LINE FUSE-Theline fuseprovidesprotectionfor theAC powerline input. Referto paragraph6.3.1for the linefuse replacementprocedure.

ill CURRENTFUSE-The3A currentfuse ｰｲｯｾ､･ pro-tectionfor thecurrentmeasurementcircuitsof theinstru-ment.Referto paragraph6.3.2for thecurrentfusereplace-mentprocedure.

2.5 ERROR DISPLAY MESSAGES

Table 2-2lists andexplainsthe variousdisplaymessagesassociatedwith incorrectfront paneloperationof theModel196.

Table 2-2. Error Messages

Message Explanation

UNCAL E'PROMfailure on powerup. Seeparagraph6.7.2.

NO PROGRAM Invalid entry while trying to selectprogram.

O.vERFLO KG Overrange-Decimalpoint positionand mnemonicsdefinefunctionand range(3kG rangeshown).Thenumberof charactersin the"OVERFLO" messagedefinesthedisplayresolution(6Yzd resolutionshown).

TRIG-ERROR Trigger receivedwhile still pro-cessingreadingfrom last trigger.

ACONLY SelectingdB with instrumentnotin ACV or ACA.

NO RANGE Pressinga rangebuttonwhile inACV dB or ACA dB.

CONFLICT 196 in invalid state(Le. dB func-tion), whenenteringcalibrationprogram.

2.6 BASIC MEASUREMENTS

Thefollowing paragraphsdescribethebasicproceduresformakingvoltage,resistance,current,anddB measurements.

2-6

High EnergyCircuit SafetyPrecautions

To optimizesafetywhenmeasuringvoltagein high energydistribution circuits, read and use the directions in thefollowing warning.

WARNINGDangerous arcs of an explosive nature in a highenergy circuit can cause severe personal injuryor death. If the meter is connected to a highenergy circuit when set to a current range, lowresistance range or any other low impedancerange, the circuit is Virtually shorted. Dangerousarcing can also result when the meter is set toa voltage range if the minimum voltage spacingis reduced.

Whenmakingmeasurementsin high energycircuits usetest leadsthat meet the following requirements:

• 'lest leadsshouldbe fully insulated.• Only usetest leadsthatcanbeconnectedto thecircuit

(e.g. alligator clips, spade lugs, etc.) for hands-offmeasurements.

• Do notusetestleadsthatdecreasevoltagespacing.Thisdiminishes arc protection and createsa hazardouscondition.

Usethe following sequencewhentestingpowercircuits:

1. De-energizethe circuit using the regular installedconnect-disconnectdevicesuchas the circuit breaker,main switch, etc.

2. Attach the testleadsto the circuit undertest.Useap-propriatesafetyratedleadsfor this application.

3. Set the DMM to the properfunction andrange.4. Energize the circuit using the installed connect-

disconnectdevice and make measurementswithoutdisconnectingthe DMM.

5. De-energizethe circuit using the installed connect-disconnectdevice.

6. Disconnectthe test-leadsfrom the circuit undertest.

WARNINGThe maximum common-mode input voltage (thevoltage between input LO and chassis ground)

- -- is 500V peak. Exceeding this value may createa shock hazard.


2.6.1 Warm Up Period

TheModel196is usableimmediatelywhenit is first turnedon. However,theinstrumentmustbeallowedto warmupfor at leasttwo hours to achieveratedaccuracy.

2.6.2 Zero

Thezerofeatureservesasa meansof baselinesuppressionby allowing a storedoffset value to besubtractedfromsubsequentreadings.WhentheZERO buttonis pressed,theinstrumenttakesthecurrentlydisplayedreadingasabaselinevalue.All subsequentreadingsrepresentthedif-ferencebetweenthe appliedsignal level alld thestoredbaseline.

A baselinelevel canbeestablishedfor anyor all measure-mentfunctionsandis rememberedby eachfunction. Forexample,a lOV baselinecanbeestablishedon DCV, a SVbaselinecanbe establishedon ACV anda 10kll baselinecan be establishedon OHMS. Theselevels will not becancelledby switchingbackandforth betweenfunctions.Onceabaselineis establishedfor ameasurementfunction,thatstoredlevelwill bethesameregardlessof whatrangethe Model 196 is on. For example, if lV is establishedasthebaselineonthe3V range,thenthebaselinewill alsobelV onthe30V through300Vranges.A zerobaselinelevelcanbe as largeas full range.

NOTEThe following discussionon dynamic range isbasedona displayresolutionof 6% digits. At 5%dresolution,thenumberof countswould.bereducedby a factorof 10. At 41f,d resolution,countswouldbereducedby a factor of 100 and311zdresolutionwould reducecountsby a factor of 1000.

By design,thedynamicmeasurementrangeof theModel196, at 61f,-digit resolution,is 6060000counts.With zerodisabled,thedisplayedreadingrangeof theinstrumentis±3030000counts.With zero enabled,the Model 196 hasthecapabilityto-display ±6060000counts.This increaseddisplayrangeensuresthatthedynamicmeasurementrangeof theinstrumentis notreducedwhenusingazerobaselinevalue.Thefollowing two exampleswill usethemaximumallowable zero values ＨＳＰＳｏｏ counts and ＭＳＰＳｏｏ

counts)to showthatdynamicmeasurementrangewill notbereduced.It is importantto notethattheincreaseddisplayrangedoesnotincreasethemaximumallowableinputlevelto theinstrument.Forexample,onthe3V range,theModel196will alwaysoverrangewhenmorethan ±3.03V is con-nectedto the input.

BASIC DMM OPERATION

Example1-Theinstrumentis setto the3V DC rangeanda maximum -3.030OOOVis establishedas the zerovalue.When -3.030OOOVis connectedto theinput of theModel196, the displaywill readO.OOOOOOV.When +3.030000visco.nnectedto the input, the displaywill read +606oo00v.Thus, the dynamicmeasurementrangeof theModel 196is OV to 6.06V, which is 6060000counts.

Example2-Theinstrumentis still setto the3V DC range,but a maximum +3.03OO00v is the zero level. When+3.03OO0OYisconnectedto theinputof theModel196,thedisplaywill reado.oooooov.When ,.,3.03OOOOVis connectedto the input, the displaywill read -6.060000V.Thus thedynamicmeasurementrangeof the instrumentis -6.06Vto OV, which is still 6060000counts.

ZeroCorrection-TheModel 196mustbeproperlyzeroedwhenusing the 300mVDC or the 300ll rangein order toachieveratedaccuracyspecifications.To useZEROfor zerocorrection,performthe following steps:

.1- Disable zero, if presentlyenabled,by pressingtheZERO button. The ZERO indicatorwill turn off.

2. Selectthe 300mV DC or the 3001l range.3. Connectthetestleadsto theinputof theModel196and

short them together. If four-wire resistancemeasurementsareto bemade,connectandshortall fourleadstogether.Allow any thermalsto stabilize.Note: At5'hand6'h-digit resolution,low levelmeasure-menttechniquesneedto beemployed.UseKelvin testleadsorshieldedtestleads.Seeparagraph2.6.5for lowlevel measurementconsiderations.

4. Pressthe ZERO button. The display will readzero.5. Removetheshortandconnectthetestleadsto thesignal

or resistance tobe measured.Note:Testleadresistanceis alsocompensatedfor when

.. zeroingthe 3OO1l rangewith the aboveprocedure.

BaselineLevels-Baselinevalues can be establishedbyeitherapplyingbaselinelevelsto theinstrumentorby set-ting baselinevalueswith the front panelZERO program.Paragraph2.7.15containsthecompleteprocedurefor usingtheZERO program.To establisha baselinelevelby apply-ing a level to theModel 196, performthe following steps:

1. Disablezero,if preseritlyenabled,by pressingtheZERObutton. The ZERO indicatorwill turn off.

2. Select-afunction andrangethat is appropriatefor theanticipatedmeasurement.

3. Connectthe desiredbaselinelevel to the inputuf theModel 196 andnotethat level on the display.

2·7


BASIC DMM OPERATION

4. Pressthe ZERO button.The displaywill zeroandtheZERO indicator will be enabled. The previouslydisplayedreadingwill be thestoredbaseline.Thezerobaselinevalue will also be storedin ProgramZERO,replacingthe previouszero value.

WARNINGWith ZERO enabled, a hazardous voltagebaseline level (±40V or more), not displayed,may be present on the input terminals. If notsure what is applied to the input, assume thata hazardous voltage is present.

5. Disconnectthestoredsignalfrom theinputandconnectthe signal to be measuredin its place. Subsequentreadingswill bethedifferencebetweenthestoredvalueandthe appliedsignal.

Notes:

1. Disablingzerocancelsthe zero baselinevalueon thatselectedfunction. However, since the zero value isautomaticallystoredin ProgramZERO,thezerobaselinevaluecanberetrievedby usingthe programaslong asthe ZERO button is not againpressed(seeparagraph2.7.15for details).PressingtheZERObutton,thusenabl-ingzero,will wipeoutthepreviousbaselinevaluein Pr0-gramZERO.Baselinesestablishedonotherfunctionsarenot affected.

2. To storeanewbaselineonaselectedfunction,zeromustfirst bedisabledandthenenabledagain.Thenewvaluewill be storedwith the first triggeredconversion.Thebaselinevaluewill also be stored ｡ｳｾｴｨ zerovalue inProgramZERO,cancellingthepreviouslystoredvalue.

3. Settingthe rangelower thanthesuppressedvaluewilloverrangethe display; the instrumentwill display theoverrangemessageundertheseconditions.

4. Whenthe ZERO buttonis pressedto enablezero, theZEROindicatorlight will blink until anonscalereadingis availableto useas a zerolevel.

2.6.3 Filter

TheModel 196incorporatestwo ruters;a digital filter con-trolledfrom eitherthefront panelorovertheIEEE-488bus,andan internalfilter controlledexclusivelyfrom over thebus.

Digital Filter-TheModel 196utilizes a digital filter to at-tenuateexcessnoisepresenton input signals.This filteris a weightedaveragetype.

2-8

The factory default filter weighting is 1/10, but can bechangedto a weightingfrom 1 (Ill) to-1199with the useof theFIU'ERprogram.While in theprogram,theModel196 will only display the denominator of the filterweighting.Forexample,if thecurrentfilter weightingis 1/10,the FILTER programwill displayit asthe value10. Thus,filter valueasusedin this discussionrefersto thevaluesdisplayedby theModel 196whenin theFILTER program.

A rutervaluecanbesetfor anyor ail measurementfunc-tions and is rememberedby eachfunction. For example,a filter valueof 20canbesetfor DCV anda rutervalueof55 canbe setiorACV. Thesefilter valueswill not becan-celledby switchingbackandforth betweenfunctions.

An advantageof usingthefilter is to stabilizethereadingpf anoisyinput level.A considerationof filter usageis thatthe larger the weighting, thelongerthe responsetime ofthe display. Performthe following procedureto use theruter:

1. If it is desiredto checkandlorchangethe ruter value,utilize ProgramFIlTER asexplainedin paragraph2.7.16.

2. PresstheFILTERbutton.TheFILTER indicatorwill turnon.

Notes:

1. Whenthefilter is enabled,readingswill beruteredbeforebeingdisplayed.SeeDigital Filter Theory.

2. Pressingthe FIU'ER buttona secondtime will disablethe ruter.

3. After areadingis triggered(continuousorone-shot),theFIU'ER indicatorlight will blink for threetime constants.A time constantis measuredin readings.The numberof readingsin one time constantis equal to the filtervalue.Forexample,for afilter valueof 10, onetimecon-stantis equal to 10 readingsand threetime constantswouldbeequalto 30readings.Theblinkingdurationwillbe shorterin the 3'l2d modesincethat hasthe fastestreadingrate.

4. In a continuoustriggermode,a readingthat is outsidethefilter windowwill causetheFIU'ERindicatorto blinkfor one time constant.

Digital Filter Theory-Themathematicalrepresentationofthe weightedaveragedigital ruter is as follows:

(new reading -AVG(t-l)JAVG(t) = AVG(t-l) +

F


Where,

AVG(t) = displayedaverageAVG(t-1) = old displayedaverageF = weightingfactor (filter value)

As "With any filter, the Model 196 digital filter will affectreadingresponsetime. Thestepresponsefor this filterJsof the form:stepresponse= 1-KIN+ll

Where,

t'K" is a constantbasedon the filter weighting factor

K d -(: )

tlri' is the readingnumber.

The stepoccurswhenn=O. n=l is the first readingafterthe step,n=2 is the secondreading,etc.

Therefore:

(

1 ) n+l

stepresponse= 1- 1- F

Example:F=lOn=5

Five readingsafter the stepoccurs,the displaywill be at""'47% of the stepchange.Mter 10 readings(n=10), thedisplaywill beat "'" 68% andafter20 readings,thedisplaywill be at ｾ 88%. The more the readings,the closerthedisplaywill be to the stepchange.

To speedtheresponseto largestepchanges,theModel196digital filter employsa "window" aroundthe cUsplayedaverage.As longasnewreadingsarewithin this wmqow,thedisplayedvalueis basedontheweightedaverageequa-tion. If a new reading is outside of this window, the

BASIC DMM OPERATION

displayedvalue will be the new reading, and weightedaveragingwill startfrom this point.Thestepresponsewas

__onereadingto this change.Thewindow in theModel 196filter is 10,000countsfor 6Yzd resolution,1000countsfor51/zd, 100 countsfor 41/zdand10 countsfor 31/2d.

Internal Filter-In additionto thefront paneldigital filter,aninternalrunningaveragedigitalJilter jS usedwhenmak-ing high resolutionandhigh sensitivitymeasurementS.Theenable/disablestatusof thefilter is controlledovertheIEEEbus.However,underfactorydefaultconditions,theinstru-mentpowersup with the filter enabled.Whenenabled,thisfiltering only occurswhentheinstrumentis in the51/2or 61fz-digit resolutionmode.

Notes:

1. Thefront panelFIITER indicatorlight doesnot turn onwhentheinternalfilter is activated.Theindicatoris onlyusedwith the front- paneldigital filter.

2. Controllingtheinternalfilter (on/off) overthe IEEE busis explainedin paragraph3.9.22.

3. In a one-shottrigger mode,theModel196will not out-puta readinguntil bothfilters havesettled.11ueetimeconstantsareusedto allow the filters to settle.A timeconstant is measuredin readings. The number ofreadingsin onetime constantis equalto thefilter value.Forexample,for a filter valueof 10, threetimeconstantswouldbeequalto 30 readings.If boththeinternalfilterandthe front panelfilter are in use, the time constantis the sumof both filter values.

4. Filterwindowsfor theinternalfilter functionin thesamemanner as the windows for the front panel filter.However,thewindow sizesof theinternalfilter are muchsmallerthanthe front panelfilter "Window sizes.

2.6.4 DC Voltage Measurements

The Model 196 can be.. used to make DC voltagemeasurementsin the rangeof--±100nV to ±30OV. Usethefollowing procedureto makeDC voltagemeasurements.

1. SelecttheDCvoltsfunctionby pressingtheDCV button.2. Selecta rangeconsistentwith theexpectedvoltageoruse

autorange.3. Selectthe front or rearpanelinput terminalswith the

INPUT switch.

NOTEThe 300mV DC rangerequireszero to be set inorderto achieveratedaccuracy.The zerocorrec-tion procedurecanbefound in paragraph2.6.2.

2·9


BASIC DUM OPERATION

4. Connectthesignalto bemeasuredto theselectedinputterminalsas shownin Figure2-3.

5. Thke the readingfrom the display.

Thus,ane.of O.635JLV wouldbe displayedat 6:Jhdｲ･ｳｯｬｵtion asanadditionalsix digits of noiseon theModel 196.To compensatefor thedisplayednoise,usedigital filteringandthenzero out the settledoffset.

MODEL 19&

CAUTION:MAXIMUM INPUT = 300V RMS. 425V PEAK

I NPUT RES 1STANCE = 300.V. 3V: > Jsn30V: liMn300V: lOJMn

o::=a- J ..LI I -1. * * • •10 -I TG!Glr;:;]D •

'--

DCｖｏｌｔｾｇ

SOURCE

Shlelding-ACvoltageswhich are extremelylarge com-paredwith the DC signalmayerroneouslyproducea DCoutput. Therefore,if there isAC interference,the··circuitshouldbeshieldedwith theshieldconnectedto theModel196inputW (particularlyfor low-levelsources).ImpropershieldingcancausetheModel196to behavein oneor moreof the following ways:

1. Unexpectedoffset voltages.2. Inconsistentreadingsbetweenranges.3. Suddenshifts in reading.

Figure 2-3. DC Voltage Measurements

2.6.5 Low-Level Measurement Considerations

To minimize pick-up, ｫ･･ｰ the voltage sourceand theModel 196 awayfrom strongAC magneticsources.Thevoltageinduceddueto magneticflux is proportionalto theareaof the loop formed by the input leads. Therefore,minimizetheloopareaof theinputleadsandconnecteachsignalat only onepoint.

e. = 6.35 x :LQ-l0 ";(1 X 106) (1)

Noise andSourceResistance-Thelimit of sensitivity inmeasuringvoltageswith theModel 196 is deterntinedbythenoisepresent.Thenoisevoltageat theModel1% in-put increaseswith sourceresistance.

For high impedancesourcesl the generatednoise canbecomesignificantwhen usingthe most sensitiverange(300m\/;. 6:1f2d) of theModel 196. As an exampleof deter-mining e. (noisevoltagegenerationdueto Johnsonnoiseof thesourceresistance),assumethattheModel196is con-nectedto a voltagesourcewith an internal resistanceof1MO. At a roomtemperatureof 20°C,thep-pnoisevoltagegeneratedovera bandwidthof 1Hz will be:

e. = 6.35 x 1.Cr1Q "-'R x £

Accuracy Considerations-Forsensitive measurements,otherexternalconsiderationsbesidesthe Model 196 will ThermalEMFs-Thermalemfs Ｈｴｨ･ｲｭｯｾｬ･｣ｴｲｩ potentials)affect the accuracy.Effects not noticeablewhenworking· aregeneratedby thermaldifferencesbetweenthejunctionwith higher voltages are significant in nanovolt and of dissimilarmetals.Thesecanbe largecomparedto themicrovolt signals.The Model 196 readsonly the signal signal whichtheModel196canmeasure.Thermalemfscanreceivedat its input; therefore,it is important that this causethe following problems:signalbeproperlytransmittedfrom thesource.Thefollow- .ing paragraphsindicatefactorswhich affectaccuracy,noise,._..1. Instability or zerooffsetis muchhigherthanexpected.sourceresistance,thermalemfs andstraypick-up. 2. Thereadingis sensitiveto (andrespondsto) temperature

changes.This canbedemonstratedby touchingthecir-cuit, by placinga heatsourcenearthe circuit or by aregularpatternof instability (correspondingto heatingand air-conditioningsystemsor changesin sunlight).

3. To minimize thedrift causedby thermalemfs,usecop-per leads to connectthe circuit to the Model 196. Abananaplug is generallysuitableami generatesjust afew microvolts. A cleancopperconductorsuchas #10buswire is aboutthebestfor this application.Theleadsto theinputmaybeshieldedor unshielded,asnecessary.Refer to Shielding.

4. Widely varyingtemperatureswithin thecircuit canalsocreate thermal emfs. Therefore,·maintain constanttemperaturesto minimize thesethermalemfs.A card-boardbox aroundthe circuit undertestalso helpsby

- ntinimizing air currents.5. TheZERO controlcanbeusedto null out constantoU-

.. -setvoltages.

e. = 0.6351£V

2-10


2.6.6 Resistance Measurements

The Model 196 canmakeresistancemeasurementsfrom1OO1'1l to 3OOM1l. TheModel196providesautomaticselec-tion of 2-terminalor 4-terminalresistancemeasurements.Thismeansthatif theohmssenseleadsarenotconnected,themeasurementis done2-terminal.T£ thesenseleadsareconnected,the measurementis done 4-terminal. For4-terminalmeasurements,ratedaccuracycanbeobtainedas long asthe maximumleadresistancedoesnot exceedthevalueslistedin Table2-3. For bestresultson the3OO11,3kll and30kll ranges,it is recommendedthat4-terminalmeasurementsbemadeto eliminateerrorscausedby thevoltagedropacrossthetestlea4swhich will occurwhen2-terminalmeasurementsaremade.TheModel5806KelvinTest Lead Set is ideal for low resistance4-terminalmeasurements.

Offset-CompensatedOhms--Qffset-compensatedohmsisusedto compensatefor voltagepotentials(suchasthermalEMFs)acrossthedeviceundertest.This featureeliminateserrorsdueto a low level externalvoltagesourceconfiguredin serieswith the unknownresistor.Offsetsup to lOmVon the 30011rangeandup to lOOmV on the otherrangescanbecorrectedwith offset-compensalion.This featurecanbe used for both 2-terminal and 4-terminal resistancemeasurementsup to 3Okll. Offset-compensationis selectedthroughfront panelProgram II (seeparagraph2.7.14).

Duringohmsoffsetcompensatedresistancemeasurements,the Model 196 performs the following steps for eachconversion:

1. Makesa normalresistancemeasurementof thedevice.In general,this consistsof sourcinga currentthroughthe device,andmeasuringthevoltagedrop acrosstIledevice.

2. Turnsoff theinternalcurrentsourceandagain measuresthe voltagedrop acrossthe device.This is the voltagecausedby an externalsource.

3. Calculatesanddisplaysthe correctedresistancevalue.

Offset-Compensatedohmsnot only correctsfor smaller-ror voltagesin themeasurementcircuit, butalsocompen-satesfor thermalvoltagesgeneratedwithin theModel196.In normalohms,thesethermalEMF offsetsareaccountedfor duringcalibration.Therefore,enablingoffset-compensa-tion will causetheseoffsets to appearin the readings,

BASIC DMM OPERATION

especiallythe 300ll ｲｾ･ After offset-compe!"'Sationisenabled,the Model 1% shouldbe properlyzeroed.

To makeresistancemeasurements,proceedas follows:

ｾ Selectthe ohmsfunction by pressingthe II button.2. Selectarangeconsistentwith theexpectedresistanceor

useautorange.3. Selectthefront or rearpaneiinput terminalsusingthe

INPUT switch.4. Tumof£set-compensationonoroff asneeded,usingPro-

gramll.

NOTEIf offset-compensationis beingused,the300ll,3kll and30kll rangesrequirezero to beset inorderto achievethebestaccuracy.Thezerocor-rectionprocedureis locatedin paragraph2.6.2.

5. For 2-terminalmeasurementsconnectthe resistancetothe instrumentas shownin Figure2-4. For 4-terminalmeasurementsconnecttheresistanceto theinstrumentasshownin FigUre 2-5.

CAUTIONThe maximum input voltage between the HIand LO input terminals is 425V peak or 300VRMS. Do not exceed these values or instru-ment damage may occur.

6. Take the readingfrom the·display.

SHIELDED OPTIONAL SHIELDc= ｾ CABLE r - - - ...,I I

(:. .... ｉｄ RESISTANCEIｧｇｊｾ UNDER TEST I

MODEL 196 L .J

Figure 2-4. lINo·Termlnal Resistance Measurements

2-11


BASIC DMM OPERATION

Ｈｬ］ｾｾｾＳｾｾﾧｾｾＭ］Ｍ］Ｍ］Ｍ］ＭＫｏｾｐｔ｟ｬ｟Ｐｎａ｟ｌ｟ｓ｟ｈ｟ｅIi Iｾｑ､ RESISTANCE:

MODEL 196'-----I::::' __ ._ .J

Figure 2·5. Four·Terminal Resistance Measurements

[C... 11••• ｉｾ］］］ ;;V ｖｓｏｽｾｔｴｾｅｅgQG::;JO!J L--_....J:r

MODEL 196

CAUTION:MAX 1MUM 1NPUT =300V RMS, 425V PEAK, lO'V'Hz

1NPUT 1MPEDANCE = IMfi SHUNTED BY < 120pF

Figure 2·6. TRMS AC Voltage Measurement

Notes:

1. With ohmscompensationactive (progamIl), the Il in-dicator light will blink when the ohms function isselected.

2. Table2-3 showsthe currentoutputfor eachresistancerange.

3. It helpsto shieldresistancegreaterthanlOOkll to achievea stable reading. Place the resistancein a shieldedenclosureandelectricallyconnectthe shieldto the illinput terminalof the instrument.

4. DiodeTest-The3kll rangecanbeusedto testdiodesasfollows:A. Selectthe 3kll range.

2·12

.... B. Forwardbiasthediodeby connectingtheredterminalof theModel196to positivesideof thediode.A gooddiodewill typically measurebetween3001l to lkll.

C.Reversebias the diodeby reversingthe connectionsonthediode.A gooddiodewill overrangethedisplay.

Table 2·3. Resistance Ranges

Maximum Test Lead6'hd Nominal Resistance(Ill for

Range Resolution I-Short <1 CountError (6'hd)

300 Il 100I'll 1.7mA 13kll lmll 1.7mA 3

30 kll 10mll 160M 10300kll 100mll SOjM\ 30

3MIl 1 Il SjM\ 10030MIl 10 Il O.SM 300

300MIl 1 kll* 0.5jM\ 3k

*S'hd resolutiononlyNOTE: Typical opencircuit voltageis SV.

2.6.7 TRMS AC Voltage Measurements

TheinstrumentcanmakeTRMSAC voltagemeasurementsfrom 11'V to 30OV. To measureAC volts, proceedasfollows:

1. SelecttheAC volts functionby pressingtheACV button.2. Selecta rangeconsistentwith theexpectedvoltageoruse

autorange.3. Selectthe front or rearpanelinput terminalsusingthe

INPUT switch.

NOTEThere is a small amountof offset (typically 150countsatS'hd)presentwhenusingtheACV func-tion. Do not zerothis levelo_ut.Paragraph2.6.10providesan explanationof AC voltageoffset.

4. Connectthesignalto bemeasuredto theselectedinputterminalsas shownin Figure2-6.

S.Take the readingfrom the display.


BASIC DMM OPERATION

Qarificationsof lRMS ACV Specifications:. 2.6.8 Current Measurements (DC or TRMS AC)

Maximum Allowable Input-The·f6110wing graph sum- TheModel196canmakeDCorTRMSAC currentｭ･｡ｳｵｲ･marizes the maximum input based on the lO'VeHz mentsfrom 1nA (at5thdresolution)toSA. Usethefollow-specification. ing procedureto makecurrentmeasurements.

en...ｾ 200c>

MAXIMUM INPUT TRHS AC VOLTS

CURRENTSOURCE

CONT I NUOUS INPUT:: 3A

I II.....IDI..ＱｾＭＭＭＭＭｦ｝ｇｊｾ e

MODEL 196CAUTION: MAXIMUM

=-

1. Selectthe DC currentor AC currentfunctionby press-ing the DCA or ACA buttonrespectively.

2. Selecta rangeconsistentwith the expectedcurrentoruseautorange.

3. Selectthe front or rearpanelinput terminalsusingtheINPUT switch.

4. Connectthesignalto bemeasuredto theselectedinputterminalsas shownin Figure2:].

5. Take the readingfrom the display.

"ｾ

" ｾ"f'o...

I"....

ｴＧＭ ....en:J: 100a:...

u<

::.:: ¥.::.::::.::

ｾ i ｾ 51FREa UENe Y- Hz

300

SettlingTIme-lsecto within 0.1% of changein reading.TIris time specificationis for analogc:il'cuitry to settleanddoesnot includeND conversiontime.

Figure 2-7. Current Measurements

Notes:

1. Seeparagraph2.6.10for TRMS measmemerilconsidei-ations.

2. WhenmakingTRMS AC voltagemeasurementsbelow45Hz, enablethe front panelfilter modifier to obtainstablereadings.A filter value of 10 is recommended.

3. To makelow frequencyAC measurementsin therangeof 10Hz to 20Hz:A. The ACV function mustbe selected.B. Digital filtering must be used to obtain a stable

reading.C. Allow enoughsettlingtimebeforetakingthereading.

2.6.9 dB Measurements

ThedB measurementmodemakesit po;;sibleto compressa largerangeof measurementsinto a muchsmallerscope.

. AC dB measurementscanbemadewith theinstrumentinthe ACV or ACA function. The relationshipbetweendBandvoltageandcurrent,-canbe expressedby thefollow-ing equations:

(Vi")dB"" 20 log _V,.j

(rln )dB =' 20 log \i:;

2-13


BASIC DMM OPERATION

At thefactory the instrumentis setup to bea dBV meterwhenACV dB is selected.dBV is definedasdecibelsaboveorbelowa lV reference.Theinstrumentwill readOdBwhenlV is appliedto the input. The IV referenceis the ｾ｡｣ｴｯｲ

defaultreference.With ACA dB selected,thefactorydefaultreferenceis lmA. The instrumentwill readOdB when1mAis appliedto the input.

ReferencelevelsotherthanlV andlmA canbeestablished.Therearetwo methodsthat canbeusedto establisha dBreference.One methodis to use the zero feature.Thissimply consistsof applyinga signalto theinstrumentandpressingtheZERObutton.Thatsuppressedlevelis thedBreference(OdB point). Thealternatemethodis to utilize thefront paneldB programandenterthe desiredreferencevalue. An advantageof using the dB programis that-asourceis not neededto establisha reference.

The following procedureexplains how to use the zerofeatureto establisha reference:

1. Apply a voltageor currentsignal, that is to beusedasthe dB reference,to theinput of the Model 196.

2 Pressthe ZERO button. The ZERO indicatorwill tumon and the display will zero. The referenceis-now

- whateverthe appliedsignal is.3. Disconnectthe signal from the instrument.

ProgramdB allows the user to checkor changethe dBreferenceof theinstrument.Therecommendedprogram-mablevoltagereferencerangeis from lOttV to 9.99999Y.Therecommendedprogrammabiecurrent referencerangeisfrom 10nA to 9.99.999mA.Paragraph2.7.17containsthe ｩｮ

formation neededfor usingthe dB program.

AC dB Measurements-Performthe following .stepstomakedB measurements:

1. Selectthe ACV or ACA function.2. Selectthe front or rearpanelinput terminalswith the

INPUT switch.3. Checkand/or changethe dB referenceas previously

explained.4. Connectthe signal to be measuredto the input-of the

Model 196.

2-14

5. Enablethe dB measurementmodeby pressingthe dBbutton.

6. Takethe dB readingfrom the display.

WARNINGWith dB enabled, a hazardous voltage baselinelevel (±4OV or more), not displayed, may be pre-sent on the input terminals. If not sure what isapplied to the input, assume that a hazardousvoltage is present.

dBm Measurements-dBmis definedasdecibelsaboveorbelowa lmW reference.dBmeasurementscanbemadeintermsof impedanceratherthanvoltageor current.Becausethe instrument-cannot directly establish impedancereferences,avoltage referencemust be calculatedandestablishedfor a particularimpedancereference.Usethefollowing equationto calculatethevoltagereferenceneed-ed for _a particularimpedancereference:

For OdBm, V,.j = -JImW. Zr./

Example:Calculatethevoltagereferenceneededto makedBm measurementsreferencedto 600n.

For OdBm, V,./ = ..j O.OO1W • 600U- . = ｾ -

= .77456V

Oncethe-necessaryvoltagereferenceis known? it Can ｢ｊ

establishedin theModel196with the_dB program.Subse._quentdBm readingswill bereferencedto thecorrespondN -

ing impedance reference. Thble 2-4 lists the voltagereferencesneededfor somecommonlyusedimpedancereferences.

dBW Measurements-dBWis definedasdecibelsaboveorbelowa lW reference.dBW measurementsaremadein thesamemannerasdBmmeasurements;that is, calculatethevoltagereferencefor a particularimpedanceandsetthein-strumentto it-with the dB program.The only differencebetweendEmanddBW is thereferencepoint; lmW VB lW.Thefollowing equationcanbeusedto calculatethevoltagereference-: - --


BASIC DMM OPERATIOtll

Table 2-4. Corresponding Voltage Reference Levels resultingis no error in the average-typemeterreading.for Impedance References

Reference ReferenceVoltageImpedance Level for:

(Ill OdBm OdBW

8 0.0894 2.82850 0.223675 0.2739

150 0.3873 -- ---

300 0.5477600 0.7746

1000 1.0000

ｖｲｾ for OdBm = ...; 10-'WoZREF

ｖｔｾ for OdBW = ..J ZREF.

2.6.10 TRMS Considerations

Most DMMs actuallymeasurethe averagevalueof an in·put waveformbutarecalibratedto readitsRMS equivalent.This posesno problemsas long as the waveformbeingmeasuredis apure,low-distortionsinewave.Forcomplex,nonsinusodialwaveforms,however,measurementsmadewith an averagingtype metercanbe grossly inaccurate.Becauseof its1RMSmeasuringcapabilities,theModel196providesaccurateAC measurementsfor a wide varietyofAC input waveforms. "

TRMS MeasurementComparison-TheRMS value of apuresinewaveis equalto 0.707timesits peakvalue.Theaveragevalueof sucha waveformis 0.637timesthe peakvalue.Thus,for anaverage-respondingmeter,a correctionfactor must be designedin. This correctionfactor, K canbefoundby dividing theRMS valuedby theaveragevalueas follows:

K = 0.707 / 0.637= 1.11

By applyingthis correctionfactor to an averagedreading.atypicalmetercanbedesignedto give theRMS equivalent.Thisworksfine aslongasthewaveformis apuresine,buttheratiosbetweentheRMS andaveragevaluesof differentwaveformsis far from constant,andcanvaryconsiderably.

Table 2-5 shows a comparison of common types ofwaveforms.Forreference,thefirst waveformis anordinarysinewavewith apeakamplitudeof lOV. Theaveragevalueof thevoltageis 6.37V, while its RMS valueis 7.07V. If weapply the 1.11 correctionfactor to the averagereading.itcanbeseenthat·both meterswill give the samereading,

Thesituationchangeswith thehalf-waverectifiedsinewave.As"before,thepeakvalueof thewaveformis 1ov,buttheaveragevaluedropsto 3.18V,TheRMSvalueofthis waveformis 5V, but theaveragerespondingmeterwi» giveareadingof353V(3.18x 1.11),creatinganerrorof29.4%. .

A similar situation exists for the rectified squarewave,whichhasanaveragevalueof 5V andanRMS valueof 5.OV.The averagerespondingmetergives a 1RMS readingof5.55V(5 x 1.11),while theModel196givesa1RMSreadingof 5V. Otherwaveformcomparisonscanbefoundin Table2-5.

AC VoltageOffset-TheModel196,at5'12dresolution,willtypically display150countsof offsetonACvolts with theinput shorted.This offset is causedby the offset of the1RMSconverter.Thisoffsetwill not affectreadingaccuracyandshouldnot bezeroedout usingthezerofeature.Thefollowing equationexpresseshow thisoffset(Voff_) is addedto the signal input (V,.):

Displayedreading = ...; (V,.)' + (VOff''')'

Example:Range= 2VACOffset = 150 counts(l.5mV)Input = 200mV RMS

Display reading = ..J (200mV)' + (1.5mV)'

= ..J 0.04V + (2.25 x 10-'V)= .200005V

The offset is seenasthe last digit which is not displayedat-5'12dresolution.Therefore,theoffsetis negligible.If thezerofeaturewasusedto zerothe display, the 150countsof offsetwouldbesubtractedfrom V,. resultingin anerrorof 150 countsin the displayedreading.

CrestFactor-Thecrestfactorof a waveformis the ratio ofits peak value to its RMS value. Thus, the crest factorspecifiesthe dynamicrangeof a TRMS instrument.Forsinusoidalwaveforms,thecrestis 1.414.Forasymmetricalsquarewave, the crestfactor is unity.

Thecrestfactorof otherwaveformswill, of course,dependon thewaveformin questionbecausetheratio of peaktoRMS valuewill vary. Forexample,thecrestfactorof a rec-tangularpulseis relatedto its dutycycle;asthedutycycledecreases,thecrestfactor increases.TheModel 196hasamaximumcrestfactor of 3, which meansthe instrumentwill give accurateTRMS measurementsof rectangular.

" waveformswith duty cyclesas low as 10%.

2-15


BASIC DMM OPERATION

Table 2-5. Comparison of Average and TRMS Meter Readings

AcCoupledAcCoupled Average TRMS Averaging

Peak RMS Responding Meter MeterWaveform Value Value MeterReading Reading PercentError

Sine 10V 7.07V 7.07V 7.07V 0%+10. __ ＭＺ

Half-WaveRectified Sine 10V 5.00V 3.53V 5.00V 29.4%

+IO-:c;---D- .

Full-WaveRectifiedSine lOY 7.07V 7.07V 7.07V 0%

ＫＧｏＭｾｔｙｓ

Square lOY IO.OOV 11.l0V IO.OOV 11%

+IO_:q;- .

RectifiedSquareWave lOY 5.00V 5.55V 5.00V 11%

+':=0=0RectangularPulse IOV lOY - {if 11.lV- 11 IOV -{if (l.11 fif -I) x 1009<+10Ji_L_rr-

°->ll<-.T .TJ.: 'OUTY CYCLE"

TriangularSawtooth lOY 5.77V 5.55V 5.77V 3.8%

ｉｏｾ｟

2-16


BA.SIC OMM OPERA.TION

2.6.11 dB Applications

MeasuringCircuit Gain/Loss-AnypOint in a circuit canbeestablishedastheOdBpoint. Measurementsin thatcir-cuit are thenreferencedto that pOint expressedin termsof gain (+dB) or loss(-dB). To setthezerodB point pro-ceedas follows:

1. Placethe Model 196 in ACV anddB.2. Connectthe Model 196 to the desiredlocation in the

circuit.3. Pressthe ZERO button. The displaywill readOdB.4. Gain/lossmeasurementscannow be madereferenced

to the OdB point.

MeasuringBandwidth-TheModel 196 can be usedtodeterminethe bandwidthof an ampllfier as follows:

1. Connecta signalgeneratoranda frequencycountertothe input of the amplifier.

2. Setthe Model 196 to ACV andautorange.3. Connectthe Model 196 to the load of the ampllfier.4. Adjust thefrequencyof thesignalgeneratoruntil apeak

AC voltagereadingis measuredon theModel 196.Thisis the centerfrequency.

5. Pressthe dB buttonandthenpresstheZERO button.The OdB point is now established.

6. Increasethefrequencyinputuntil theModel 196reads-3.00dB. The frequencymeasuredon the frequencycounteris the high-endlimit of the bandwidth.

7. Decreasethefrequencyinputuntil thedB readingagainfalls to -3.o0dB.Thefrequencymeasuredon thesignalgeneratoris the low-endlimit of the bandwidth.

Note:Thebandwidthof theModel196is typically 300kHz.Do notusethis applicationto checkampllfiersthatexceedthe bandwidthof the Model 196.

DeterminingQ-TheQ ofa tuned circuit" can be deter-minedasfollows:

1. Determinethe centerfrequencyandbandwidthas ex-plained in the previous application (MeasuringBandwidth).

2. CalculateQ by using the following formula:Q "= CenterFrequency/Bandwidth

2.7 FRONT PANEL PROGRAMS

Thereare17programsavailablefrom thefront panelof theModel 196. Theseprogramsare listed in Table 2-6. Thefollowing paragraphsdescribeandexplain the operationof eachprogram.

Table 2·6. Front Panel Programs

PrO!\l"am Description

o(Menu) Display softwarelevel andlistavailablefront panelprograms.

2 (Resolution) Changedisplay resolution(3'hd, 4'hd, 5'hdor 6'hd).

4 (MX+B) EnableMX+B program.5 (HI/W/Pass) Enable/disableHI/LO/Pass

program.6 (Mux) Recail status,enable/disable

multiplexer.30 (Save) Savecurrentinstrumentset

up.31 (IEEE Address) Recall/modifyIEEE address.32 (Line Frequency) Recall/modifyline frequency

setting(SO/60Hz).33 (Self Test) Enterself-testprogram.34 (MX+B Parameters)Recall/modifyMX+B program

values.35 (HIIW Limits) Recall/modifyHI/W limits.36 (Calibration) Enterdigital calibration

mode.37 (Reset) Returns196 to factory default

conditions.\} Recall status,enableldisable

offsetcOnipensation.ZERO Recall/modifyzero value.

"" FIU'ER Recali/modifyfIlter value.dB Recali/modifydB reference

value." .

ProgramSelection-Programselectionis accomplishedbypressingthePRGM buttonfollowed by thebutton(s)thatcorrespondsto the programnumberor name.For exam-ple, to selectProgram31 (IEEE Address),pressthePRGMbutton and then the "3" and "1" buttons.

DataEntry-Programdatais appliedfrom thefront panelusingthedatabuttons.Thedatabuttonsconsistof thebut-tons labeled with the ±-polarity sign and numbers0through9. Dataentryis accomplishedby pressingtheap-propriatenumberbuttonat eachcursorlocation. Cursorlocationis indicatedby thebright, flashing displaydigit.Thecursormovesonedigit to theright everytimeanumberis entered.After enteringa numberat theleastsignificantdisplaydigit, thecursorwill movebackto themostsignifi-cantUigiL Polarity(± button)canbechangedwith thecur-sorat anydisplaycharacter.Plus(+) is implied andthus,not displayed.

2-17


BASIC DMM OPERATION

Oncea programis selected,thefollowing generalruleswillapply:

1. A displayedprogramconditioncanbeenteredby press'ing the ENTERbutton.

2. Programconditionsthatprompttheuserwith aflashingdigit (cursor)can bemodifiedusingthe databuttons(0through9). Polarity(± button)canbechangedwith thecursoron any character.Plus (+) is implied and thus,not displayed.

3. Programs that contain alternate conditions can bedisplayedby pressingone of the rangebuttons.Eachpressof oneof thes'ebuttonstogglesthedisplaybetweenthe two availableconditions.

4. A programwill be executedwhenthepressedENTERbuttoncausesthe instrumentto exit the program.

5. A programcanbe exitedat any time andthus not ex-ecuted,by pressingthe PRGM button.

2.7.1 Program 0 (Menu)

This programdisplaysthe softwarerevision level of theModel196andlists theavailablefront panelprograms.Per-form the following stepsto usethis program:

1. Pressthe PRGMbutton.Thefollowing prompt.will bedisplayed:

PROGRAM?

2. Enterthenumber0 bypressingthe"0" button.Thesoft-warelevel of the instrumentwill be displayed.For ex-ample,if thesoftwarelevelis Bl, thefollowing messagewill be displayed:

SOFTREVBl

3. UsethemanualRangebuttonstoscrollthroughthefrontpanelprograms.The ... rangebutton scrolls forwardwhile the T rangebuttonscrolls backward.

4. To exit from themenu,pressthePRGMbutton.Thein-strumentwill returnto the previousoperatingstate.

2.7.2 Program 2 (Resolution)

Program2 selectsthenumberof displayresolutiondigits.The resolution available is dependenton function andrange.Table2-7lists thedisplayresolutionavailablefor thevarious function/rangecombinations.Display resolutioncanbesetfor eachfunction and is rememberedby eachfunction as long asthe instrumentremainspoweredup.Resolutioncanberememberedafterpower-downby run-ningProgram30 (Save).To changethedisplayresolution,perform the following procedure:

2·18

1..Set the instrumentto the desiredfunction andrange.2. Pressthe PRGM button.The following promptwill be

displayed:

PROGRAM?

3. Enterthenumber2by pressingthe "'2:' button.Thecur-rentresolutionstatuswill thenbedisplayed.Forexam-ple, if theselectedfunctionis currentlysetfor 6]12 digitsof resolution,thefollowing messagewill be displayed:

6'12 d

4. If analteredresolutionis desired,usethemanualRangebuttonsto displaytheresolution.The T Rangebuttondecreasesresolution, while the ... Rangebutton in-creasesresolution.

5. With thedesiredresolutiondisplayed,presstheENTERbutton. The instrumentwill return to the previouslyselectedfunction and range.

Table 2·7. Display Resolution

AvailableFunction Ranlle Resolution

DCV All 3'12d,4'12d, 5'12d, 6'12d

ACV All 3]12d, 4'12d,5'12d

II 30011,3kll, 3Okll, 3'12d, 4'12d, 5'12d,6'12d300kO3MO,30MO 5'12d, 6'12d300Mll 5'12d

DCA All 3'12d,4'12d,5'12d

ACA All 3'12d,4'12d, 5'12d

2.7.3 Program 4 (MX+B)

This programallows theoperatorto automaticallymultiplynormaldisplayreadings(X) by a constant(M) and addaconstant(B). Theresult(Y) will bedisplayedin accordancewith theformula,Y=MX + B. Thisprogramis usefulwhenslopecalculationsarerequiredfor aseriesof measurements.The valuesof M andB canbe changedby utilizing Pro-gram34. Performthefollowing stepsto enabletheMX +-B feature:

1. Set the Model 196 to the desiredfunction andrange.2. Connectthe signalto be measured(X) to the input of. the Model 196.


3. If thevaluesof M andB needto becheckedorchanged,do so usingProgram34.

4. PressthePRGMbutton.Thefollowing promptwill bedisplayed:

PROGRAM?

5. Enterthenumber4by pressingthe"4" button.Thecur-rentstatusof theMX+B programwill bedisplayed.Forexample,if theMX+B is currentlydisabled,the follow-ing messagewill be displayed:

MX+B OFF

6. Any rangebuttonwill togglethedisplayto thealternateMX+B status.Therefore,pressa Rangebuttonandthefollowing messagewill be displayed:

MX+B ON

7. With the message"MX+B ON" displayed,presstheENTER button to enableMX+B. The instrumentwillreturn to the function initially set.

8. All subsequentreadings(Y) will betheresultof theequa-tion: Y=MX+B.

Notes:

BASIC DMM OPERATION

Table 2-8. Example MX + B Readings

196 Range Normal MX + B·andFunction Readine:(Xl Readine:(Y)

30VDC 8.00000VDC 17.00000VDC30VDC -5.00000VDC -2.50000VDC30VAC 6.30000vAC 14.4500OVAC30kn 4.00000kl"l 1l.OOOOOkl"l

·whereM = +1.5 andB = +5.

2.7.4 Program 5 (HI/LO/Pass)

.Program5 is usedto enabletheHIIWIPASS program.Withthis program,theModel 196will indicatewhetheror nota specificreadingfalls within aprescribedrange.Thefac-tory defaultW limit is a negativefull scalereading,withthe actualvaluedependent:onfunction andrange.Con-versely,the factory·defaultHI limit is a positive full scalereading.With these± full scalelimits, theModel196willdisplaytheHI or W messagefor CJVerrangereadingsandthePASSmessagefor on-rangereadings.The HI andLOlimits can be set to anyon-rangevalue with Program35(HIIW Limits).

PROGRAM?

This featureis especiallyusefulfor componentevaluation,where certaincomponenttolerancesmust be observed.Oncethelimits areprogrammedinto the instrument,theoperatorneedonly monitorthedisplaymessagesto deter-minetheintegrityof thedevice.Performthefollowing pro-cedureto enableProgram5:

1. Selectthedesiredfunctionandrange,andzerothe in-strument,if desired.Theseoperatingparameterscan-not be changedoncetheprogramis activewithout ex-iting the program.

2. If thelimits needto becheckedor changed,dosousingProgram35.

3. Pressthe PRGMbutton.Thefollowing promptwill bedisplayed:

1.TheMX +BfeaturecanbedisabledbyagainrunningPro-gram4. While in theprogram,pressa rangebuttonun-til themessage"MX+B OFF" is displayedandthenpressthe ENTER button.

2.OnceMX +B hasbeenenabled,theModel196will showthe value of Y. If the value of Y is larger thancanbehandledby theparticularrange,theoverrangemessagewill bedisplayed,indicatingtheinstrumentmustbeswit-chedto a higherrange.

3. Userselectedvaluesof M andB will be storedwithintheModel196until thepoweris turnedoff (unlesssavedbyProgram30).Theseconstantswill beusedwhenever,X+B is enabled.Note however, that the value of B isscaledaccordingto the rangein use.Example:A valueof 19.00000enteredfor B is actually19.0000OVwith theinstrumenton the30V rangeand190.0000vwith thein-strumenton the 300.0000vrange.

4. An exampleof readingsthat will be obtainedwhenMX+B is enabledis shownin Table2-8. Eachof theolF 4 E te th b 5 b . th "5" butto Th. n r e num er y pressmg e n. etainedvaluesfor Y assumesthe following constants: following messagewill be displayedbriefly:M=+1.5; B=+5.

HI WPASS

2-19


BASIC DMM OPERATION

5. At this point, the instrumentwill run theprogram.Nonumericreadingswill bedisplayed.Instead,oneof thefollowing messageswill be displayed:A. If themeasuredvalueis lessthanthelow limit, the

following messagewill be displayed:

W

B. If themeasuredvalueis greaterthanthehigh limit,the following messagewill be displayed:

HI

C. If the measuredvaluefalls within the high andlowlimits, the following messagewill bedisplayed:

PASS

6. To disabletheprogram,pressthefunction button thathastheindicatorlight on.This will disabletheprogramwithout changingthe measurementparameters(i.e.function, range,etc.) of the instrument.

Notes:

MUXON

3. If the alternatemultiplexerstatusis desired,pressoneof the range buttons. The alternate status will bedisplayedas follows:

MUXOFF

4. To enter the displayedmultiplexer status, press theENTER button. The instrument will return to thepreviousoperatingstate.

NOTEWith theauto/calmultiplexerdisabled,theinternalzeroandcalibrationareaffectedby changingthenominal input level, especiallyon ohmsandthe300VDCrange.Wheneverthe appliedinput levelchanges,presstheselectedfunctionbuttonto per-form an auto/cal routine, otherwisesubstantialerrorswill result.Zeroandcalibrationmayalsobeaffectedby time.Thus,it is recommendedthattheselectedfunction buttonbepressedperiodically.

Thefollowing instrumentoperatingparametersaresavedby this program:

Program30 savescurrentinstrumentconditionssetupbythe user. Theseuser programmedconditionswill thenreplacethe previouslysaveddefaultconditionson powerup. Also, an SDCor DCL assertedoverthe IEEE-488buswill return the instrumentto thesesavedconditions.

PROGRAM ?

2.7.5 Program 6 (Multiplexer, Auto/Cal)

1. Limits canbesetusingProgram35with orwithoutPJoc__2.7.6 Program 30 (Save)gram5 enabled.

2. Userselectablevaluesof LandH will bestored withintheModel196until thepoweris turnedoff (unlesssavedby Program30).Theseconstantswill beusedwheneverHI/W/PASSis enabled.Notehowever,thatthevalueofLandH arescaledaccordingto the rangein use.

3. Pressinganyofthefront panelcontrols,eXceptdB (unlessin AC), ENTER, andLOCAL, will disablethe programand selectthe featureassociatedwith that button.

FunctionRange

Themultiplexerauto/calroutinesmaybedefeatedby run- ResolutionningProgram6. UsingtheModel196with theautozero/cal Zero status(on/off) and valuedefeatedincreasesmeasurementspeedand is useful for Filter status(on/off) andvaluemakinghigh impedanceDCvoltagemeasurementswhichACdB status(on/off) and referencevaluecan be affectedby the input multiplexing. Performthef II . t t thO - _lEEEaddresso OWIng s eps 0 run IS program:

Line frequencysetting1. PressthePRGMbutton.Thefollowing promptwill be MX+B status(on/off) andvalues

displayed: HI1W limitsOhmscompensationstatus(onloff)

2. Enterthenumber6by pressingthe"6" button.Thecur-rentmultiplexerstatuswill thenbedisplayed.Forexam-ple, if the multiplexeris on, thefollowing messagewillbe displayed:

2-20

Performthefollowing procedureto usethesaveprogram:

1. Setup the instrumentas desiredorrun Program37_(Reset)to return the instrumentto the factory defaultconditions. -


BASIC DMM OPERATION

2. PressthePRGMbutton.The following promptwill bedisplayed:

PROGRAM?

3. Enterthe number30 by pressingthe "3" and "0" but,tons. The following messagewill bedisplayedbriefly:

3. If it isdesiredto retainthedisplayedstatusvalue,proceedto step4. To changethe statusvalue,enterthe addressnumber(0 to 30).

4.With a valid statusdisplayed,presstheENTERbutton.The instrumentwill return to the previously definedstate.

SAVE Notes:

FREQ=60Hz

PROGRAM?

2.Enter the number32 by pressingthe "3" and "T' but-tons. The current line frequencysetting will then bedisplayed.If theinstrumentis currentlysetto 60Hz,thefollowing messagewill be displayed:

1.If aninvalid numberis entered,the instrumentwill exitfrom theprogramwith theIEEE primaryaddressbeingset to 30.

2.To changethedefaultaddressof the instrument,selectthe desiredIEEE acidressusingthis programandthenProgram30 (or L1 overtheIEEE bus) to saveit. Cyclingpower,Program37 (Reset),or anSDC, DCL or LO sent

.overthebuswill nothaveanyaffecton thenewdefaultaddress.

3.If the IEEE addressis changedbut not saved:A. Cyclingpowerwill returntheinstrumentto thedefault

address.B. Program37 (Reset),or an SDCor DCL sentoverthe

buswill not haveanyaffect on the currentaddress.C. SendingLO overthebuswill not changethecurrent

IEEEaddress,andwill savethataddressasthepowerup default address.

4. An "UNCAIe' errorwill defaulttheIEEE addressto7andthe line frequencysettingto 60Hz.

TheModel196doesnotautomaticallydetectthepowerlinefrequencyuponpowerup. This programallows theuserto checkthe line frequencysettin?;of the instrumentandto selectthealternatefrequency.'I1i.e instrumentcanbesetto either50Hzor60Hz.Performthefollowing stepsto checkandiorchangetheline frequencysettingof theModel196.

1.PressthePRGMbutton.The following promptwill bedisplayed.

ENTERED

PROGRAM?

2.7.7 Program 31 (IEEE Address)

Notes:

4. The following messagewill thenbe displayed:

ENTER ?

6. The instrumentwill returnto the conditionssetup instep1 andwill now powerup to thoseconditions.

5. To save the instrumentset up conditions, press theENTERbutton.Thefollowing messagewilI bedisplayedbriefly:

2. Enter the number31 by pressingthe "3"and 'T' but-tons.The IEEE addressvaluewill be displayed.Exam-ple: If thecurrentprimaryaddressof the instrumentis7, the following messagewill be displayed:

1. To exit the program without changingthe previousdefaultconditions,pressanyfront panelbuttonexceptthe ENTER button.The instrumentwill returnto theoperatingstatessetup in step1.

2. To returntheinstrumentto thefactorypowerup defaultconditions,useProgram37 (Reset)andsavethecondi-tions usingProgram30. ·2.7.lfProgram 3:f(Line Frequency)

3. Whenusingthis program,makesurethattherestof theinstrumentis in the desiredoperatingstate.

Program31 ｡ｬｬｯｾ theuserto checkandlormodify thead-dressof theIEEE-488interface.The interfacecanbesettoany=aryaddressfrom 0 to30. Detailedinformationonthe . -488 bus is provided in Section3. Perform thefollowing stepsto usethis program:


07 IE

2·21


BIl.SIC DMM OPERIl.TlON

3.If thedisplayedfrequencysettingmatchestheavailableline frequency,proceedto step4. If the alternativelinefrequencysellingis needed,pressoneof theRangebut-tons.Thedisplaywill toggleto the alternatefrequencyselling as shown:

FREQ=50Hz

4. With thecorrect frequencysettingdisplayed,presstheENTERbutton. The instrumentwill return to the pre-vious operatingstate.

Notes:

1. To changethedefaultline frequencysellingof thl:! iIlstru-ment,selectthedesiredsetlingusingthis programandthenProgram30(or11overtheIEEEbus)to saveit. Cycl-ing power,Program37 (Reset),or an SDC, DCL or Lasentover the buswill not haveany affect on the newdefault setting.

2. If the line frequencysettingis changedbut not saved:A. Cycling power,orsendinganSDCorDCL over the

buswill returntheinstrumentto the ､･ｦ｡ｵｬｌｳｾ｟ｴｬｩｮｧ

B. Program37(Reset)will nothaveanyaffectonthecur-rent selling.

C. SendingLO overthebuswill not changethecurrentline frequencysetting,andwil1 savethat settingasthe defaultsetting.

3. An "UNCAl;' errorwill defaulttheIEEE addressto 7 andthe line frequencyselling to 60Hz.

2.7.9 Program 33 (Diagnostic)

Program33is a diagnosticprogramdesignedto switchonvariousswitchingFEI's,relaysandlogic levelsto allow sig-nal tracingthroughtheinstrument.Also, testsonthedis-playandmemcryareperformed.Referto paragraph6.7.3inthemaintenancesectionto usethis programto troubleshootthe instrument.

2.7.10 Program 34 (MX+B Parameters)

This programallows the operatorto check/changethe Mand B valuesfor the MX+B feature (Program4) of theModel 196. The factory powerup default value of M isｾｏｏｏｏｏｏ andthevalueorB is 00000oo.To check/changethevaluesof M and B, proceedasfollows:

1. PressthePRGMbutton.Thefollowing promptwill bedisplayed:

PROGRAM ?

2-22

2. Enterthenumber34by pressingthe"3" and"4" buttons.ThecurrentvalueofM will nowbedisplayed."If thefac-lOry default value is the currentvalue of M, thenthefollowing messagewill be_displayed:

1.000000M

3. If it is desiredto retainthedisplayedM value,proceedto step4. If it is desiredto modify the M value, do sousingthe databuttons.Note thatvalid M valuesare inthe rangeof -9.999999to +9.999999.

4. With a M valuedisplayed,pressthe ENTER button.5. ThecurrentBvaluewill nowbedisplayed.If thefactory

defualt-value is the current B value, the followingmessagewill be displayed:

0000.000B

Decimalpoint positionis determinedby the rangethattheinstrumentwasonwhenthis programwasselected.

6. If it is desiredto retain the displayedB value, proceedto step7. If it is desiredto modify the valueof M, doso usingthe datakeys. Note that the B value rangeisfrom ±O.OOOlxlO-' to ±9999.999(including zero).

7. With a valid B value displayed,pressthe ENTER but-ton. Theinstrumentwill returnto thepreviouslydefin-edstateof operation.

Notes:

1. Userselectedvluuesof M andBwill be storedwithintheModel196until thepoweris turnedoff (unlesssavedby Program30).Theseconstantswill beusedwheneverMX +B is enabled.Notehowever,.that thevalueof B isscaledaccordingto therangein use.Example:A valueof 19.00000enteredfor B is actually19.00000vwith the

_instrumentonthe30V rangeand190.0000vwith thein-strumentin the 300V range.

2.The usercanset the valuesfor M andB as the powerup default valuesby runningProgram30.

2.7.11 Program 35 (HI/LO Limits)

Program35 is usedto set the high andlow limits for theHIlLa/PASS program (program5). The factory.defaultlimits are +3030000counts(HI limit) and -3030000counts(La limit). Theactualvalueof thelimits is dependentontherange.Forexample,thefactorydefaultHI limit on the3V rangeis 3.03oo00v,w.hi1.. e thefactorydef.aultHI limit onthe30V rangeis 3O.3OOOOV.Perfonnthefollowing proceduretosel HI and10 limits:


1. PlacetheModel 196in thefunction andrangethat theHI/La/PASSprogram(program5) will be used.

2. Pressthe PRGMbutton.The following promptwill bedisplayed:

PROGRAM?

3. Enter the number35 by pressingthe "3" and "5" but-tons.ThecurrentLO limit will be displayed.For exam-ple, if theLO limit is thefactorydefaultvalue,thefollow-ing messagewill be displayed:

-303.0000LO

Decimalpoint positionis determinedby therangethattheinstrumentwasonwhenthisprogramwasselected.

4. If it is desiredto retainthedisplayedLO limit, proceedto step5. Otherwise,modify the displayedvalueusingthe databuttons.The LO limit mustbe in the rangeof-3030000to +3030000counts.

5. With the desiredLa limit displayed,presstheENTERbutton.The currentHI limit will be displayed.For ex-ample, if the LO limit is the factory defaultvalue, thefollowing messagewill be displayed:

303.0000HI

Decimalpoint positionis determinedby therangethattheinstrumentwasonwhenthis programwas selected.

6. If it is desiredto retainthe displayedHI limit, proceedto step7. Otherwise,modify thedisplayedvalueuSi!lgthe databuttons.The HI limit mustbe in the rangeof-3030000to +3030000counts.

7. With the desiredHI limit displayed,pressthe ENTERbutton. The instrument will retorn to the previousoperatingstate.

Notes:

1. Userselectedlimits will bestoredin theModel196untilpoweris turnedoff (unlesssavedby Program30).Theseconstants will be used whenever Program 5(HI/LOIPASS) is enabled.

2. Limits setby theuserwill becomethepowerup defaultlimits by runningProgram30 (Save).

3. Enteringaninvalid valuewill resultwith theinstrumentusingthe powerup default limit.

BASIC DMM OPERATION

2.7.12 Program 36 (Calibration)

Theusercaneasilyperformfront paneldigital calibrationby applyingaccuratecalibrationsignalsusingProgram36.The calibration signalscan be either prompteddefaultvaluesornumbersenteredfrom thefront panel.Paragraph6.4.5descnresthebasicstepsfor usingthisprogram,whileparagraphs6.4.7through6.4.12providethec01Upletefrontpanelcalibrationprocedure.

2.7.13 Program 37 (Reset)

Program37resetsinstrumentsetupparametersbackto fac-tory defaultconditions.Thefactorydefaultconditionsarelistedin Tables2-1 and3-7. Performthe following stepstorun this program.


PROGRAM?

2. Enter the number37 by pressingthe "3" and"7" but-tons. The following messagewill be displayedbriefly:

RESET

3. The_followingprompt-will thenbe displayed:

ENTER?

4. PresstheENTERbutton.Thefollowing messagewill bedisplayedbriefly andthe instrument-will return to thefactory default conditions.

ENTERED

Notes:

1. Program37(Reset)canbeabortedbypressinganyfrontpanel button, except the ENTER Dutton, when theprompt "ENTER?" is displayed.The instrumentwillreturnto the previousoperatingstate.

2. Oncetheinstrumentis resetto the factorydefaultcon-ditions with this program,Program30 mustbe run ifit is desiredto havethe factory default conditionsonsubsequentpower ups.

3. Program37(Reset)will havenoaffectonthecurrentIEEEaddressand line frequencysetting.

2-23


BASIC OMM OPERATION

the ranges.Example:If IV DC is set to the zerovalue ofｴｾ 3V DC range, the zero value in the programwill bedisplayedas1.000000.Onthe30VDC rangethezerovaluewill still beIV DC, butwill beexpressedas01.00000in theprogram.

1. Pressthe PRGM button.Thefollowing promptwill bedisplayed:

2.7.14 Program {2

Theohmsoffsetcompensationprogramisusedtocompen-satefor voltagepotentials(suchas thermalEMFs) acrosstheresistanceto bemeasured.This featurecanbeusedforboth2-terminaland4-terminalresistormeasurementsupto 30kO. Additional informationon ohmsoffset compen-sationcanbefound in paragraph2.6.6.Performthefollow- . ｩｾｾｾ thefollowing procedureto implementPrograming stepsto usethe ohmsoffset compensationprogram:

1. Pressthe PRGM button.The following promptwill bedisplayed:

PROGRAM? PROGRAM?

2. Pressthe0 button.Thecurrentstatusof ohmscompen-ｾ｡ｴｩｯ will be ?isplayed.For ･ｾｰｬ･ if compensationIS currently disabled, the followmg messagewill bedisplayed: '

2. PresstheZERO button.Thecurrentzerovaluewill thenbedisplayed.Example:If the instrumentis on the30VDC rangeand the currentzero value is +3V DC, thefollowing messagewill be displayed:

COMPOFF 03.00000Z

3. If thealternatestatusis desired,pressoneof theRangebuttons.Thealternatestatuswill bedisplayedasfollows:

COMPON

4. With thedesiredcompensationstatusdisplayed,pressthe ENTER button.A. If ohmsoffsetcompensationwasenabled,theinstru-

mentwill be placedin the ohmsfunction with theo indicator light flashing.

B. If ohmsoffsetcompensationwasdisabled,theinstru-mentwill return to thepreviousoperatingstate.Whenthe ohmsfunction is selected,the 0 indicator lightwill not flash.

3. If it is desiredto retain the displayedzerovalue, pressthe ENTER button. The instrumentwill return to thepreviousoperatingstatewith thezeromodifierenabled.Thedisplayedreadingwill reflect theenteredzerovalue.

4. To modifythezerovalue,enterthenewvalueandpressthe ENTER button. The instrumentwill return to thepreviouslydefinedstatewith thezeromodifier enabledusing the newly enteredzero value.

Note:Thefactorydefaultpowerupzerovalueis 0000.000.lf it is desiredto havea djfferent zero value displayedon power up, modify thll zero value using ProgramZERO followed by Program30 to saveit.

2.7.16 Program FILTERNotes:

1. The 0 indicatodightrevealsthe statusof ohmsoffsetcompensation.With the ohms function selected, aflashing0 light indicatesthatcompensationis enabled,andconversely,anon-flashing0 light indicatesthatcom-pensationis disabled.

2. Thestatusof ohmsoffsetcompensationcanbesavedasa powerup defaultconditionby runningProgram30.

ProgramFILTER allows theuserto modify theweightingof thedigital filter. Valid filter valuesarefrom 1 to 99.Moreinformationconcerningthefilter canbefoundin paragraph2.6.3.

Perform the following stepsto check andlor modify thefilter value.

2.7.15 Program ZERO1. Selectthe desiredfunction.2. PressthePRGM button.The following promptwill be

displayed:

ProgramZEROallows theuserto checkormodify the..zerovalue.A completeexplanationof thezeromodifier canbefound in paragraph2.6.2. Oncea zero value is set on ameasurementfunction, that zero level is the sameon all

PROGRAM?

2-24


3.PresstheFITTERbutton.Thecurrentfilter valuewill thenbedisplayed.Example:If thefilter valueis 5, thefollow-ing messagewill be displayed:

BASIC DMM OPERATION

reference.onpowerup, modify thereferenceusingPro-gram dB followed by Program30 to saveit.

05 F 2.8 FRONT PANEL TRIGGERING

4. If it is desiredto retalnthe displayedfilter value, pro-ceedto step5. If it is desiredto modify thefilter value,do so usingthe databuttons.

5. With thedesiredfilter valuedisplayed,presstheENTERbutton. The instrumentwill return to the previouslydefinedstatewhen the filter is enabled.

6. To checkor changethefilter valueof anotherfunction,selectthe function andrepeatsteps2 through5.

Notes:

1.The factory default power up filter value is 10. If it isdesiredto have a different filter value on power up,changethe filter valueusingProgramFILlER followedby Program30 to saveit.

2.Enteringa filter valueof 00 will defaultthe filter valuebackto thepreviousvalueandreturntheinstrum"n\tothe previouslydefinedstatewith the filter disabled.

2.7.17 Program dB

ProgramdB allowstheuserto checkand/ormodify thedBreference.Theprogrammablevoltagereference"cari be upto 9.999999Vandtheprogrammablecurrentreferencecanbeup to 9.999999mA.DetailedinformationondB measure-mentsis providedin paragraph2.6.9. Performthe follow-ing stepsto usethis program:

1.PressthePRGMbutton.Thefollowing prompt.will bedisplayed:

PROGRAM?

2.Pressthe dB button.Thecurrentreferencelevel will bedisplayed.Example:If the referenceis 1V or lmA, thefollowing messagewill be displayed:

1.000000dB

3. Modify, if desired,the dB referencelevel andpresstheENTER button. The recommendedreferencerange is10/,V to 9.999999Vand10nA to 9.999999mA.Theinstru-mentwill return to the previouslydefinedstate.

ENTERED

Note:Thefactory defaultpowerup voltagereferenceis1.00000OVwith theinstrumentin ACV and1.000000mAwith ACA selected.If it is desired,to havea different

With the instrumentproperlyconfiguredovertheIEEE-488bus,readingscanbetriggeredfrom the front panelusingthe ENlER button. The following paragraphsprovidegeneralproceduresfor one-shotfront paneltriggeringandfront paneltriggering into datastore.

NOTETheproceduresin thissectionrequirelEEE-488busprogramming. Refer to Section 3, particularlyｰ｡ｲ｡ｾｋ［ 3.9.7(triggering)and3.9.9(DataStore)for d onprogrammingtheinstrumentoverthebus.

2:8.1 One-Shot Triggering·

Onpowerup, the instrumentis in the continuoustriggermodewith theconversionratedeterminedby theinternaltime base.To placethe instrumentin a statewhereeachpressof the ENTERbuttonwill triggerone reading,per-form the following generalprocedure:

1. Placetheinstrumentin thedesiredfunctionandrange.2. Placetheinstrumentin "one-shqtonexternaltrigger"by

sendingT7 over the IEEE-488bus.3. Pressthe LOCAL buttonto returncontrol to the front

panel.4. Eachpressof theENTERbuttonwill triggeronereading.

2.8.2 Triggering Readings Into Data Store

The front panel ENTER button can be usedto trigger--readinginto datastore.In theone-shottriggermode,eachpressof the ENlER buttonwill storeonereadingin thebuffer. In thecontinuoustriggermode,theENTERbuttonwill startthestorageprocessat theratethatwasprogramm-ed over the IEEE-488bus.Performthe following generalprocedureto triggerreadingsinto datastorefrom thefrontpanel:

1. Placetheinstrumentin thedesiredfunctionandrange.2. Placethe instrumentin the appropriatetrigger mode:

A. To storeonereadingin thebufferaftereachpressoftheENlERbutton,sendT7(one-shotonexternaltrig-ger) over the bus.

B. To storea seriesof readingsin the buffer after theENTERbuttonis pressed,sendT6(continuousonex-ternal trigger) over the bus.

2·25


BASIC DMM OPERATION

3. Configurethestorageintervalandbuffersizeof thedatastoreby sendingthe appropriateQn andI commandsover the bus (seeparagraph3.9.9).

4. Pressthe LOCAL buttonto returncontrol to the frontpanel.

5. PresstheENTERkey to eitherstoreonereadingin thebuffer or to start storageofa seriesof readings.

To usethe externaltrigger, proceedas follows:

1. Connecttheexternaltriggersourceto therearpanelBNCEXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUT connector.The shield(outer)partof theconnectoris connectedto digital com-mon. Since an internal pull-up-resistor is used, amechanicalswitchmaybe used.Notehowever,thatde-bouncingcircuitry will probablyberequiredto avoidim-propertriggering.

2.9 EXTERNAL TRIGGERING

The Model 1% hastwo externalBNC connectorson therearpanelassociatedwith instrumenttriggering.TheEX-TERNAL TRIGGER INPUT connectorallows the instru-ment to be triggered by other devices, while theVOITMETER COMPLETEOUTPUTconnectorallowstheinstrumentto trigger other devices.

2.9.1 External Trigger

The Model 196 may be triggeredon a continousor one-shotbasis.For eachof thesemodes,the triggerstimuluswill dependontheselectedtriggermode.In thecontinuoustrigger mode, the instrumenttakesa continuousseriesofreadings.In the one-shotmode,only a singlereadingistakeneachtime the instrumentis triggered.

CAUTIONDo not exceed 30V between digital common andchassis ground, or instrument damage mayoccur.

2. Placethe instrumentin the "one-shoton externaltrig-ger" (T7) or "continuousonexternaltrigger" (16) asex-plainedin paragraph3.9.7.

3. To trigger the instrument,applya pulseto the externaltrigger input. The instrument will processa singlereadingeachtime thepulseis applied(one-shot),orstarta continuousseriesof readings.

Note:Externaltriggeringcanbeusedto controlthefill ratein thedatastoremodewith thedatastoreenabledandone-shotmodeselected,eachtriggerwill causea readingto bestored.

CAUTIONDo not exceed 30V between the VOLTMETERCOMPLETE common (outer ring) and chassisground or Instrument damage may occur•

. ｾ '

2.9.2 Voltmeter Complete

TRIGGERS ONLEADING EDGE

ｾｔｔHIGH I IF----CZV-5V)

TTL LOllC:5;O.BV) I I

ｾｾｦｍ

The externaltrigger input requiresa falling edgepulseatTTL logic levels, as shownin Figure2-8. Connectionstothe rearpanelEXTERNAL TRIGGERINPUT jack shouldbemadewith astandardBNCconnector.If theinstrumentis in theexternaltrigger mode,it will betriggeredto take TheModel 196hasanavailableoutputpulsethat canbereadingswhile in eithera continuousor one-shotmode used to trigger other instrumentation.A single TTL-whenthenegative-goingedgeof theexternaltriggerpulse -compatiblenegative-goingpulse(seeFigure2-9) will ap-occurs. pearat theVOLTMETER COMPLETEOUTPUTjackeach

time the instrumentcompletesa reading. To use thevoltmetercompleteoutput, proceedas follows:

1. ConnecttheModel196to theinstrumentto betriggeredwith a suitableshieldedcable.UseastandardBNCcon-nectorto make the connectionto the Model 196.

Figure 2-8. External Trigger Pulse Specifications

2-26


Figure 2-9. Voltmeter Complete PulseSpecifications

LS TTL LO\t(0.25V TYP I CAL) [ I

ｾＱＰＩＱｓMINIMUM

2. Selectthe desiredfunction, range,trigger mode, andotheroperatingparameters,asdesired.

3. In a continuoustriggermode,the instruIt'lentwill out-putpulsesat theconversionrate;eacli.pulsewill occurafter the Model196hascompleteda conversion.

4. In a one-shottriggermode,theMode1196will outputa pulseonceeachtime it is triggered.

READINGDONE

•LS TTL HIGH(3.·W TYP I CAL)

BEGIN NEXTCONVERSION

•

BASIC DMM OPERATION

ｆｩｧｵｲ･ｾｬｏ U$eshieldedcableswith BNC connectors.TheModel196VOLTMETERCO:rv.tPLETEOUTPUT jackshouldbeconnectedto theModel705EXTERNALTRIG-GERINPUT jack.TheModel196EXTERNAL TRIGGERINPUT jack should be connectedto the Model 705CHANNEL READY OUTPUT. Additional connections,which are not shown on the diagram, will also benecessaryto apply signal inputs to the scannercards,aswell asfor thesignal linesbetweenthe ｾ｡ｮｮ･ andthe Model 196.

2. PlacetheModel196in "one-shotonexternaltrigger" (17)asexplainedin paragraph3.9.7.

3. ProgramtheModel705scanparameterssuchasfirst andlast channelas required.Placethe instrumentin thesingle scanmode.

4. Installthedesiredscanner cardsandmaketherequiredinputandoutputsignalconnections.SeetheModel705InstructionManualfor details.

5. BeginthemeasurementsequencebypressingtheModel705 START1STOP button.TheModel 705 will closethefirst channelandtriggertheModel196to takea reading.WhentheModel 196completesthereading,it will ｴｲｩｧger the Model 705 to go to thenextchannel.The pro-cessrepeatsuntil all programmedchannelshavebeenscanned.

2.9.3 Triggering Example

As anexampleof usingboththeexternaltriggerinputandthe metercompleteoutput,assumethat the Model 196 isto beusedin conjunctionwith aKeithleyModel705 Scan-.ner to allow the Model 196 to measurea numberof dif-ferentsignals,which areto beswitchedby thescanner.TheModel 705canswitchup to 20 2-polechannels(20 single-polechannelswith specialcardSsuchasthe low-currentcard). In this manner,a singleModel 196 could monitorup to 20 measurementpoints.

By connecting1:hetriggeringinl?utsof thetwo instrumentstogether,a completeautomahcmeasuremenT-sequence··couldbe performed.Dataobtainedfrom eachmeasurementpointcouldbestoredusingthedatastoreof theModel196.

OncetheModel705 is programmedfor its scansequence,the measurementproCedureis set to begin. Wh.en theModel705closestheselectedchannel,it triggerstheModel705to scanto thenextchannel.Theprocessrepeatsuntilall channelshavebeenscanned.

To use the Model 1% with the Model 705, proceedasfollows:

1. Connectthe Model 196 to the Model 705 asshownin

/ ICHANNa. EXTERNAL

I I ｒｅａｾ ;l6GER

0 ｾｾ 0

I I- -0 0 0

8ｾ eｾ

MODEL 705

,ｾ e e

I e e e0 0

I-- EXTERNAL ;; VOL TMET£R -0 TRt86ER • COI'lPl.ETE 0INPUT OUTPUT 0

8< > - eHODEL 196

Figure 2-10. External Triggering Example

2-27/2-28


SECTION 3IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

AppendixB-Programminginformationfor usingtheIBMPOXT computerwith the Model 8573A interface.

AppendixC-Sampleprogramsusingavarietyof different ·3.11controllerswith the Model 196. .

3.1 INTRODUCTION

This sectioncontainsinformation on programmingtheModel196overtheIEEE-488bus.Detailedinstructionsforall programmablefunctionsareincluded;however,infor-mationconcerningoperatingmodespresentedelsewhereis not repeatedhere.

AdditionalIEEE-488informationis providedin thefollow-ing appendices:

AppendixA-ASCII charactercodesandmultiline inter-face commandmessages.

3.7

3.8

3.9

3.10

Front Panel Aspects of- IEEE-488 Operation:Describestheoperationof theLOCAL keyandbusstatus indicators, and summarizesfront panelmessagesthat may occurdUring bus operation.

GeneralBus CommandProgramming:Outlinesmethodsfor sendinggeneralbuscommandsto theinstrument.

Device-DependentCommands:Containsdescrip-tionsof mostof theprogrammingcommandsusedto control the instrumentover the bus.

UsingtheTranslatorMode:Describesanalternateprogrammingmethodof using easily recognized.user-definedwords in placeof device-dependentcommands.

Bus DataTransmissionTimes: Lists typical timeswhenaccessinginstrumentdataover the bus.

AppendixD-A detailedoverviewof the IEEE-488bus.

Also, a tear out card listing the device-dependentcom-mandsfollows the appendices.

Section3 containsthe following information:

3.2 A SHORT-CUT TO IEEE-488 OPERATION

Theparagraphsbelowwill takeyouthrougha step-by-stepprocedureto getyourModel 196on thebusasquickly aspossibleandprogrambasicoperatingmodes.Referto theremainderof Section3for detailedinformationonIEEE-488operationandprogranUlling.

3.2

3.3

3A

3.5

3.6

A Short-cut to IEEE-488 Operation: Gives asimplestep-by-stepprocedurefor gettingonthebusas quickly as possible.

BusConnections:Showstypical methodsfor con-nectingthe instrumentto the bus.

InterfaceFunctionCodes:DefinesIEEE standardcodesthat apply to the instrument.

PrimaryAddressSelection:Tells how to programthe instrumentfor the correctprimary address.

Controller Programming: Demonstratessimpleprogrammingtechniquesfor a typical IEEE-488controller. ..

Step1: ConnectYour Model 196 to the Controller

With poweroff, connecttheModel 196to theIEEE-488in-terfaceof the controller usinga standardinterfacecable.SQmecontrollerssuchas the HP-85 include an integralcable,while othersrequirea separatecable.Paragraph3.3discussesbusconnectionsin more detail.

Step2: Selectthe PrimaryAddress

Muchlike yourhomeaddress,theprimaryaddressis awayfor the controller to refer to eachdeviceon the bus in-dividually. Consequently,the primary addressof yourModel 196(andanyotherdeviceson thebus,for thatmat-

3·1


IEEE-488 PROGRAMMING

ter), mustbe the sameas the primary addressspecifiedin thecontroller'sprogramminglanguage,qr you will notbe able to programinstrumentoperatingmodesandob-tain dataover thebus. Keepin mind thateachdeviceonthe busmusthavea different primary address.

Theprimaryaddressof your Model 196 is setto 7 at thefactory, but you canprogramothervaluesbetween0 and30by pressingPRGM,3, 1, andthenusingthedataentrykeysto changetheprimaryaddress.Oncethedesiredvalueis displayed,pressENTER to programthe value.

PLACE UN I TIN REMOTE

More detailedinformationonprimaryaddressselectionislocatedin paragraph3.5.

PROGRAMOPERATING

HODES

50 ENTER 707; A$

60 DISP A$70 GOTO 2080 END

30 INPUT C$40 OUTPUT 707,; C$

NO

OISPLAY DATA

REQUEST OAT AFROM 196

Figure 3-1. Typical Program Flow Chart

10 REto10TE 707 Sendremoteenable.20 DISP , Ｇｃｏｍｍａｎｄ , i Promptfor command

string.Input the commandstring.Sendcommandstring to196 .Get a readingfrom theinstrument..Display the reading.Repeat.

HP-85 ProgrammingExample-Usethe simpleprogrambelow to sendprogrammingcommandsto theModel 196anddisplay the datastring on the computerCRT.

PROGRAM COMMENTS

Step3: Write Your Program

Eventhemostbasicoperationswill requirethatyou writea simpleprogramto sendcommandsandreadbackdatafrom the instrument.Figure3-1 showsa basicflow chartthata typicalsimpleprogramwill follow. Theprogranuningexamplebelowfollows thisgeneralsequence.This programwill allow you to typein commandstringsto programtheinstrumentand displaydataon the computerCRT.

3-2


Step4: ProgramModel 196 OperatingModes

You canprograminstrumentoperatingmodesby sendingtheappropriatecommand,which is madeup of anASCIIletterrepresentingthecommand,followed by oneor twonumericparametersseparatedby commasfor the com-mandoption. Table3-1 summarizesthe commandsusedto selectfunction andrange.

A numberof commandscanbegroupedtogetherin O:lestring,if desired.Also, you mustterminatethecommandor commandsteingwith the X characterin orderfor theinstrumentto executethe commandsin question.

If you are using the programmingexamplefrom Step3above,simply typein thecommandsteingwhenpromptedto do so. Someexamplestringsare given below.

F3X: selectDCA function.FOR2X: selectDCV function, 3V range.


Step5: Get Readingsfrom the Model 196

Usually,youwill wantto obtainoneormorereadingsfromthe Model 196. In the exampleprogramabove,a singlereadingis requestedanddisplayedafter eachcommand.In othercases,you may wish to programthe instrumentconfiguration.at thebeginningof yourprogram,andthenobtaina whole seriesof measurements.

ThebasicreadingsteingthattheModel196sendsoverthebus is in ASCII charactersof the form:

NDCV-1.234567E+0

where:N indicatesanormalreading(0 would indicateanoverflow),DCV showsthefunctionin effect(in thiscase,DCV)-1.234567is the mantissaof the readingdata,E+O representsthe exponent.

Table 3-1. IEEE-488 Commands Used to Select Function and Range

_..

Mode Command Description .. ... _.- a ｾ ... Ｌｾ .. ... Ｌｾ .,,, ..

Execute X Executeotherdevice-dependentcommands.'""' .

Function FO DC voltsF1 AC voltsF2 OhmsF3 DC currentF4 AC currentF5 ACVdBF6 ACAdBF7 Offset compensatedohms ._.. --. -_.. . . - .

.Range Offset Compensated

DCV ACV DCA ACA Ohms ACVdB ACAdB O.hms

RO Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto AutoR1 300mV 300mV 300iLA 300iLA 300 II Auto Auto 300 IIR2 3 V 3 V 3mA 3mA 3 kll Auto Auto 3 kllR3 30 V 30 V 30mA 30mA 30 kll Auto Auto 30 kllR4 300 V 300 V 300mA 300mAﾷｾｏｫｬｬ Auto Auto 30 kllR5 300 V 300 V 3 A 3 A 3Mll Auto Auto 30 kllR6 300 V 300 V 3 A 3 A 30Mll Auto Auto 30 kllR7 300 V 300 V 3 A 3 A 300Mll Auto Auto 30 kll

3-3


\EEE-488 PROGRAMMING

3.3 BUS CONNECTIONS

Figure 3-3. IEEE·488 Connections

INSTRUMENTINSTRUMENTTheModel196is intendedto beconnectedto theIEEE-488busthroughacableequippedwith standardIEEE-488con-nectors,anexampleof which is shownin Figure3-2. Theconnectoris designedto bestackedto allow a numberofparallel connectionsat one ｩｮｳｴｲｵｭ･ｮｴ Two screwsarelocatedon eachconnectorto ensurethatconnectionsre-main secure.Currentstandardscall for metric threads,whichareidentifiedwith darkcoloredscrews.Earlierver-sionshaddifferentscrews,which weresilvercolored.Donot attemptto usethesetypeof connectorson theModel196, which is-designedfor metric threads.

Figure ＳｾＲ IEEE-488 Connector

A typicalconnectingschemefor amultiple-instrumenttestsetup is shownin Figure3-3.Althoughanynumberof con-nectorscanbestackedononeinstrument,it is recommend-ed that you stackno more thanthreeconnectorson anyone unit to avoid possiblemechanicaldamage.

Connectthe Model 196 to the IEEE-488bus asfollows:

1. Line up the·cableconnectorwith theconnectorlocatedon the rearpanelof the instrument.The connectorisdesignedsothatit will fit onlyoneway.Figure3-4 showsthelocationof theIEEE-488connectorontheinstrument.

2. Tightenthescrewssecurely,butdonotovertightenthem.3. Add additionalconnectorsfrom otherinstruments,as

required.4. Makecertainthat theotherendof thecableis properly

connected to the controller. Most controllers areequippedwith an IEEE-488style connector,but a fewmay requirea different-type of connectingcable.Con-sult the instructionmanualfor your controllerfor theproperconnectingmethod.

3-4


Figure 3-4. IEEE·488 Connector Location

NOTETheIEEE-488busis limited to a maximumof 15devices,including the controller.The maximumcablelength is 20 meters,or 2 meterstimes thenumberof devices,which everis less.Failuretoobservethese limits may result in erratic busoperation.

Customcablesmaybe constructedby usingthe informa- .tion in Thble3-2 andFigure3-5. Table3-2 lists thecontactassignmentsfor thebus,andFigure3-5 showsthecontactconfiguration.


Table 3·2. IEEE Contact Designation

Contact IEEE-488Number Designation Type

1 0101 Data2 0102 Data3 0103 Data4 0104 Data5 EOI (24)* Management6 DAV Handshake7 NRFD Handshake8 NDAC Handshake9 IFe Management

10 SRQ Management11 ATN Management12 SHIELD Ground13 DI05 Data14 0106 Data15 0107 Data16 DI08 Data17 REN (24)* Management18 Gnd, (6)* Ground19 Gnd, (7)* Ground20 Gnd, (8)* Ground21 Gnd, (9)* Ground22 Gnd, (10)* Ground23 Gnd, (11)* Ground24 Gnd, LOGIC Ground

*Numbersinparenthesesrefer to signal ground returnof referencencontact number. EOI and REN signallines return on contact24.

3.4 INTERFACE FUNCTION CODES

CAUTIONIEEE-488 common is connected to chassisground and cannot be floated.

CONTACT 12

CONTACT 2+

CONTACT 1

CONTACT 13

Theinterfacefunctioncodes,whicharepartof theIEEE-488standards,definean instrument'sability to supportvariousinterfacefunctions,andtheyshouldnotbeconfusedwithprogrammingcommandsfoundelsewherein thismariual.Interfacefunctioncodesfor theModel196arelistedin Table3-3 andarelistedfor convenienceon therearpaneladja-centto theIEEE-488 Connector.ThecodesdefineMode1196capabilitiesasfollows:

SH (SourceHandshake)-SH1definesthe ability of theModel 196to properlyhandshakedataor commandbyteswhenthe unit is actingas a source.

AH (AcceptorHandshake)-AHl definestheability of theModel 196 to properlyhandshakethe bus whenit is ac-ting asan acceptorof dataor commands.

Figure 3-5. Contact Assignments

- ._....T (Talker)-Theability of the Model 196 to senddataoverthebusto otherdevicesis definedby theT function.Model196 talker capabilitiesexist only after the instrumenthasbeenaddressedto talk.



TheModel196mustreceiveallstencommandbeforeit willrespondto addressedcommandsoverthebus.Similarly,theinstrumentmustreceivea talk commandbeforeit willtransmitits data.Theselistenandtalk commandsarede-rived from theprimaryaddressof the instrument,whichis set to 7 at the factory. Until you becomemorefamiliarwith your instrument,it is recommendedthat you leavethe addressat this value becausethe programmingex-amples in this manual assumethe instrumentis pro-grammedfor that address.

3.5 PRIMARY ADDRESS SELECTION

Theprimaryaddresscanbeprogrammedfor anyvaluebet-ween0and30.However.eachdeviceonthebusmusthavea uniqueprimaryaddress-.a factorthatshouldbekept inmindwhensettingtheprimaryaddressof theModel 196.Most controllersalso usea primary address;consultthecontrollerinstructionmanualfor details.Whateveraddressis used,it mustbethesameasthevaluespecifiedaspartof the controller'sprogramminglanguage.

SR(ServiceRequest)-TheSRfunction definestheabilityof the Model 196 to requestservicefrom the controller.

RL (Remote-Local)-TheRL function definesthecapabili-ty of the Model 196 to be placedin the remoteor localmodes.

L (Ustener)-TheL functiondefinestheability of theModel196to receivedevice-dependentdataoverthebus.Listenercapabilitiesexist only after the instrumenthasbeenad-dressedto listen.

PP(ParallelPoll)-TheModel196doesnothaveparallelpoll-ing capabilities.

DC (DeviceOear)-TheDCfunction definestheability ofthe Model 196 to be cleared(initialized).

Dr (DeviceTrigger)-Theability for theModel 196to haveits readingstriggeredis definedby theDr function.

C (Controller)-TheModel 196 doesnot havecontrollercapabilities.

TE (ExtendedTalker)-TheModel196doesnothaveextend- To checkthe presentlyprogrammedprimary address,ored talker capabilities. to changeto a new one, proceedasfollows:

LE (ExtendedListener)-TheModel 196doesnot haveex-tendedllstenercapabilities.

E (BusDriverType)-TheModel196hasopen-collectorbusdrivers.

1. PressPRGM,3, 1. Thecurrentprimaryaddresswill bedisplayed.For example,if the currentaddressis 7, thefollowing messagewill be displayed:

(JJ IE

Table 3-3. Model 196 Interface Function Codes

Code InterfaceFunctionSHI SourceHandshakecapabilityAH1 AcceptorHandshakecapabilityT6 Talker (Basic talker, Serial poll, Unaddressed

to talk on LAG)IA Listener(Basic llstener,Unaddressedto llsten

on TAG)SRI ServiceRequestcapabilityRLl Remote/LocalcapabilityPPO No ParallelPoll capabilityDCl DeviceOearcapabilityDI1 DeviceTrigger capabilityCO No ControllercapabilityEl OpenCollectorBus DriversTEO No ExtendedThlker capabilitiesLEO No ExtendedListenercapabilities·

•

2. To modify the address,key in a new value (0-30) withthe numericdatabuttons.

3. With the desiredaddressvalue displayed,press theENTER button.The addresswill be programmedandtheinstrumentwill returnto thepreviousoperatingstate.

4. To storetheaddressasthepowerup address,run Pro-gram30.

Note: For detailedinformationon usingPrograms30 and31, refer to paragraph2.7.

3.6 CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING

A numberof IEEE-488 controllersare available,eachofwhichhasits·ownprogramminglanguage.In this section,wewill discusstheprogramminglanguagefor theHewlett-PackardHP-85.

3-6


NOTEProgramminginformationfor usingtheIBM POXTequippedwith a Model 8573A ffiEE-488 interfaceis containedin AppendixB.

3.6.1 Controller Handler Software

Beforea specificcontrollercanbeusedover theIEEE-488bus,it musthaveffiEE-488 handlersoftwareinstalled.Withsomecontrollerslike theHP-85,thesoftwareis locatedinan optional I/O ROM, and no software installation isnecessaryon thepartof theuser.In othercases,softwaremustbe loadedfrom a disketteandinitialized, as is thecasewith the Model 8573A interface.

Othersmallcomputersthatcanbe usedasffiEE-488 con-trollersmaynotsupportall ffiEE-488 functions.With some,interfaceprogrammingmaydependon theparticularin-terfacebeingused.Manytimes,little "tricks" arenecessaryto obtain the desiredresults.

Fromtheprecedingdiscussion,themessageis clear:makesurethepropersoftwareis beingusedwith theinterface.Oftentheusermayincorrectlysuspectthatthehardwareis causinga problem,whenit wasthe softwareall along.

3.6.2 BASIC Interface ProgrammingStatements

Theprogramminginstructionscoveredin this sectionin-cludeexampleswritten in HP-85BASIC. This computerwaschosenfor theexamplesbecauseof its versatilityin control-ling the IEEE-488bus.A partial list of statementsfor theHP-85is shownin Table3-4.

HP-85statementshavea oneor threedigit argumentthatmustbespecifiedaspartof the statement.ThefIrst digitis theinterfaceselectcode,which is setto 7 at thefactory.Thelast two digits of thosestatementsrequiringa 3-digitargumentspecify the primary address.In the examplesshown,the defaultModel 196address(7) is shown.Foradifferent address,you would of coursechangethe cor-respondingdigits in the programmingstatement.

IEEE·488 PROGRAMMING

Someofthestatementshavetwo forms,with theexactcon-figurationdependingonthecommandto besentoverthebus.For example,CLEAR 7 sendsa DCL commandoverthebus, while CLEAR 7CJ7sendsthe SDCcommandto adevicewith a primary addressof 7.

Table 3-4. BASIC Statements Necessary to SendBus Commands

.Action HP-85 Statement

Transmit-string to device7. OUTPUT 707; A$Obtainstring from device7. ENTER 707; A$SendGTL to device7. LOCAL 707SendSDC to device7. CLEAR 707SendDCL to all devices. CLEAR 7Sendremoteenable. REMOTE 7Cancelremoteenable. LOCAL 7Serialpoll device7. SPOll (707)SendLocal Lockout. LOCAL lOCKOUTSendGET to device. TRIGGER 707SendIFC. ABORTIO 7

3.7 FRONT PANEL ASPECTS OF IEEE·488OPERATION

Thefollowing paragraphsdiscussaspectsof thefront panelthatarepartof ffiEE-A88 operation,includingfront panelerrormessages,ffiEE-488 statusindicators,andtheLOCALkey.

3.7.1 Front Panel Error Messages

TheModel196has a numberof front panelerrormessagesassociatedwith ffiEE-488 programming.Thesemessagesareintendedto inform you of certainconditionsthatmayoccurwhensendingdeVice-dependentcommandsto theinstrument,assummarizedin Table3-5.

Thefollowing paragraphsdiscusseachof thesemessagesin detail. Note that the instrumentmay be programmedto generatean SRQ (paragraph3.9.13),and the Ul errorword can be checked for specific error conditions(paragraph3.9.16) if any of theseerrorsoccur.

3-7



Table 3-5. Front Panel IEEE-488 Messages

Message Descrintion

NO REMOTE Instrumentprogrammed"'ilb RENfalse.

roDC illegal Device-dep.endentCommandroDCO illegal Device-dependentCommand

OptionTRIG ERROR Instrumenttriggeredwhile it is still

SHORTTIMEprocessinga previoustrigger.Instrumentcannotstorereadingsatprogrammedinterval. Readingswillbe storedas fast as the instrUlIlentcanrun.

BIG STRING Programmeddisplaymessageex-ceeds10 characters.

CALWCKED Calibrationcommandsentwithcalibrationswitch in the disableposition.

CONFLICT DataStore-Instrumentcannotstorereadingsat a high speedinterval (1to 14ms)while in an invalid state.Storagewill not occur.

Calibration-CalibrationcOmmandisignoredwhen instrumentis in an ill-valid state(i.e. dB functiOIi.). ---

--

NOTE: Errormessagesassociatedwith translatorsoftwareare locatedin paragraph3.10.

No RemoteEnor

A no remoteerrorwill occurif the instrumentreceivesadevice-dependentcommandandtheREN (RemoteEnable)line is false. In this instance,the following errormessagewill be displayedon the front panel:

NO REMOTE

Th" errorconditioncanbecorrectedby placingthe RENline true beforeattemptingto programthe instrument.

HP-85 ProgrammingExample-Todemonstratethe NQREMOTE error message,type in the following lines:

LOCAL 7OUTPUT 707; "R1X"

3-8

Note that the NO REMOTE error messageis brieflydisplayedwhenthe secondstatementaboveis executed.

IDDC (Illegal Device-DependentCommand)Enor

An roDC error occUrswhenthe unit receivesan invalidcommandoverthebus.Forexample,thecommandstringElX includesanillegal commandbecausetheletterE is notpartof theinstrument'sprogramminglanguage.Whenanillegal commandis received,the instrumentwill brieflydisplay the following error message:

roDC

To correcttheerrorcondition,sendonly valid commands.Referto paragraph3.9for device-dependentcommandpro-grammingdetails.

HP-85ProgrammingExample-TodemonstrateanroDCer-ror, usethe following statements:

REMOTE 707OUTPUT 707; "E1X"

NotethattheroDCerrormessageis briefly displayedwhenthe secondstatementaboveis executed.

IDDCO (Illegal Device-DependentCommandOption)Error

ｓ･ｾ､ｩｮ the instrumenta legal commandwith an illegaloptionthatcannotbeautomaticallyscaledwithin boundswill result-in the following front panelerror message:

roDCO

For example,the commandY9X hasan illegal option (9)thatis notpart-oftheinstrument'sprogramminglanguage.Thus,althoughthecommand(Y) itself is valid, theoption(9) is not, and the roDCO error will result. -

To correctthiserrorcondition,useonlyvalid commandop-tions, asdiscussedin paragraph3.9.

HP-85ProgrammingExample-DemonstrateanroDCOer-ror with the following statements:


REMOTE 707OUTPUT 707; "V9X"

Note that the IDDCO error messageis briefly displayedwhen the secondstatementaboveis executed.

'niggerOverrunError

A triggeroverrunerroroccurswhentheinstrumentreceivesa trigger while still processinga readingfrom a previoustrigger. Note that only the overruntriggersare ignored.Theseoverruntriggerswill not affect the instrumentex-ceptto generatethemessagebelow.Whena triggerover-run occurs, the following front panel messagewill bedisplayedfor approXimatelyonesecond:

TRIG ERROR

HP-85 ProgrammingExample-Todemonstratea triggeroverrunerror,enterthefollowing statementsinto theHP-85keyboard:

REMOTE 707OUTPUT 707; , 'T3X' ,

TRIGGER 707@ TRIGGER 707

Notethatthetriggeroverrunmessageis displayedaftertheEND LINE key is presseda third time. .

Big String Error

A big stringerroroccurswhentrying to displayamessage(usingtheD command)thatexceedslOd1aracters.Blankdisplaydigitsusedin themessagecountascharacters.Theinvalid messageis ignoredandthe following messageisdisplayedbriefly when a big string error occurs:

BIG STRING

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Enterthe following state,mentsinto thecomputerto demonstrateabig stringerror:

REMOTE 707OUTPUT 707; "DH0W@ARmVoU1X"

WhenEND LINE is pressedthesecondtimethebig stringerror will occurbecausethe messageis madeup of 12characters.


Cal LockedError

A cal lockederroroccurswhentrying to calibratethe in-strumentover the bus with the front panel calibrationswitchin thedisableposition.Calibrationcommandswillbe ignoredand the following messagewill be displayedbriefly:

CAL LOCKED

ShortTime Error

A shorttime erroroccurswhentheinstrumentcannotstorereadingsin the datastoreat theprogrammedinterval (QcOriunand).However,theinstrumentwill continueto storereadingsas fast as it- can run. The following messageisdisplayedbriefly whena short time error occurs:

SHORTTIME

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Todemonstrateashorttimeerror, enterthe following statementsinto the computer:

REt10TE 707OUTPUT 707; , 'Q100F2T2X' ,

TRIGGER 707

WhenEND LINE is pressedthethird time, theinstrumentwill startstoringreadingsin thebuffer. However,sincethe

. instrumentcannotmakeresistancemeasurements(F2) attheselectedinterval(Q100),shortperioderrorswill occur.

Conflict Error

A conflict erroroccurswhentrying to storereadingsatahigh speedinterval (lms to 14ms)while theinstrumentisin an invalid state.After sendinga commandstring thatcontalnstheintervalcommand(Q), thefollowing messageis displayedbriefly whena conflict error occurs:

CONFUCT

The entirecommandstring will be ignoredandthe datastorewill not start.

Valid instrumentstatesfor high speeddatastoragearelistedin Table3-11.

3-9


IEEE-41l1l PROGRAMMING

A conflict erroralsooccurswhentrying to senda calibra·tion commandoverthebuswhile the instrumentis in aninvalid state,suchasthedB function.Theentirecommandstring is ignoredwhen a conflict error occurs.

HP-85 Programming Example-Enter the followingstatementsinto thecomputerto demonstratea CONFLICTerror:

ｒｅｾＱＰｔ 707OUTPUT 707; "Q1F2X"

WhenEND LINE is pressedthesecondtime, a conflict er-ror will occurbecausedatacannotbe storedat the highspeedintervalof 1ms(Q1) with theinstrumentin theohmsfunction (F2).Theentirecommandstringwill beignored.

3.7.2 IEEE·488 Status Indicators and LOCALKey

The TLK, RMT, and LSN indicators show the present-IEEE-488statosof theinstrument.Eachof theseindicatorsis briefly describedbelow.

STATUS INDICATORS

TLK RHT LSND D D

LOCAL

o

TALK-The TLK indicatorwill beonwhentheinstrumentis in the talkeractivestate.Theunit is placedin this stateby addressingit to talk with thecorrectMfA (My Talk Ad-dress)command.TLK will be off whentheunit is in thetalkeridle state.Theinstrumentis placedin thetalkeridlestateby sendingit-an UNT (Untalk) command,address-ing it tolisten,orwith theIFC (InterfaceGear)command.

REMOTE-TheRMT indicatorshowswhentheinstrumentis in theremotemode.NotethatRMT doesnotnecessarilyindicatethestateof theRENline, astheinstrumentmustbe addressedto listen with REN truebeforetheRMT in-dicatorwill tornon. Whentheinstrumentis in remote,allfront panelkeysexceptfor theLOCAL keywill belockedout.WhenRMT is tomedoff, theinstrumentis in thelocalmode.

USTEN-TheLSN indicatorwill beonwhentheModel196is in thelisteneractivestate,which is activatedby address-ing the instrumentto listen with the correctMLA (MyListenAddress)command.LSN will beoff whentheunitis in thelisteneridle state.The unit canbeplacedin thelisteneridle stateby sendingUNL (unlisten),addressingit to talk, or by sendingIFC (InterfaceGear)overthebus.

LOCAL-The LOCAL key cancelsthe remotemodeandrestoreslocal operationof the instrumento-

Sinceall front panelkeys exceptLOCAL are lockedout-whentheinstrumentis in remote,thiskeyprovidesa con-venientmethodof restoringfront paneloperation.Press-ingLOCAL will alsotornoff theRMT indicatorandretomthe display to the normal mode if user messageswerepreviouslydisplayedwith the D command.

NotethattheLOCAL keywill alsobeinoperativeif theLLO(Local Lockout) commandis in effect.

Table 3·6.General Bus Commands and Associated BASIC Statements

HP-85Command Statement Affect on Model 196

REN REMOTE 7 Goesinto remotewhennext addressed.IFC ABORTIO 7 Goesinto talker andlisteneridle states.LLO LOCAL LOCKOUT 7 Front panelcontrolslockedout.GTL LOCAL 707 Cancelremote.DCL CLEAR 7 Retomsto default conditions:SDC CLEAR 707 Retomsto default conditions.GET TRIGGER 707 Triggersreadingin T2 and13 modes.

3·10


3.8 GENERAL BUS COMMANDPROGRAMMING

GeneralbuscommandsarethosecommandssuchasDCLthat havethe samegeneralpurposeregardlessof the in-strument.Commandssupportedby the Model 196 aresummarizedin Thble 3-6, which lists HP-85 statementsnecessaryto sendeachcommand.Note that commandsrequiringa primary addressassumethat the Model 196primary addressis set to 7 (its factory defaultaddress).

3.8.1 REN (Remote Enable)

REN is a uniline commandthat mustbe assertedby thecontroller to place the Model 196 in the remotemode.SimplysettingREN truewill not actuallyplacetheinstru-ment in remote;instead,the unit mustbe addressedtolisten after REN is set true.

Generally,remoteenableshouldbeassertedbeforeattemp-ting to programtheinstrumentoverthebus.Oncethein-strument is in remote, all front panel ｾ controls exceptLOCAL will beinoperative.Normalfront paneloperationcanbe restoredby pressingthe LOCAL key.

To placetheModel196in theremotemode,thecontrollermust performthe following sequence:

ｾ Setthe REN line true.2. Addressthe Model 196 to listen.

HP-85 ProgrammingExample-Placethe Model 196 inremotewith the following statement:

ｒｅｾＱＰｔ 707

WhentheEND LINE key is pressed,theModel196shouldbe in the remotemodeas indicatedby the RMT annun-ciator light. If not, checkto seethat properbusconnec-tions aremade,andthat the instrumentis programmedfor the correctprimary address(7).

Note that all front panelcontrols ･ｸ｣･ｰｴｾｌｏｃａ (and,ofcourse,POWER)areinoperativewhile the instrumentisin remote.You canrestorenormalfront paneloperationbypressingthe LOCAL button.

3.8.2 IFC (Interface Clear)

The !FC commandis sentby the controller to placethe


Model 196 in the talker andlisteneridle statescThe unitwill respondto the!FCcommandbycancellingfront panel1I\LK or LISTEN lights, if the instrumentwaspreviouslyplacedin one of thosemodes.

To sendthe!FCcommand,thecontrollerneedonlysetthe!FC line true for a minimum of lO0l'8ec.

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Beforedemonstratingthe!FCcommand,placetheinstrumentin thetalkeractivestatewith the following statements:

REMOTE 707ENTER 707; A$

At this point, theRMT andTLK indicatorsshouldbeon.

The!FC commandcanbesentby typing in thefollowingstatement:

ABORTIO 7

NotethattheTLK indicatorturnsoff whentheEND LINEkey is presse-d.

3.8.3 LLO (Local Lockout)

The LLO commandis usedto lock out operationof theLOCAL key, therebycompletelylocking out front paneloperationof theinstrument(recallthattheremainingcon-trols are locked out when the instrumentis placedinremote).

To sendthe LLO command,thecontrollermustperformthe following steps:

1. SetA1N true.2. Placethe LLO commandbyte on the databus.

To cancellocal lockoutandreturn controlto thefront panel,RENmustbesetfalseby sendingtheLOCAL 7 commandto the instrument.

Hp-85 ProgrammingExample-Toverify LLO operation,enterthe following statements:

REMOTE 707LOCAL LOCKOUT 7

3-11



After thesecondstatementis executed,theWCAL keywill . it doesnot setREN false.be lockedout.

HP-sS ProgrammingExample-Placetheinstrumentin theTo cancelLLO, type in the following statement: remotemodewith the following statement:

LOCAL 7 REMOTE 707

WhenENDLINE is pressed,controlto thefront panelwill Verify that the instrumentis in remote.be restored.

3.8.4 GTL (Go To Local)

The GTL commandis usedto takethe instrumentout oftheremotemodeandrestoreoperationof thefront panelkeys. -

SendGTL as follows:

LOCAL 707

Notethat theinstrumentgoesinto thelocalmode,andthatoperationof the front panelkeyshasnow beenrestored.

To sendGTL, the controllermustperformthe following 3.8.5 DCl (Device Clear)sequence:

1. SetATN true.2. Addressthe Model 196 to listen.3. Placethe GTL commandbyte on the datalines.

TheGTL commandwill notcancelLW (locallockout)since

The DCL commandmay be usedto clear the Model 196andreturn it to its defaultconditions.Note-that the DCLcommandis notanaddressedcommand,soall instrumentsequippedto implementDCL will do so simultaneously.When the Model 196 receivesa DCL command,it- willreturn to eitherthefactorydefaultconditionslistedin Tables2-1 and3-7 or to the usersaveddefault conditions.

Table 3-7. Factory Default Conditions

Mode - Command Status - -- -

Multiplex Al EnabledReading BO AID converterFunction FO DC voltsDataFormat GO Sendprefix with readingSelf.:r'est IO ClearEOr KD EnableEOI andbus hold-off on XSRQ MO DisabledInternal Digital Filter Nl EnabledFilter PO DisabledDataStoreInterval QO One-shot-into bufferData StoreSize 11 OnereadingRange R4 300vRate 53 6'hd, line cycle integrationTrira;er T6 Continuouson externaltriggerDe ay WO No delayTerminator YO CRLFZero 20 Disabled

3-12



To sendtheDCL command,thecontroller!nllst perform When the abovestatementis executed,the instrum.entthe following steps: returnsto the defaultconfiguration.

1. SetATN true.2. Placethe DCL commandbyte on the datablls.

Notes:

1. DCL will retwn the instrumentto the default line fre-qllency setting.

2. DCL will nothaveanyaffectontherurrentIEEE address.

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Placethel.lIlit in anoperat-ing modethat is not a default"condition.Now enlerthefollowing statementinto the HP-85keyboard:

CLEAR 7

WhentheEND LINE key is pressed,theinstrllmentrellIInsto the defaultconditions.

3.8.6 SDC (Selective Device Clear)

The SDCcommandis an addressedcommandthat per-formsessentiallythesamefunctionastheDCL command.However,sinceeachdevicemllst beindividlla1ly address-ed, theSDCcommandprovidesa methodto clearonly asingle, selectedinstrliment instead of clearing all in-strlimentssimultaneollsly,asis thecasewith DCL. WhentheModel 196 receivesthe SDCcommand,it will retmnto eitherthe factory defaultconditionslisted in Tables3-7and2-1 or to the lIser saveddefacltconditions.

To transmitthe SDCcommand,the controllermllst per-form the following steps:

1. SetATN true.2. Addressthe Model 196 to listen.3. Placethe SDCcommandbyte-onthe databllS.

Notes:

1. SDCwill retwn the instrumentto the defacltline fre-qllency setting.

2. SDCwill nothaveanyaffectontherurrentIEEEaddress.

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Usingseveralfront panelcontrols,alterinstrllmentstatesfrom thedefaultconfigura-tion. SendSDC with the following statement:

CLEAR 707

3.8.7 GET (Group Execute Trigger)

GETmaybelIsedto initiateaModel196measllrementse-qllenceif theinstrlImentis placedin the apprppriatetrig-germode(seeparagraph3.9).Oncetriggered,the instru-mentwill performthe measllIementseqllencein accord-ancewith previollslyselectedrateandsampleparameters.

To sendGET, the controllermllst performthe followingseqllence:

1. SetATN low.2. Addressthe Model 196 to listen.3. Placethe GET commandbyte on the databllS.

HP-85 ProgrammingExample-Typein the followingstatementsto placethe instrliment in the correcttriggermodefor purposesof this demonstration:

REMOTE 707OUTPUT 707; "T3X"

Now triggerthemeasllIementseqllenceby sendingGETwith the following statement:

TRIGGER 707

WhentheEND LINE key is pressed,themeasllIementse-quencewill be triggered.

3.8.8 Serial Polling (SPE,SPD)

Theserialpollingsequenceis lISedto obtaintheModel196serialpoll byte.Theserialpoll bytecontainsimportantin-formation about internal functions, as described inparagraph3.9.13.Theserialpolling sequencecanalsobeusedby thecontrollerto determinewhich instrlimentonthe bushasassertedSRQ (ServiceRequest).

The serial polling sequenceis generally conductedasfollows:

1. The controllersetsATN true.2. Thecontrollerthenplacesthe SPE(SerialPoll Enable)

commandbyteon thedatabus.At this point; alI activedevicesarein theserial1'.011enabledmodeandwaitingto be addressed.

3·13



3. The Model 196 is thenaddressedto talk.4. The controllersetsATN false.5. Theinstrumentplacesits serialpoll byteonthedatabus

to be readby the controller.6. The controllerthensetsATN true andI'lacesthe SPD

(SerialPoll Disable)commandbyte on the databl,lS toendthe serial polling sequence.

Once instrumentsare in the serial poll mode, steps3through5 abovecanberepeatedbysendingthecorrecttalkaddressfor eachinstrument.

HP-85 ProgrammingExample-TheHP-85 SPaLLstate-mentautomaticallyperformsthesequencejust-descnbed.To demonstrateserial polling, type in the followingstatements:

REt'lOTE 707S= SPOLL (707)

DISP S

When the abovestatementsare executed,theModel 196is serialpolled,andthedecimalvalueof theserialpoll byteis displayedon the computerCRT. -

3.9 DEVICE-DEPENDENT COMMANDPROGRAMMING

IEEE-488device-dependentcommandsareusedwith theModel196to controlvariousoperatingmodessuchasfunc-tion, range,triggermodeanddataformat. Eachcommandis madeup of a singleASCII letterfollowed by a numberrepresentinganoption of thatcommand.For example,acommandto controlthemeasuringfunctionis programmedby sendinganASCn"F" followed by a numberrepresent-ing the function option. The IEEE-488busactually treats-thesecommandsasdatain thatATN is falsewhenthecom-mandsaxetransmitted.

A numberof commandsmaybegroupedtogetherin onestring. A commandstring is usually terminatedwith anASCII "X" chaxacter,which tells theinstrumentto executethecommandstring.Commandssentwithouttheexecutecharacterwill not be executedat that time, but they willberetainedwithin an internalcommandbuffer for execu-tion at the time theX chaxacteris received.If any errorsoccur,theinstrumentwill displayaPl?ropriatefront panelerrormessagesandgenerate-anSRQifprogrammedto-doso.

3-14

Commandsthataffectinstrumentoperationwill triggerareadingwhenthecommandis executed.ThesebusCOm-mandsaffect theModel196muchlike thefront panelcon-trols. Notethatcommandsarenotnecessarilyexecutedinthe order received; instead, they will be executedinalphabeticalorder.Thusto forceaparticularcommandse-quence,youwould follow eachcommandwith theexecutecharacter(X), asin theexamplestring,LOXF2X, whichwillresettheinstrumentto factorydefaultconditio.nsandthenselectthe ohmsfunction.

Device-dependentcommandscanbe senteitheroneat atime, or in groupsof severalcommandswithin a singlestring. Someexamplesof valid commandstringsinclude:

FOX-Singlecommandstring.FOKlPOROX-Multiplecommandstring.T6 X-Spacesare ignored.

Typical invalid commandstringsinclude:

ElX-Invalid command,asE is not oneof theinstrumentcommands.

Fl5X-Invalidcommandoptionbecause15 is notanoptionof the F command.

If an illegal command(lODC), illegal commandoption(IDDCO), is sent,or if a commandstringis sentwith RENfalse, the string will be ignored.

Device-dependentcommandsthatcontrol theModel 196arelistedin Thble3-8.Thesecommandsare coveredin detailin thefollowing paragraphs.Theassociatedprogrammingexamplesshowhowto sendthecommandswith theHP-85.

NOTEProgrammingexamplesassumethat the Model196 is at its factory defaultvalue of 7.

In orderto senda device-dependent-command,the con-troller mustperform the following steps:

1. Set ATN true.2. Addressthe Model 196 to listen.3. SetATN false.4. Sendthe commandstring over the busone byte at a

time.


Table 3-8. Device-Dependent Command Summary


Mode Command Descriution Paral!l'aphExecute X Executeotherdevice-dependent commands. 3.9.1Function FO DC volts 3.9.2

F1 AC voltsF2 OhmsF3 DC current--F4 AC currentF5 ACVdBF6 ACAdBF7 Offsetcompensatedohms

Range 3.9.3Offset

CompensatedDCV ACV DCA ACA Ohms ACVdB ACA dB Ohms

RO Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto AutoR1 300mV 300mV 300p.A 300p.A 3OO11 Auto Auto 3OO11R2 3 V 3 V 3mA 3mA 3kll Auto Auto 3kllR3 30 V aomv 30mA 30mA 30kll Auto Auto 30kllR4 300 V 300 V 300mA 300mA 300 kll Auto Auto 30 kllR5 300 V 300 V 3 A 3 A 3Mll Auto Auto 30 kllR6 300 V 300 V 3 A 3 A 30Mll Auto Auto 30 kllR7 300 V 300 V 3 A 3 A 300Mll Auto Auto 30 kll

Zero ZO Zero disabled 3.9.4Z1 Zero enabledZ2 Zero enabledusin!\ a zerovalue (V)

Filter PO Filter disabled 3.9.5Pn Filter on with a valueof n (n=l to 99)

Rate Resolution 3.9.6Offset

CompenSatedDCV ACV DCA ACA OHMS ACV dB ACA dB Ohms

50 3'hd 3V2d 3'1,d 3V2d 3'hd(RI-R4) SV2d S'f,d S'hdSV2d(R5-R7)

51 4'1,d 4V2d 4'1,d 4V2d 4'1'd(R1-R4) SV2d S'hd SV2dSY,d(R5-R7

52 SY,d SV2d S'hd SV2d SV2d SV2d SY,d S'hd53 6'hd S'hd SY,d SV2d 6Y'd(RI-R6) SV2d S'hd 6V2d

S'hd(R7)

Integrationperiod: 3'hd=318/LSec,4'hd=2.59msec,5'/,d and6'hd=Linecycle

TriggerMode 1U Continuouson Thlk 3.9.7T1 One-shoton ThlkT2 Continuouson GET13 One-shoton GET'PI Continuouson XT5 One-shoton XT6 Continuouson External TriggerT7 One-shoton ExternalTrigger

3-15



Table 3-8. Device-Dependent Command Summary (Cant.)

- -Mode Command Description ParagraphReadingMode BO Readingsfrom A/D converter 3.9.8

Bl Readine:8from datastoreData StoreSize ro Continuousdatastoremode 3.9_9

In Data storeof n (n=1 to 500)Data StoreInterval QO One-shotinto buffer 3.9.9

Qn n=interval in milliseconds(lrnsec to 999999rnsec)Value V±nn.nnnnor Calibrationvalue, zerovalue 3.9.10

V±n.nnnnnnE+nCalibration CO Calibratefinst point usingvalue (V) 3.9.10

Cl Calibratesecondpoint using value (V) ___Default Conditions La Restorefactory default conditionsandsave(11) 3.9.11

11 Savepresentmachinestatesas default conditionsDataFormat GO

.

Readingwith prefixes. 3.9.12Gl Readingwithout prefixes.G2 Buffer readingswith prefixesand buffer locations.G3 Buffer readingswithout prefIxesand with buffer locations.G4 Buffer readingswith prefixesand without buffer locations.G5 Buffer readingswithout prefIxesandwithout buffer

locations.SRQ MO Disable 3.9.13

Ml ReadingoverflowM2 DatastorefullM4 Datastorehalf fullM8 ReadingdoneM16 ReadyM32 Error

EO! andBus Hold-off KO EnableEOI andbushold-off on X 3.9.14Kl DisableEOI, enablebushold-off on XK2 EnableEO!, disablebushold-off on XK3 Disableboth EOI andbushold-off on X

Terminator YO CR LF 3.9.15Y1 LFCRY2 CR - -

Y3 LFStatus UO Sendmachinestatusword 3.9.16

U1 Senderror conditionsU2 SendtranslatorwordU3 Sendbuffer sizeU4 Sendaveragereadingin bufferUS Sendlowest readingin bufferU6 Sendhighestreadingin bufferU7 SendcurrentvalueU8 Sendinput switch status(front/rear)

Multiplex AO Auto/Cal multiplex disabled 3.9.17Al Auto/Cal multiplex enabled

3·16



Table 3-8. Device-Dependent Command Summary (Cant.)

Ｎ［ｾ .. -,;-- -

Mode Command Description ParagraphDelav Wn ｮｾ､･ｬ｡ oeriod in milliseconds,(Omsecto 60000msec) 3.9.18Self-test JO ｔｨｾＮｒｏｍＬｒａｍＬｅＲｐｒｏ 3.9.19-Hit Button Hn Hit front Danelbuttonnumbern 3.9.20Display Da Display up to 10 charactermessage.｡ｾ｣ｨ｡ｲ｡｣ｴ･ 3.9.21

D CanceldiSolavmodeExponentialFilter NO Internal filter off 3.9.22

N1 Internal filter on."..

NOTERENmustbetruewhensendingdevice-dependentcommandsto theinstrument,or it will ignorethecommandanddisplay a bus error message.

GeneralHP-85ProgrammingExample-Device-dependentcommandsmaybesentfrom theHP-85with thefollowingstatement:

OUTPUT 707; A$

A$ iri thiscasecontainstheASCII charactersrepresentingthe commandstring.

3.9.1 Execute (X)

Theexecutecommandis implementedby sendinganASCII"X" overthebus.Its purposeis to direct theModel 196toexecuteotherdevice-dependentcommandssuchasF(func"tion) or R (range).Usually, theexecutecharacteris thelastbytein thecommandstring(a numberof commandsmaybegroupedtogetherinto onestring); however,theremaybecertaincircumstanceswhereit isdesirablli!to sendacom-mand string at one time, and then send the executecharacterlateron. CommandstringssentWithout theex-ecutecharacterwill bestoredwithin aninternalcommandbuffer for laterexecution.WhentheX characteris finallytransmitted,thestoredcommandswill beexecuted,assum-ing that all commandsin the previousstringwerevalid.

HP-85 ProgrammingEXample-Enterthe tollowing state-mentsinto the HP-85keyboard:

REt10TE 707OUTPUT 707;' 'X',

X characterwill betransmittedto theinstrument.No modechangeswill occurwiththisexamplebecausenoothercom-mandsweresent.Notethattheinstrumentremainsin thelisteneractive stateafter the commandis transmitted.

3.9.2 Function (F)

Thefunction commandallows theuserto selectthe typeof measurementmadeby theModel196.Whentheinstru-mentrespondsto a functioncommand,it will bereadytotakea readingoncethe front-endis setUfo The functionmay be programmedby sendingone 0 the followingcommands:

FO ｾ DC VoltsFl ｾ AC VoltsF2 ｾ OhmsF3 ｾ DC CurrentF4 ｾ AC CurrentF5 ｾ ACV dBF6 ｾ ACA dBF7 ｾ Offset CompensatedOhms

Uponpowerup, oraftertheinstrumentreceivesaDCL orSDCcommand,the Model 196 will return to the defaultcondition.

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Placetheinstrumentin theohmsfunctionby pressingtheOHMSbuttonandenterthefollowing statementsinto the HP-85 keyboard:

RH10TE 707OUTPUT 707; , , FeX' ,

WhenEND LINE is pressedthe secondtime, the instru-WhentheEND LINE key is pressedthesecondtime, the mentchangesto DC volts.

3-17


\EEE-488 PROGRAMMING

3.9.3 Range (R)

The range command gives the user control over the sen-sitivity of theinstrument.Thisconunand,andits options,performessentiallythesamefunctionsasthefront panelRange buttons. Range conunandparametersand therespectiverangesfor eachmeasuringfunction areｳｕｬｬＱmarizedin Table3-9. Theinstrumentwill bereadyto takea readingafter therangeis setup whenrespondingto arangeconunand.

Uponpowerup, oraftertheinstrumentreceivesaDCL orSDCcommand,the Model 196 will returnto the defaultcondition.

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Makesuretheinstrumentis in the autorangemodeand then enterthe following,statementsinto the HP-85:

REMOTE ?0?OUTPUT ?0?; , 'R3X' ,

WhentheEND LINE key is pressedthesecondtime, theinstrumentcancelstheautorangemode,andenterstheR3rangeinstead. --

3.9.4 Zero (Z)

Over thebus, the zeromodifier canbe controlledin thesameway that it is controlledfrom thefront panel.Referto paragraphs2.6.2and2.7.15(zeroprogram)for acompletedescriptionof thezeromodifier. Thezeromodifier is con-trolledby sendingoneof thefullowingzerocommandsoverthe bus:

ZO = Zero disabled.Zl = Zero enabled.Z2 = Zero enabledusinga zerovalue (V).

SendingZl hasthesameeffectaspressingtheZERObut-ｾｴＹｮ Zero will enable,and the displaywill zerowith theinputsignalbecomingthezerobaselinelevel.Thebaselinewill be storedin ProgramZERO.

TheZ2 conunandis usedwhena zerovalue,usingtheVconunand,has alreadybeenestablished.WhentheZ2com-mandis sent,subsequentreadingsrepresentthedifferencebetweentheinputsignalandthevalueof V. Also, thevalueof V is storedin ProgramZERO. For example,with 0.5Von the input, sendingtheconunandstringsV2XZ2X willresultwith zerobeingenabledandtheinstrumentreading-1.5V (0.5 - 2.0 = -1.5).

Sendingthe Z2 commandwithout a V valueestablishedis the sameas sendingthe Zl conunand.Seeparagraph3.9.10for more information on usingthe V command.

Uponpowerupor aftertheinstrumentreceivesa DCL orSDCcommand,the Model 196 Wi.ll return to the defaultcondition. The valueof V will resetto zero.

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Setthe instrumentto the3V DC range.With the front panelZERO buttondisablethe zero mode, if enabled, and enter the fullowingstatementsinto the HP-85keyboard:

REMOTE ?0?OUTPUT ?0?;" 'JIX"OUTPUT ?0?; , 'Z2X' ,

Table 3-9. Range Command Summary

Ran!eOffset Compensated

Command DCV ACV DCA ACA Ohms ACVdB ACAdB OhmsRO Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto AutoR1 300mV 300mV 300pA 300pA 300 0 Auto Auto 300 0R2 3 V 3 V 3mA 3mA 3 kO Auto Auto 3 kOR3 30 V 30 V 30rnA 30mA 30k{) Auto Auto 30 kOR4 300 V 300 V 300mA 300mA 300k{) Auto Auto 30 kOR5 300 V 300 V 3 A 3 A 3MO Auto Auto 30 kOR6 300 V 300 V 3 A 3 A 30MO Auto Auto 30 k{)R7 300 V 300 V 3 A 3 A 300MO Auto Auto 30 kO

3-18


Mter the END LINE key is pressedthe third time, theZERO indicatorwill turn on with a zerobaselinelevel of1V DC. Thezerovaluewill alsobestoredin ProgramZERO.

3.9.5 Filter (P)

Thefilter commandcontrolstheamountof filtering appliedto the input signal. The Model 196 filters the signal bytaking the weightedaverageof a numberof successivereadingsamples.Sincenoiseis mostlyrandomin nature,it Can be largely cancelledout with this method. Thenumberof readingsaveraged(filter value)canbe from 1to 99. Thefilter valuecanbeprogrammedby sendingoneof the following commands: - --

PO = Filter disabled.Pn = Filter on with a valueof n. Wheren canbefrom 1

to 99.

Uponpowerup or afterthe instrumentreceivesa DCL orSDC command,the Model 196 will returnto the defaultcondition.

Notes:1. A filter value sentover the bus is storedin Program

FIIT'ER, replacingthe previousfilter value.2. Keep in mind that each function can have its own

uniquefilter value.


When theEND LINE key is pressedthesecond.time,.thefIlter will turn on andhavea filter valueof 20.

3.9.6 Rate (5)

Theratecommandcontrolstheintegrationperiodandtheusableresolutionof theModel196.Thble3-10lists theusableresolutionon eachfunctionfor thefour 5 modes.Thein-tegrationperiod is dependent-onusableresolution asfollows:

3'12d resolution = 318l'sec4'12d resolution = 2.59msec5'12d resolution ｾ Line cycle'6'l2d resolution = Line cycle'

*20msecfor 50Hz, 16.6msecfor 60Hz.

Uponpowerupor aftertheinstrumentreceivesa DCL orSDCcommand,the Model 196 will returnto the defaultcondition.

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Fromthe front panel,setthe displayof the Model 1% for DCV at 6'12dresolution.Now enterthe following statementsinto the HP-85:

REt'IOTE 707OUTPUT 707;" S1X"

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Withthefront panelFIIT'ER WhenEND LINE is pressedthe secondtime, the 51 rateindicatoroff, enterthefollowing statementsinto theHP-85: will be selected.

REt10TE 707OUTPUT 707; , , P20X' ,

Table 3-10. Rate Command Summary

ResolutionOffset Compensated

Command DCV ACV DCA ACA Ohms ACVdB ACAdB Ohms

50 3'12d 3'12d 3lf,d 3lf,d 3'hd(R1-R4) 5lf,d 5'12d 5'hd5lf,d(R5-R7)

51 4lf,d 4lf,d 4'hd 4'hd 4'hd(R1-R4) 5lf,d 5'hd 5lf,d5'12d(R5-1'V)

52 5'12d 5'12d 5'12d 5lf,d 5lf,d 5'12d 5'hd 5'12d53 6'12d 5'hd 5'hd 5'hd 6'12d(R1-R6) 5lfzd 5lf,d 6'12d

5'12d(R7)_Integrationperiod: 3lf,d=318l'sec,4lf,d=2.59msec,5lf,d and6Y,d=Linecycle.

3·19



3.9.7 Trigger Mode (1)

Triggeringprovidesa stimulusto begina readingconver-sionwithin theinstrument.Triggeringmaybedonein twobasicways: in a continuousmode,a single trigger com-mandis usedto starta continuousseriesof readings;inaone-shottriggermode,aseparatetriggerstimulusis re-quiredto starteachconversion.TheModel 196haseighttrigger commandsasfollows:

10 = Continuouson TalkTl = One-shotOn Talk1'2= Continuouson GET13 = One-shoton GETT4 = Continuouson XT5 = One-shoton XT6 = Continuouson ExternalTriggerT7 = One-shoton ExternalTrigger

The trigger modesare paired accordingto the type ofstimulusthat is usedto trigger the instrument.In the10andTlmodes,triggeringis performedby addressingtheModel 196to talk. In the T2 and13 modes,the lEEE-488multiline GETcommandperformsthetriggerfunction.Theinstrument execute (X) characterprovides the triggerstimulusin theT4 andT5 modes.Externaltriggerpulsesprovide the trigger stimulusin theT6andT7 modes.

Uponpowerup or aftertheinstrumentreceivesa DCL orSDCcommand,the Model 196 will return to the defaultcondition.

NOTEWith the instrument in the T6 and T7 triggermodes,thefront panelENTERbuttoncanbeus-edto triggerreadings.Seeparagraph2.8for details.

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Placetheinstrumentin theone-shoton talk modewith the following statements:

RHlOTE 707OUTPUT 707;' , T1:t.' ,

Onereadingcannow betriggeredandtheresultingdataobtainedwith the following statements:

ENTER 707.' A$

DISP A$

3·20

In this example,theENTERstatementaddressestheModel196 to talk, at which point a single readingis triggered.Whenthereadinghas beenprocessed,it is sentout overto thebusto thecomputer,which thendisplaystheresult.

3.9.8 Reading Mode (8)

The readingmodecommandparametersallow the selec-tion of the sourceof data that is transmittedover theIEEE-488bus.Throughthiscommand,theuserhasachoiceof datafrom the AID converter(normalDMM readings)or thebuffer(datastore).Thereadingmodecommandsareas follows:

BO = AID converterreadingsB1 = Data Storereadings

Uponpowerupor aftertheinstrumentreceivesa DCL orSDCcommand,the Model 196 will return to the defaultcondition.

Whenin BO, normalAID readingswill besent.In a con-tinuoustriggermode,readingswill beupdatedatthecon-versionrate.The B1 commandis usedto accessreadingsfrom thebuffer.WhentheB1 commandis sent,subsequentreadingswill be takenfrom consecutivebuffer locationsbeginningwith thefirst memorylocation(001). Onceallreadingshavebeenrequested,theunitwill cyclebackandbeginagain.

HP-85 Programming Example-Enter the followingstatementsinto the computerto senda readingover thebus anddisplayit on the computerCRT.

REMOTE 707 .OUTPUT 707.' , 'B0X' ,

ENTER 707; A$DISP A$

Thesecondstatementabovesetstheinstrumentto theAIDconverterreadingmode.Thethird andfourth statementsacquirethe readinganddisplay it on the CRT.

3.9.9 Data Store Interval (Q) and Size (I)

The datastoreis controlledby the interval command(Q).and the sizecommand(I).


Interval

With theQ command,theusercanselecttheintervalthatthe instrumentwill storereadingsor selectthe one-shotmode.In one-shot,onereadingwill be storedeachtimethe instrumentis triggered.The Q commandis in thefollowing form:

ｑｏ］ｏｮ･ｾｳｨｯ into buffer.Qn=Selstorageintervalin millisec (lmsecto999999mSec).

To usethe datastorein the one-shotmode(QO), the in-strumentmustbe in a one-shottrigger mode(Tl, 13, T5orT7). In theQOT1mode,onereadingwilll:ie storedeachtime theinstrumentis addressedto talk. In theQ0I3mode,eachGET commandwill causeonereadingto be storeci.In theQOf5 mode,eachinstrumentexecutecharacter(X)will causeareadingto bestored.Finally, in theQ0I7mode,eachexternaltriggerpulsewill causea reitaingto bestored.IT the instrumentis in a continuoustriggermode(1D, TZ,T4 or T6), anIDDC error will Occur. .

NOTEWith the instrumentin the T7 trigger mode,thefront panelENTERbuttoncanbeusedto manuallystorereadingsinto the buffer. Eachpressof theENTERbuttonwill storeonereadingin thebuffer.Seeparagraph2.8 for details.

Th storereadingsataselectedinterval(Qn), theinstrumentmustbein acontinuoustriggermode(1D, TZ, ｾＧ T6). Wheflthe selected trigger occurs, the storage.process willcommence.

NOTEWith the instrumentin the T6 trigger mode, thefront panelENTER buttoncanbe usedto startaseriesof readingsto be storedin the buffer. Thestorageintervalandbuffersizearedeterminedbythe Qn and I commands respectively. Seeparagraph2.8 for details.

Size

The sizeof thedatastorecanbecontrolledby oneof thefollowing I commands.


IO=Continuousstoragemode.In=Set datastoresize to n (1 to 500).

In thecontinuousdatastoragemode(IO), storagewill notstopafter the buffer is filled (500 readings),but will pro-ceedbackto the first memorylocationandstartoverwritingdata.With theInnn command,thestorageprocesswill stopwhenthe definednumberof readingshavebeenstored.In this casethe buffer is consideredto be full.

Notes:1. When the Q or I commandis sent, '!_--,' will be

displayeduntil the first trigger occurs.2. The datastorecanbe disabledby sendingthe F com-

mand.Storagewill againresumewhentheappropriate-trigger occurs.

3. Theinstrumentmustbe in a valid operatingstate(seeThble 3-11) in order to usethe high speeddata storecapabilities.Thehigh speedintervalsare1msecthrough14msec.Theinstrumentdisplaywill blankwhile thein-strumentis storingreadingsathighspeed.IT theinstru-ment is not in a valid operatingstatefor high speedstorage,a conflict error will be displayedbriefly andstoragewill not occur.

4. Theshorttime errormessageindicatesthattheinstru-mentcannotstorereadingsat theprogrammedintervalrate. Instead,readingswill be storedasfast asthe in-strumentcanrun.

5. With 52or 53asserted,thefastestvalid storageinterval(I) is 31msecand35msecrespectively.A shorterinter-val will resultin ashorttimeerrorwhenthestoragepro-cessis started.Readingswill bestoredasfastasthein-strumentcan run.

6. Eitherduringor afterthestorageprocess,readingsmaybe recalledby usingthe B1 commandas describedinthepreviousparagraph.Also, the highest,lowestandaveragereadingin a full buffercanberecalledby send-ing theappropriateU commands.Seeparagraph3.9.16for information on using the U commands..

Uponpowerup or aftertheinstrumentreceivesa DCL orSDC command,the Model 196 will return to the defaultcondition.

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Enterthe programbelowto enabledatastoreoperationandobtainanddisplay100readingson the computerCRT:

3·21


IEEE-41111I'ROGRA.MMING

Digital Calibration-Whenperformingdigital cahbration,two points must be cahbratedon eachrange.The firstcahbrationvalueshouldbe approximatelyfull rangeandthesecondcalibrationvalueshouldbeapproximatelyzero.After thesecondcalibrationvalueis sentoverthebus,per-manentstorageof the two valueswill occur.

Sendremoteenable.Settrigger mode,andstorageparameters.Startstorageprocess.Setreadmodeto datastore.Setcounterfor 100loops.Get a reading.Display reading.Loop backfor nextreading.

70 ENTER 707 i A$80DISPA$90 NEXT I

10 DIM A$ [25J20 REMOTE 70,730 OUTPUT 707 ;

"T2Q300I100X' ,40 TRIGGER 70750 OUTPUT 707;

"B1G0X' ,60 FOR 1=1 TO 100

:..P'-'R-"O-=G::.:RA::..:::M=-- ＭＢｃＭ］Ｐ｣ＮＺＺｍＺＺＺｍＺＺＮＺｅ］ｎＮＺＺｔｓｾｯ］ｾ］］ _Ip. this example,notethat only asmanysignificantdigitsasnecessaryneedbe sent.In this case,theexactvalueisassumedto be30.00000eventhoughonly thefirst two digitswereactuallysent.

100 END

After enteringtheprogram,presstheHP-85RUN key. Theprogramwill setthestoresizeto 100 (line 30), enablethedatastore(line 40), turnonthedatastoreoutput(line 50),andthenrequestanddisplayall 100readings(lines60-100).

CO=CaIibratefirst point usingvalue (V)C1=Calibrateｾ･｣ｯｮ point usingvalue (V)

Thefollowing examplefirst sendsa cahbrationvalueof 3andthena calibrationof O.

3.9.10 Value (V) and Calibration (C) V3XCOXVOXClX

Orieadvancedfeatureof theModel196is its digital calibra-tion capabilities.Insteadof the moredifficult methodofadjustinga numberof potentiometers,theuserneedonlyapplyanappropriatecalibrationsignalandsendthecahbra-tion valueover the bus.

If the calibrationvalueis greaterthan3030000counts(at6'hdresolution)anIDDCO errormessagewill bedisplayedon the Model 196.

TheV commandis alsousedto programazerovalue(seeparagraph3.9.4).

Thevaluecommandmay takeon eitherof the followingforms:Vnn.nnnnnVn.nnnnnnE+n

. CAUTIONPrecision calibration signals must be connectedto the instrument before attempting calibration,otherwise instrument accuracy will be affected.see Section 6 for complete details on calibratingthe instrument either from the front panel or overthe bus.

Thus,thefollowing two commandswould beequivalent:V30V3.0E+l

Table 3-11. High Speed Data Store

-_ .. -,,-<' . ..•... ,.-

DataStore Valid Reading Valid Valid Valid DateInterval Rates Functions Ranges" StoreSize'"

Ql, Q2 SO FO, Fl, F3, F4 RI-R7 Il-15oo

Q3-Q14 50,51 FO, Fl, F3, F4 RI-R7 Il-15oo

"Datastoresize10 (continuous)andRO (autorange)cannotbeusedinthe high speeddatastoremode.

3·22


IEEE·4aa PROGRAMMING

3.9.11 Default Conditions (L)

The10commandallowstheuserto returntheinstrumentto thefactorydefaultconditions.Factorydefaultconditionsaresetat the factory andare listed in Thbles3-7 and2-1.The instrumentwill powerup to thesedefaultconditions.ThecurrentIEEEaddressandline frequencysettingof theinstrumentare not affectedby the10 command.

Thus, thecurrentIEEE addressandline frequencyset-ting aresavedby L1.

2. Sending10 is equivalentto runningProgram37(Reset)and thenProgram30 (Save),thus:A. Usersaveddefaultswill belost sincefactory default

conditionswill be saved.B. 10 will notchangethecurrentIEEEaddressandline

frequencysetting,andwill savethemasthe defaultconditions.

The Ll commandis usedto savethe currentinstrumentconditions.The instrumentwill then powerup to thesedefaultconditions.

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Setthe Model 196 to theohmsfunction, andenablezeroandfilter. Now, enterthefollowing statementsinto the computer:

Any of theoptionsof thefollowing device-dependentcom-mandscanbe savedasthe default conditions:

REMOTE 707OUTPUT 707;' 'LlX"

A (multiplex), F (function), N (internal filter), P (digitalfilter), Q andI (datastoreintervalandsize),R (range),S(rate),W (delay), andZ (zero).

After pressingEND LINE thesecondtime,cyclepowerontheModel196andnotethattheinstrumentreturnsto theconditionsinitially set in this example.

The L commandoptionsareas follows:

Ｑｏｾｒ･ｳｴｯｲ instrumentto factory defaultconditionsandsave(Ll).

ｌｬｾｓ｡ｶ presentmachinestatesasthedefaultconditions.

Notes:

3.9.12 Data Format (G)

The G commandcontrolsthe format of the datathat theinstrumentsendsoverthebus.Readingsmaybesentwithor withoutprefixes.Prefixesarethemnemonicsprecedingthereadingandthebuffermemorylocation.Figure3-6 fui-therclarifiesthegeneraldataformat.TheG commandsareas follows:

1. SendingLl is equivalentto running program SAVE.

OHMS I--

• MANTISSA 61j DIGITS riaUFFER LOCATIONPREFIX ｾ .-l-. ｾ L. (al MODE ONLY)

N=NORMAL yNDCV ±1.234567IE± I .B

l500 Y

ｏｾｖｅｒｆｌｏｾｔｅｒｍｉｎａｔｏZ-ZERDED BUFFER PREFIX

(BI HODE ONLY)

EXPDNENTDCV=DC VOLTSACV=AC VOLTSOHM=OHMSOCO=DFFSET COMPENSATEDDCI=DC AMPSACI=AC AMPSdBV=AC dB VOL TSdBI=AC dB AMPS

+NONE"NO READING5 INDATA STORE

Figure 3·6. General Data Format

3·23



GO = Sendsingle readingwith prefixes.Examples:NDCV-l.234567E+O(AID reading)NDCV-l.234567E+O,BOOI(buffer reading)

Gl = Sendsingle readingwithout pU'fixes. Examples:-1.234567E+0(AID reading)-1.234567E+0,OOI(buffer reading)

G2 = Sendall buffer readings,separatedbycommas,withprefixesandbuffer memorylocations.Examples:NDCV-1.234567E+0,BOOl,NDCV_1.765432E+0,BOO2, etc...

G3 = Send all buffer readings,separatedby commas,withoutprefixesandwith buffermemorylocations.Example: -1.234567E+O,OOl,-I.765432E+0,OO2,etc...

G4 = Sendall buffer readings,separatedbycommas,withreadingprefixesandwithoutmemorybuffer loca-tions. Example:NDCV-l.234567E+O,NDCV-l.765432E+0,etc...

G5 = Send all buffer readings,separatedby commas,withoutreadingprefixesandwithoutbuffermemorylocations.Example:-1.234567E+0,-1.765432E+0,etc...

Uponpowerup or aftertheinstrumentreceivesaDCL orSDCcommand,the Model 196 will return to the defaultcondition.

Notes:

1. The B commandaffectsthe sourceof the data. In theBO mode,thebusdatawill comefrom theAID converter.In the Bl mode, the datawill comefrom the buffer.

2. TheBl commandmustbeassertedwhenusingtheG2throughG5 modes.

3. ProgrammedterminatorandEOI sequencesappearatthe endof eachreadingin the GO andGl modes,butaretransmittedonly at theendof thebuffer in the G2through G5 modes. No terminator is sent if in G2throughG5 modeswhile in BO (datafrom AID). ...

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Toplacetheinstrumentinthe Gl mode and obtain a reading,enter the followingstatementsinto the HP-85 keyboard:

REMOTE 707OUTPUT 707;" B0XGlX"

ENTER 707; A$DISP A$-

Whenthesecondstatementis executed,theinstrumentwillchangeto the Gl mode.The last two statementsacquiredatafrom the instrumentanddisplay the readingstringon the CRT. Note that no prefix or suffix appearson thedatastring.

3.9.13 SRQ Mask (M) and Serial Poll ByteFormat

TheSRQcommandcontrolswhich of a numberof condi-tionswithin theModel 196will causetheinstrumentto re-questservicefrom thecontrollerby assertinganSRQ.OnceanSRQis generated,thatserial1'011bytecanbecheckedtodetennineif theModel1%wastheinstrumentthatassertedtheSRQandif so,whatconditionscanbecheckedby usingthe Ul command,as describedin paragraph3.9.13.

.TheModel 196 can be programmedto generatean SRQunderoneor more of the following condititms:

1. Whenareadingis completedor anoverrangeconditionoccurs.

2. If a bus error occurs.3. Whenthe datastore is full.4. Whenthe datastore is '12 full.5. If a trigger overrunerror occurs.0.Whenthe bus is ready.

81TPOSITION

VALUE

DECIMALWEIGHTING

I=SRQ 8Y 1'36 (STATUS 8YTE ONLY

I=ERRO

l=READ

87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80

0 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O

12B 64 32 16 B 4 2 I

ＺｾI=READING OVERFLOW

1=8UFFER FULL

1=8UFFER HALF FULL

I=READING DONE

Figure 3-7. SRQ Mask and Serial Poll Byte Format

3-24


Upon powerup or after a DCL or SDC commaridis re-ceived, SRQis disabled.

SRQMask-TheModel196usesaninternalmaskto deter-minewhichconditionswill causeanSRQto begenerated.Figure3-7 showsthe generalformat of this mask.

SRQcanbeprogrammedby sendingtheASCnletter"M"followed by a decimalnumberto set the appropriatebitin the SRQmask.Decimalvaluesfor the variousbits aresummarizedin '!able 3-12. Note that the instrumentmaybe programmedfor more than one set of conditionssimultaneously.To do so, Simply addup the decimalbitvaluesfor the requiredSRQ conditions.For example, toenableSRQunderreadingoverflowandbuffer full condi-tions,sendM3X. To disableSRQsendMOX. Thiscommandwill clear all bits in the SRQ mask.

Table 3·12. SRO Command Parameters

-_.... "" _.. -

Command Conditionto GenerateSRQ

MO DisableMl ReadingoverflowM2 Data storefullM4 Datastorehalf fullM8 ReadingdoneM16 ReadyM32 Error


Bit 5 (Error)-Setwhenoneof the following errorshaveoccurred:1. Trigger Error2. ShortTime3. Big String4. Uncalibrated5. Cal Locked6. Conflict7. No Remote8. lODC9. lODCO

10. Translator

Thenatureof theerrorcanbedeterminedwith theUl com-mandasexplainedin paragraph3.9.16.An explanationofeacherror can also be found in paragraph3.9.16.

Bit 6 (SRQ)-Providesa meansto determineif anSRQWasassertedby theModel 196. If this bit is set,servicewasre-questedby the instrument. . ..

Bit-7-Not usedandalwaysset to zero.

Note that thestatusbyteshouldbereadto cleartheSRQline oncethe instrument-hasgeneratedan 5RQ. All bitsin the status byte will be latched when the SRQ isgenerated.Bit 6 (RQS)will be clearedwhenthestatusbyteis read.

HP-85 ProgrammingExample-Enterthe following pro-gram into the HP-85:SerialPoll Byte Format-Theserialpoll byte containsin-

formationrelatingto dataanderrorconditionswithin theinstrument.The general format of the serial poll byte(which is obtainedby usingtheserialpollingsequence,asdescribedin paragraph3.8.8) is shownin Figure3-7.

Thebits in theserialpoll bytehavethefollowing meanings:

Bit 0 (ReadingOverflow)-Setwhenanoverrangeinput isappliedto the instrument.

Bit 1 (BufferFull)-SetwhenthedefinedbuffersiZeisfu11.

Bit 2 (Buffer '12 Full)-Setwhenhalf thedefinedbuffersizeis full.

Bit 3 (ReadingDone)-Setwhenthe instrumenthascom-pletedthe presentreadingconversion.

Bit 4 (Ready)-Setwhenthe instrumenthasprocessedallpreviouslyreceivedcommandsandis readyto acceptad-ditional commandsover the bus.

PROGRAM

10 RUlOTE 7071l! CLEAR 7

20 OUTPUT 707; , 't132X' ,

30 OUTPUT 707; , 'K5X' ,

40 S=SPOLL<707:>

45 IF NOT BIHS, 5) THEN 4050 DISP' 'B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2

Bl B0"60 FOR I =7 TO 0 STEP-l70 DISP BIT (S, I).:

80 NE,,:T I90 DISP

100 END

COMMENTS

Setup for remoteoperation,clearinstrument,·-Programfor SRQ onlODCO.Attempt to programｩｬｬ･ option.Senalpoll theinstrument.Wait for 5RQ error.Identify the bits.

Loop eight times.Display eachbitposition.

3·25



Oncetheprogramis enteredandcheckedfor errors,presstheHP-85RUN key. Thecomputerfirst placesthe instru-mentin remote(line 10)andthenprogramstheSRQmodeof the instrument(line 20). Line 30 thenattemptsto pro-graman illegal commandoption, at which point the in-strumentgeneratesan SRQandsetsthe buserrorbit inits statusbyte. Thecomputerthenserialpolls the instru-ment(line 40), andthendisplaysthestatusbytebits in pro-perorderon the CRT. In this example,the SRQ (B6) anderror (B5) bits aresetbecauseof the attempt10 programanillegal commandoption(K5). Otherbils mayalsobesetdependingon instrumentstatus.

3.9.14 EOI and Bus Hold-off Modes (K)

TheK commandallowscontroloverwhetherornot thein-strument··sendsthe Earcommandat the endof its datastring,andwhetheror notbusactivity is heldoff (throughtheNRFD line) until all commandssentto theinstrumentareinterriaIly processedoncethe instrumentreceivestheX character.K commandoptionsinclude:

KO = SendEOI with last byte; hold off bus until com-mandsprocessedon X.

Kl = Do not sendEarwith lastbyte; hold off bus until7 commandsprocessedon X.

K2 = SendEarwith lastbyte; do not hold off buson X.K3 = SendnoEarwith lastbyte;donotholdoffbusonX.

Up_onpowerup, or aftertheinstrumentreceivesaDCL orSDCcommand,the instrumentwill returnto the defaultcondition.

The EOI line on the IEEE-488bus providesa methodtopositivelyidentify thelastbytein a multi-bytetransferｳ･ .quence.Keep in mind that somecontrollersrely on Earto terminatetheirinputsequences.In this case,suppress-ingEarwith theK commandmaycausethecontrollerin-put sequenceto hangunlessotherterminatorsequencesare used.

Thebusholdoff modeallowstheinstrumentto temporarilyholdupbusoperationwhenit receivestheX characteruntilit processesall commandssentin thecommandstring.Thepurposeof theholdoff is to ensurethalthefront endFETsandrelaysareproperlyconfiguredbeforetakinga reading.Keepin mind thatall busoperationwill cease--notjustac-tivity associatedwith theModel 1%.Theadvantageof this

3-26

modeis that no buscommandswill be missed:while theinstrumentis processingcommandspreviouslyreceived.

Theholdoff perioddependsonthecommandsbeingpro-cessed.Table3-13lists hOld off limesfor a numberof dif-ferentcommands.Sincea NRFD holdoff is employed,thehandshakesequencefor the X characteris complete.

NOTEWith Kl} or Kl asserted,hold-off will alsooccuronan Ear anda terminator.Thesedelaysallow forproperoperationof theTranslatorsoftware,since"X" cannotbe usedin Translatorwords.

HP-85ProgrammingExample-ToJ?rogramtheinstrumentfor the K2 mode,enterthe followmg statementsinto theHP-85:

REMOTE 707OUTPUT 707; "K2X"

Whenthesecondstatementis executed,theinstrumentwillbeplacedin theK2 mode.In this mode,EOI will still betransmittedat theendof thedatastring,but thebushold-off modewill be disabled.

Table 3-13. Bus Hold-off Times (Typical)

Commands Bus Held-off on X for:

Function(F) 100msecon DCV (Fa), Ohms (F2) andCompensatedOhms(F7)630msecon ACV (Fl), ACA (F4), DBV(F5) and DBA (F6)160msecon DCA (F3)

Range(R) lOOmsecon most rangecommandsl70msecon 30Mll (F2R6) and300Mll(F2R7) ranges638msecper rangecommandon ACV(F2) andACA (F4)

Calibrate(C) 9secon most functions18.5secon 30Mll (F2R6) and300Mll(F2R7)ranges

Others 94msecto llDmsec dependingon com-mandsentlsecfor selftestaO) command


3.9.15 Terminator (Y)

Theterminatorsequencethatmarkstheendof theinstru-ment'sdatastringor statusword canbeprogrammedbysending the Y commandfollowed by an appropriatecharacter.Thedefaultterminatorsequenceis thecommonlyusedcarriagereturn,line feed(CRLF) sequence(YO). Theterminatorwill assumethis defaultvalueuponpowerup,or aftertheinstrumentreceivesa DCL or SDCcommand.Programmableterminatorsinclude:

YO = CRLFY1=LFCRY2=CRY3 = LFY4 = No terminator

HP-85 ProgrammingExample-Toreservethedefault(CRLF) terminatorsequence,typethefollowing lines into thecomputer.

REt10TE 707OUTPUT 707; , 'Y0H' ,

When the secondstatementis executed,the normal ter-minatorsequencewill bereserved;theinstrumentwill ter-minateeachdatastring or statusword with a (CR LF).

3.9.16 Status (U)

Thestatuscommandallowsaccessto informationconcern-ing variousoperatingmodesandconditionsof theModel196. Statuscommandsinclude:

UO = Sendmachinestatusword.U1 = Senderror conditions.U2 = List Translatorwords.U3 = Senda value indicating the buffer size.U4 = Sendthe averagereadingin the datastore.U5 = Sendthe lowestreadingin the datastore.U6 = Sendthe highestreadingin the datastore.U7 = Sendthe presentvalue (V). '.

U8 = Sendinput switch status(front/rear).

WhenthecommandsequenceUOX is transmitted,thein-strumentwill transmitthe statusword insteadof its nor-mal datastring the next time it is addressedto talk. Thestatusword will be transmittedonly onceeachtime theUO commandis given.To makesurethatcorrectstatusistransmitted,thestatuswordshouldberequestedassoonaspossibleafter the commandis transmitted.


Theformat of UO statusis shownin Figure3-8. Note thattheletterscorrespondto modesprogrammedby therespec-tive device-dependentcommands.Thedefaultvaluesin thestatusword are also shown in Figure 3-8. Note that allreturnedvaluesexceptfor thoseassociatedwith the ter-minatorcorrespondto the programmednumericvalues.Forexample,if theinstrumentis presentlyin theR3 range,thesecond(R) byte in thestatusword will correspondtoan ASCII 3.

TheUl commandallowsaccessto Model 196errorcondi-tionsin asimilarmanner.OncethesequenceUlX is sent,theinstrumentwill transmittheerrorconditionswith theformat shownin Figure3-9 the next time it is addressedto talk in thenormalmanner.Theerrorconditionwordwillbesentonly onceeachtime theU1 commandis transmit-ted.Notethattheerrorconditionword is actually astringof ASCII charactersrepresentingbinarybit positions.Anerrorconditionis alsoflaggedin the serialpoll byte, andthe instrumentcanbe programmedto generatean SRQwhenanerrorconditionoccurs.Seeparagraph3.9.13.Notethatall bits in theerrorconditionword andtheserialpollbyteerrorbitwill beclearedwhentheword is read.In ad-dition, SRQoperationwill berestoredafteranerrorcon-dition by readingUl.

The various bits in the error condition word are des-cribed as follows:

TRIG ERROR-Setwhentheinstrumentreceivesa triggerwhile it is still processingareadingfrom aprevioustrigger.

SHOIITTIME-Setwhentheinstrumentcannotrunasfastas the selecteddataStoreinterval.

BIG STRING-Setif morethana 10 charactermessageissentusingthe display (0) command.

UNCAL-SetwhenE'PROMmemoryfails theselftest.In-strumentcalibrationis invalid.

CAL LOCKED-Setwhentrying to cahbratetheinstrumentwith the calibrationswitch in the disableposition.

CONFUCT-Setwhentrying to calibratethe instrumentwhile it is in an improperstate.(i.e. dB function).

TranslatorError (TRANSERR)-Setwhenanyoneof tenpossibleTranslatorerrorsoccur.Table3-15in paragraph3.10lists anddescribestheTranslatorerrors.

NO REMOTE-Set when a progammingcommandisreceivedwhenREN is false.

IDDC-Setwhen an illegal device-dependentcommand(IDDC), suchasElX is received("E" is illegal).

3-27



FACTORY DEFAULT100

196 A B F

o

G

o

J

o 00 1

K MM N

00

pp

000000

QQQQQQ

4

R

3

S

6 00000 0

T WWWWW Y

o 0/1CAL

Z SW

MODEL NUMBER PREFIX (196)

AUTO/CAL MULTIPLEX (AIO=O!SABlED1=ENABLEO

READING MODE (B)O=AiO CONVERTER1=DATA STORE: BUFFER

FUNCTION (F)O=DC VOLTS1=AC VOLTS2=QHMS3=OC CURRENT4 ...AC CURRENT5=ACV dB6=ACA dB7=OFFSET COMPENSATED OHMS

RANGE (RlOffset

CompensatedDCV ACV DCA ACA OHMS ACV dB ACAdB ＰｨＮｬＡｬ

0 Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto1 300mV 300mV 300 p.A 300p.A 300 0 Auto ａｵｴｯ 300 0

_2_ 3 V 3 V 3mA 3mA 3 kO Auto Auto 3 kO3 30_V 30 V 30mA 30mA 30·kn -Auto' Auto 30 kD4300 V·300 V 300mA 300niA 300 kQ Auto Auto "30kO

_5300 V 300 V 3 A 3 A '3MG Auto Auto 30 kO6300 V 300 V 3,A 3 Ii. 30MG- Auto Auto 30 kO7300 V 300 V 3 A 3 A 300MO Auto Auto 30 kO

RATE (5)Offset

0Cl! ACA' dhmsCompensated

ACV DCA ACV dB Ar:;A dB Ohms

5Yid

5J6:d6%d

5'hd

5%d5'hd

5Yid

Slhd5Yid

2 -5%d3 6%d

a 3}5d Ｓｾ､ 3%d :31/.td 3'/2dIRl-R41 5%d5YidIR5-R7J

J 4%d 4%d 4Y2d 4%d Ｔｾ､ｻｒｬﾷｒＴ 5%d5_}'2.9.1R5-R7l

5Yzd 5%d 5%d 5'hd5%d 5'hd 6.%d(Rl-R6J 5Yzd

5%d{R7)Integrated.Perlod: 3%d=318ttS9l;. 4'hd=2.59msec, 5Y2d and 6'hd=Line .cycle

DELAY (W)nnnn-rr=OOOOOmsecto 60000mse·c

TRIGGER (T)O=-CONTINUOUS ON TALK1=ONE·SHOT ON TALK2=CONTINUOUS ON GET3=ONE-SHOT ON GET4=CONTINUOUS ON X5=ONE-SHOr.oN X6=CONTINUOUS ON EXTERNAL TRIGGER7=ONE·SHOT ON EXTERNAL ｔｒｲｇｾｬＺＺｴ

DATA FORMAT (G)O=RDG WITH f5FfEl=fXJ::S1= ROG WITHOUT PREFIXES2=BUFFER RDGS WITH PREFIXES AND a{JFi=I:A LOCATiONS3=8UFFER ROGS WITHOUT PREFIXES AND WITH BUFFER

LOCATIONS4=SUFFER RDGS WITH PREFIXES ANO WITHout BUj:1=i::R

LOCATIONS5=BUFFER ROGS WITHOUT PREFIXES AND BUFFER

LOCATIONS

ED'; BUS HOLD-OFF (K)Q=EOI AND HOLD-OFF1=NO EOI AND HOLD·OFF2=EOI AND NO HOLD-OFF3=NO EOI AND NO HOLD-OFF

SELI'-TEST (J)Q=INACT1VE1=ROM, RAM and PPRQM PASSED2=EZPROM FAILED

SRO (M)MOO = DISABLEDM01=READING OVERFLOWM02=DATA STORE FULLM04=DATA STORE HALF FULLMOB=READING DONEM16=READYM32=ERROR

EXPONENTIAL FILTER (N)O=OISABLEO1=ENABLEO

FILTER (P)OO=FILTER DISABLEDnn=FILTER ENABLED WITH FILTER VALUE OF nn (01 to 99)

TERMINATOR (Y)O=CR LF-l=LF CR2=CR3=LF

ZERO (Z)O=OISASLEbl=ENABLED2=ENABLEO USING ZERO VALUE

CALlBR.trION SWITCHO=DISABLEOl=ENABLED

DATA STORE RATE (0)OOOOO:O=ONE-SHOT MODEnnnnnn=INTERVAL (00000 1msec to 99999sec)

Figure 3-8. UO Machine Status Word and Default Values

3-28



IDDCO-Setwhenanillegal device-dependentcommand' ＺＮｐｾｒｾｏｾｇｾｒＮＺＺａｾｍＺ］ＺＮＮＮ -=Cc::0:.::M::.:M:::E=Nc:.T.:.:S:o.... _option (lODCO) suchas 19X is received("9" is illegal).

. After enteringtheprogram,run it by pressingthe HP-85RUN key. The machineconditionsof the Model 196 willbelistedontheCRTdisplay.To showthatstatusis transmit-tedonly once,anormalreadingis requestedanddisplayedlast.

NOTEThe completecommandstring will be ignored ifan lODC, lODCO or no remoteerror occurs.

TheU2 commandlists theTranslatorwordsthathavebeendefinedby the.operator.The list will be transmittedonlyonceeachtime the commandis received.

The U3 commandallows the userto find out the currentdefinedsizeofthebuffer. Thebuffersizeis'controlledbythe I command.Whenthis commandis transmitted,theinstrumentwill transmitthe valuethe next timeit is ad-dressedto talk. This informationwill be transmittedonlyonceeachtime thecommandis received.TheU3 valuewillnot be clearedwhenread; thus, the U3. value is alwayscurrent.

10 ｒｅｾｉｏｔ 70720 DH1 A$[40J30 OUTPUT 707; , , U0tP ,40 DISF' "mdlflBFGJKt1t1N

PPQC!QQQQRSTWW.jt·j.j'-(ｚＪ ,

50 ENTER707 ; A$

60 DISP-A$70 EtHER 707; A$S0 DISP A$',0 END

Sendremoteenable.

SendUO command.

Obtain UO statusfrominstrument.Display UO statusword.Get normal reading.Display normalreading.

TheU4 commandsendstheaverageof all thereadingsthatarein the datastore. TheUS commandsendsthe lowestreadingin thedatastoreandtheU6 commandsendsthehighest.Whenanyof thesecommandsaretransmitted,theinstrumentwill sendtheappropriatereadingthenexttimetheinstrumentis addressedto talk. A readingwill only besent-onceeachtime theappropriatecommandis received.Transmissionof U4, USandU6 will not occuruntil thebuf-fer is full.

TheU7 commandsendsthepresentvalue.Thevaluecanbe a calibrationvalue,or a zerovalue.' .

TheUS commandsendsa valuethat definesthestatusoftheinputswitch.A valueof aindicatesthatthefronlpanelinput terminalsareselected,while a valueof 1 indicatesthat the rear panelinput terminalsareselected.

HP-8S Progamming Example-Enter the followingstatementsinto the computerto obtain and display themachinestatusword (UO).

3.9.17 Auto/Cal Multiplex (A)

The Model 196 has built-in multiplex routines thatautomaticallycalibrateandzero the instrument,so as tomaintainits high accuracy.Themultiplex routinescanbedefeated,eitherthroughfront panelProgram6(paragraph2.7.5) or throughoneof the following commands:

AD = DisablemultiplexA1 = Enablemultiplex

Uponpowerup or afteraDCL or SDCcommand,the in-strumentwill return to the default'condition.

HP-8S ProgrammingExample-Disablemultiplexby enter-ing the following statementsinto the HP-85:

REt'IOTE 707OUTPUT 707; , , A0X' ,

WhentheEND LINE key is pressedthesecondtime, themultiplexerroutineswill be disabled.

3·29


r1=TRIG ERROR

I r1=SHORT T tHE

196 OIl OIl 011 OIl 0 0 0 011 oIl 011 oIl 011 011 0 OIl OIl oIl OIli I I

"BIG STRINJ

."(Q"ciCo)I

ｾ

c::.....m..a.,tn!cen

ｾa

I=UNCAL-

ALWAYS ZERO-

I=CAL LOCI<EO-

I=COHFL"ICT-

I=TRANSERR 9-

1=1 RA HSERR23l

ALWAYS 1EROl

OIl OIl OIl oIl 0 011

l"T RANSERR2''-1=TRANSERR20

I...I=TRANSERRI'

L.I=T RANSERR18

I...l=T RANSERRI1

I...l=TRANSERRI6

I=NO REHOTE- L.1=TRANSERRI5

1=1 DOC- ..... 1=1 ｒａｍｓｅｒｒｉ

I=IDDCO- L-.ALlWAYS ZERO

3.9.18 Delay (W)

Thedelaycommandcontrolsthetime intervalthatoccursfrom.thepoint the instrumentis triggereduntil it beginsintegrationof the input signal. This feature is useful insituationswherea specific time periodmusttranspiretoallow an input signa!to settlebeforemeasurement.Dur-ing the delay period, the input multiplexing FETs areswitchedon so the instrumentis setto beginintegrationｵｰｾ conclusionof theprogrammeddelayperiod.A delaypenodcanbeprogrammedusingthefollowing command:

Wn

Here, n representsthe delayvalue in milliseconds.Therange of programmabledelay values is from Omsecto60000msec.

Examples:For a delayof 0.002secsendW2X.For a delayof 3O.05secsendW3005OX. ..For a delayof 60secsendW60000X.

UponpoweruporafterreceivingaDCL orSDCcorriInand;.tile instrumentwill return to the default condition.

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Toprograma250msecdelayperiodinto theinstrument,enterthefollowing statementsinto the computer:

REMOTE 707OUTPUT 707; , 'W250X' ,

After the END LINE key is pressedthe secondtime, theinstrumentwill wait for 250msecaftereachtriggeredcon-versionbeforeexecutingthe nextcoversionperiod.

3.9.19 Self·Test (J)

TheJcommandcausesthe instrumentto performtestsitautomaticallyperformsuponpowerup.Whentheself-testcommandis given, theModel 196performsthefollowingtests:

1. ROM Test2. RAM Test3. E'PROMTest

Jcommandparametersinclude:


JO = Performself-test.

If theself-testis successful,theJbytein theUO statuswordwill be set to 1. If PPROMfails, the message"UNCAl:'will bedisplayedandtheJbytein theU1 statusword willbe set to 2. An PPROMfailure is also flaggedin the U1statusword. If ROM andRAM fails, the instrumentwilllock up.

Seeparagraph6.7.2for moreinformationonthesetestsandrecommendationsto resolvea failure.

HP-85 Programming Example-Enter the followingstatementsinto the computerto perform the Model 196self-test:

REMOTE 707OUTPUT 707.; , 'J0X' ,

Y"hen theEND LINE key is pressedthe secondtime, themstrumentperformstheself-test.If successful,theself-testbyte min the UO statusword will be set to 1.

3.9.20 Hit Button (H)

The hit buttoncommandallows the userto emulatevir-tually anyfront panelcontrol sequence.Throughthe useof- the H command,the front panel programsmay beenteredthroughcommandsgivenoverthebus.TheH com-mandis sentby sendingthe ASCII letter followed by anumberrepresentinga front panelcontrol.Thesecontrolnumbersare shownin Figure 3-10.

Examples:

H3X-Selectsthe ACA function.HOX-Selectsthe ACV function.

HP-85 Programming Example-Enter the followingstatementsinto thecomputerto placetheinstrumentin theohmsfunction:

REMOTE 707OUTPUT 707;" H1X"

WhentheEND LINE key is pressedthesecondtime, theinstrumentis placedin the ohmsfunction.

3-31


\EEE-488 PROGRAMM\NG

IKEITHLEyl 196 SYSTEM DMM

oQCV=

FUNCTION RANGE

OHMS VOlT5$ENSl; ｾ

ｾＺf

ｾｾｾ

ｾｾ

LOI -

SOOVｐ･ＢＧ

ｾ . ..

AMPS

oCAL EHAete

Figure 3·10. Hit Button Command Numbers

3.9.21 Display (D)

The displaycommandcontrolsthe ASCII messagesthatcanbe placedonto the Model 196 display. Messagesarecontrolledwith the following commands:

Da = DIsplaycharacterｊｬ｣ｦ where"cr representsaprinfableASCII character. Up to 10 characters(includingblanks)may be sent.

D = Restoresdisplayback to normal.

3·32

Notes:1. In orderto havespacesprecedingthebeginningof the

messageandbetweenmessagewords,usethe@ sym-bol to representeachspace.For example,to-displaythemessage"Model 196" starting atthe seconddisplaycharacter(one space),send the following commandshing:

, , ｄｉｾｲＱＰｄｅｌ 196::-::' ,

2. Spacesin a commandstring are ignored.3. Sendinga messagethatexceeds10characterswill result

with the big string error messagebeing displayed.


HP-85ProgrammingExample-Enterthe following state-mentsinto thecomputerto displaythemessage"MODEL196":

f;U10TE 707OUTPUT 707; , , ｄｾｴＱＰｄｅｕ［ 9E. :,' ,

When theEND LINE key is pressedthe secondtime theinstrumentmodelnumberwill bedisplayed.Displayopera-tion maybereturnedto normalby enteringthe followingstatement:

OUTPUT 707.i ' , n::-::' ,

3.9.22 Internal Filter (N)

In additionto thedigital filter (P), arunningaveragefilteris usedto provideadditionalfiltering whenmakinghighresolutionandhigh sensitivitymeasurements.The inter-nal filter is controlledby the following commands:

NO ｾ Internal filter off.N1 ｾ Internalfilter on.

The factory default condition of the internal filter is N1(enabled).


HP-85 Programming Example-Enter the followingstatementsinto thecomputerto turn theinternalfilter off:

REHOTE 707OUTPUT 707; , ＧｴＭｾＰ＾ＡＬ ,

WhentheEND LINE key is pressedthesecondtime, theinternal filter will disabled.

3.10 TRANSLATOR SOFTWARE

The built in Translatorsoftwareallows the userto definehis own words in place of Keithley's defined device-dependentcommands.Onewordcanreplacea singlecom-mandor astringof commands.Forexample,thewordACVcanbe sentin placeof Fl, and the word SETUP1canbesentin placeof F3R1T2S0Z1UOM2P15.Also, Keithley COm-mandscanbetranslatedto emulatefunctionsof otherunits.Forexample,theword RA, which is usedby H-P to selectautorange,canbe sent in placeof RO. Therearecertainwords and charactersthat cannot be used as definedTranslatorwords.Thesereservedwordsandcharactermakeup the Translatorsoftwaresyntaxandare listed in Table3-14.

Table 3-14. Translator Reserved Words and Character

,.

Word/Character Description

ALIAS Usedat the beginningof a commandstring to defineTranslatorwords.; Usedto terminatethe Translatorstring (one spacemustprecedeit).$ Usedto define wild cardTranslatorwords. Valuessentwith a wild card

Translatorword selectoptionsof the equivalentDOC.NEW Tells the Model 196 to recognizeTranslatorwords.OLD Tells the Model 196 to only recognizethe Keithley device-dependent

commands.SAVE Saves'Translatorwords as powerup default.LIST Usedto list the Translatorwords.FORGET Usedto purgeTranslatorwords from memory. ,

3-33



3.10.1 Translator Format

Thebasicfonnatfor defininga Translatorword isshownin the following examplecommandstring,which definesthe word SETUPl as a substitutefor FlROX.

Ｇｾｌｉａ SETUPlFlROX ;"

Where:ALIAS is a reservedword that precedesthe Translatorword.SETUPl is the desiredTranslatorword.FlROX is the Keithley commandstring.; is a reservedcharacternecessaryto terminate theTranslatorstring._(spaces)must be used to separatewords and the ";"character.

WhenSETUPl is sentover the IEEE-488bus, the instru-mentwill goto theACV function (Fl.) andenableautorange(RO). - _.

Translatorwordsthatcontainconflictingdevice-dependentcommands,suchasF1 andPZ,canbedefined.Whensend-ing thecommandwordoverthebus,thedevice-dependentcommandthatwaslastenteredwill prevail. For example,sendinga Translatorword In placeof FOFlX will placetheinstrumentin the F1 function.

Notes:1. Trying to defineaTranslatorword thatalreadyexists will

causean error messageto be displayedbriefly. That·Translatorword will retain its original definition.

2.k Translatorword cannoiexceed31 characters.3. The Translator buffer can hold approximately 100

18-characterTranslatorwords.4. The characterX and $ cannotbe used In Translator

words.5. TheModel 196will notrecognizeanundefinedTranslator

word sentover the bus.6. A valid Translatorword sentover thebuswhile the in-

strumentis In the OLD modewill not be recognized.However,theInstrumentwill try to execute(on thenextX) the lettersandnumbersof the word as if they weredevice-dependentcommands.To avoid this problem,itis recommendedthat NEW be sentbeforetrying to ex-ecuteTranslatorwords. Seeparagraph3.10.3for an ex-planationof NEW andOLD.

7. Translatorerror messagesare listed and describedInTable 3-15.

HP-SSProgrammingExample-Enterthe following pro-gram Into the computer to-define a Translator word(SETUP1)to emulate-thecommandstring FlROX:

RDI0TE 707OUTPUT 707,' 'ALIAS SETUPl F1R0X ;"

OUTPUT 707; "SETUP1"

Table 3·15. Translator Error Messages

DisplayExolanationMessai!:e Ie Error String

TRANSERR9 No more memoryleft for Translatorwords. -TRANSERR14 Useof more than oneALIAS In a definition. "ALIAS TESTl FlX ALIAS TEST2RlX ;"TRANSERR15 Translatorword exceeds31 characters. Ｇｾｌｉａ ITHINKTHlSISTHlRTYTWOCHARACf

ERS! FlX;"TRANSERR16 Use of an X In a Translatorword. Ｇｾｌｉａ XRAY FlX ;"TRANSERR17 Trying to definea TranslatorwordthatalreaclY Ｇｾｌｉａ SETUPFlX ;"

exists.The secondstring In the exampleis the Ｇｾｌｉａ SETUPRlX ;"error string.

TRANSERRlS Useof a $ In a Translatorword. Ｇｾｌｉａ $200FDC;" __TRANSERR19 Sendingthe ; character. ".'1,TRANSERR20 Useof UST In a Translatordefinition. Ｇｾｌｉａ DOGFlX LIST ;"TRANSERR21 Useof FORGETIn a Translatox_definition. Ｇｾｌｉａ DOG FlX FORGET;"TRANSERR23 Useof SAVE In a Translatordefinition. Ｇｾｌｉａ DOG FlX SAVE ;"

3·34



WhenEND LINE is pressedthesecondtime, theTranslator 3.10.3 NEW and OLDword will be definedto emulatethe Keithley commandstring.Whe'.tEND LINE is pressedtJ:'ethird time, thein- NEW is areservedwordthattells the instrumentthatthestrumentwill go to the ACV function (Fl) and enable__ ensuingcommandsmaybedefinedTranslatorwords.Theautorange(RO). instrumentwill thenrespondto the Translatorwords as

well as Keithley device-dependentcommands.The re-servedword ALIAS automaticallyplacesthe instrument

3.10.2 Wild Card ($) in theNEW mode.NEW is alsousedto combineTranslatorwords andis explainedin paragraph3.10.4.

An advancedfeatureof Translatorsoftwareis its wild cardcapabilities.By usingthereservedcharacterｕＤＧｾ thesamebasicTranslatorword canbe usedto selectall optionsof- - OLD is areservedword thatpreventstheinstrumentfroma command.With this feature,a DDCoption numberis respondingto thedefinedTranslatorwords.In this mode,sentwith the wild cardTranslatorword. The format for only the Keithley device-dependentcommandswill beusing the wild card is shownin the following example, recognizedover the bus.whichdefinesthewordFUNCTIONasasubstitutefor theF command:

Ｇｾｌｉａ FUNCTION F$X;""FUNCTIONf'"FUNCTION 2"

The first statementdefinesFUNCTION as the wild cardTranslatorwordfor theFcommand.Thewild card($) willallow any valid option number of the F command(0through8) to be sentwith theword.Thesecondstatementwhich is thesubstitutefor theFI command,will placetheinstrumentin theACV function. Thethird statementis asubstitutefor theF2 command,andwill placethe instru-ment in the ohmsfunction.

Notes:

1.Whensendingawild cardTranslatorwordoverthebus,theremustbe aspacebetweentheTranslatorwordandthe option number.

2. If a wild cardTranslatorword is sentwithoutanoptionnumber,the instrumentwill default to option O.

HP-85 Programming Example-Enterthe following pro-gramto defineawild cardTranslatorwordto emulatetheP (filter) command.

REMOTE 707OUTPUT 707; " ALIAS FILTER P$X ;"

OUTPUT 707; , , FILTER 20"

The secondstatementdefinesFIITER as the wild cardTranslatorword for the P command.The third statementenablesthe filter with a filter valueof 20.

HP-85 ProgrammingExample-Enterthefollowing state-mentsinto the computerto placethe instrumentin theNEW mode:

- - REMOTE 707

OUTPUT 707 J ' , HEW' '

WhenEND-LINE-Is pressedthe secondtime, the instru-ment-will go into the NEW mode.

3.10.4 Combining Translator Words

ExistingTranslatorwordscanbe combinedresultingin aTranslatorwordthatcontainsthecommandsof thetwo (ormore) combinedwords. For example,existingTranslatorwords SETUPl and SETUP2 can be combined andnamedSETUP3.WhenSETUP3is sentover thebus, thecommandsof bothSETUP1andSETUP2will beexecuted.Theformatfor combiningTranslatorwordsis shownin thefollowing example:

Ｇｾｌｬａ SETUP3NEW SETUP1NEW SETUP2;"

Where:SETUP3is the new Translatorword.SETUPl and SETUP2arewords to be combined.NEW is a reservedword that tells the instrumentthatSETUPlandSETUP2areTranslatorwordsandnotKeithleydevice-dependentcommands.

Even though the two words were combined to formSETUP3,SETUPlandSET1JP2still existasvalidTranslatorwords.

3-35



Wild cardTranslatorwordscanalsobe combiriedwith otherTranslatorwords.Theoptionnumberusedwith the newword will apply ordy to the first wild card word in thestring. For example,assumethatFILTER (emulatingthePcommand)andFUNCTION (emulatingthe F command)are wild cardTranslatorwordsthatareto becombinedwiththenormalTranslatorword SETIJPl.Theformatmightlooklike this:

Where:SETUP3is the new Translatorword.SETUPlandSETUP2are the existingwords.P1ZlX is the Keithley IEEE commandstring.NEW tells the instrumentthat SETUPl andSETUP2areTranslatorwords.

Ｇｾｌｉａ TEST NEW SETUPl NEW FUNCTIONNEW FIITER;"

WhentheTranslatorwordSETUP3is assertedoverthebus,thecommandsof thetwo TranslatorwordsandtheKeithleyIEEE commandstring will be executed.

ThenewTranslatorword is TEST.WheneverTESTis sent,theoptionvaluesentwith thatword will ordy affectfunc-tion sinceFUNCTION is the first wild cardcommandinthe string. For example,TEST mightbesentover thebusin the following format:

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Thefollowing programwillcreate'twoTranslatorwordsandthencombinethemwitha Keithley IEEE commandstring to form a newTranslatorword:

"TEST 3"

The"3" in thecommandstringwill ony affect theFUNC.TION command.In this examplethe instrumentwill beplacedin the DCA function (F3). Sincethe FILTER com-manddoesnot haveanassignedoptionvalue(dueto itsposition in the string), it will default to 0 (disable).

HP-85ProgrammingExample-Thefollowing programwillcreatetwo Translatorwordsandthencombinethemto forma third Translatorword:

REt10TE 7137OUTPUT 7137i ' 'ALIAS SETUP 1 FIX; , ,

OUTPUT 7137; , 'AL I AS SETUP2 RGX ; , ,

OUTPUT 7137i" ALIAS SETUP3 NEW SETUP 1HE.W SETUP2 P1Z1X i' ,

The secondand third statementscreatetwo Translatorwords. WhenEND LINE is pressedthe fourth time, thetwo Translatorwords are combinedto form the wordSlbIUP3.

RH10TE 7137OUTPUT 7137i" ALIAS SETUPl F1X "; "OUTPUT 707; ;; !l ALIAS SETijp2 R0x ; , ,

OUTPUT 7137; , , ALI AS SETUP:; NEW SETUP 1 .1BjSETUP2.;' ,

3.10.6 Executing Translator Words and KeithleyIEEE Commands

Translatorwords(includingwild cardwords)andKeithleyIEEE commandscanbe executedin the samecommand

. string. The format for doing this is demonstratedin thefollowing examples:

Thesecondandthird programstatements·definethe twoTranslatorwords. When END LINE is presseda fourthtime, the two words combine to form the neW word(SETUP3). ..

nsETUPl P1Z1X""FUNCTION 2 P1ZlX"

3.10.5 Combining Translator Words WithKeithley IEEE-488 Commands

Whenthe first commandstring is sentover the bus, thecommandsin SETUPlandthe Keithley IEEE commandswill be executed.Whenthesecondstring is sent,the se-condoption of the wild cardFUNCTION commandandthe Keithley IEEE commandswill be executed.

REMOTE 7137OUTPUT 7137;" SETUPI PIZIX"Ｇｾｌｉａ SETUP3NEW SETUPl NEW SETUPZl'1ZlX;" .

OneormoreexistingTranslatorwords(includingwild cardwords) canbe combinedwith Keithley IEEE commandsresultingin a Translatorword thatcontainsthecommands HP-85ProgrammingExample-Thefollowing programwill"of theTranslatorwordsandtheKeithley IEEE commands. assertthe cOmmandsof an existingTranslatorword andTheformat for combiningTranslatorwordswith Keithley "" thestandardKeithley IEEE ｾｯｭｭＢ｡ｮ､ over the bus:IEEE commandsis shownin the following example:

3·36


When END UNE is pressedthe secondtime, the com'mands of SETUP1 and the KeitWey IEEE commands(P1Z1X) will be sentover the bus.

3.10.7 SAVE

Translatorwordscanberememberedby theinstrumentasp.ower up default words by sendingthe reservedwordSAVE. If SAVE is not sent,Translatorwordswill be lostwhenthe instrumentis turnedoff; Program37 (Reset)isrun, or an SOC,DCL or 10 is sentover thebus.

WhenSAVE is sent, the instrumentalsoremembersif itwasin NEW or OLD. If the instrumentis in NEW whenSAVE is sent,it will powerup in NEW. If the instrumentis in OLD whenSAVE is sent, it will powerup in OLD.

HP-85ProgrammingExample-WithoneormoreTranslatorwordsalreadydefined,enterthefollowing statementsin-to thecomputerto retainthemaspowerupdefaultwords:

REMOTE 7137OUTPUT 7137; , 'SAVE' ,

When END UNE is pressedthe secondtime, currentTranslatorwords will becomepowerup default words.

3.10.8 LIST

LIST is areservedword thatcanbeusedto list theexistingTranslatorwordsstoredin temporarymemory.The mostrecentdefinedword will be listedfirst.

Notes:1. TheU2 commandcanalsobeusedto list theTranslator

words (seeparagraph3.9.16).2. If therearenoTranslatorwordsin memory,nothingwill

be displayedwhenthe llst is requested.

HP-85 ProgrammingExample-With TranSlator wordsalreadydefined,enterhefollowing programstatementstolist them:

REt10TE 7137OUTPUT 7137; , 'LIST' '

ENTER 7137; A$DISP A$ -


The secondand third statementswill sendtheword. llstto thecomputer.WhenEND LINE is pressedafourth time,the Translatorwords will be displayed.

3.10.9 FORGET

FORGETis areservedwordthatis usedto pw;geall Trans-latorwordsfrom temporarymemory.However,Translatorwordsthatweresavedin E'PROMby theSAVE commandwill againbe availableafter power to the instrumentiscycled,Program37 (Reset)is RUN, or DCL, SOCor 10 issentover the bus.

To purgeTranslatorwords from £>PROM, first sendtheFORGETcommandandthensendthe SAVE command.

HP-85 Programming Example-Enter the followingstatementsinto thecomputerto purgeall Translatorwordsfrom temporarymemory:

REMOTE 7137OUTPUT 7137; , 'FORGET' '

WhenENDUNEis pressedthesecondtime, theTranslatorwordsarepurgedfrom temporarymemory.

3.11 BUS DATA TRANSMISSION TIMES

A primary considerationis the lengthof time it takestoobtaina readingoncethe instrumentis triggeredto makea conversion.The lengthof time will vary somewhatde-pendingontheselectedfunction andtriggermode.Table3-16 gives typical times.

Table 3·16. Trigger To Reading-Ready Times(DCV Function)

Configuration· Mode T1111e (typical)

SOAOGlNanx Maximum Reading 6msecRate(31f2d)

SlAOGlNanx 4'hd 8msecSZAOGlNanx 5'hd 24msecS3A1GlNanx 6'hd 106msec

(internal filter off)S3A1GlN1TIX 61f2d 3.3sec

(internal filter on\

·Commandsnot listed areat factory default.

3-3713-38


4.1 INTRODUCTION

SECTION 4PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

4.3 INITIAL CONDITIONS

The proceduresoutlined in this sectionma.y be used toverify that the instrumentis operatingwithin the limitsstatedin the.specificationsat thefront of this manualPer-formanceverificationmaybeperformedwhenthe instru-ment is first receivedto ensurethat no damageor misad-justmenthasoccurredduringshipment.Verification mayalsobe performedwhenever thereis aquestionof instru-ment accuracy,or following calibration, if desired.

NOTEIf the instrumentis still underwarranty(lessthan1yearfrom thedateof shipment),andits perform-ancefalls outsidethespecifiedrange,contactyourKeithleyrepresentativeor the factory to determinethe correct courseof action.

4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

All measurementsshouldbemadeat 18 - 28cC (65: 82CP)and at less than80% relative humidity.

The Model 196 must be turnedon andallowed to warmup for at leasttwo hoursbeforebeginningthe verfication

_procedures.If the instrumenthasbeensubjectto extremesof temperature(outsidethe rangespecifiedin paragraph4.2), additional time should be allowed for internaltemperaturesto reach normal operating temperature.Typically, it takesoneadditionalhourto stabilizea tiriit thatis 10cC (18°P) outsidethe specifiedtemperaturerange.

4.4 RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT

Table4-1 lists all testequipmentrequiredfor verification.Alternateequipmentmaybeusedaslong asthesubstituteequipmenthasspecificationsat leastasgoodasthoselistedin the table. .

NOTETheverificationlimits in thissectiondo not includetestequipmenttolerance.

Table 4-1. Recommended Test Equipment

Mfg Model Description Specifications

Fluke 5440A DC VoltageCalibrator 300mV, 3V,30V,300Vranges±15ppm.Fluke 5200A AC VoltageCalibrator 300mV,3V, 30V ranges;20Hz±O.1%;

50Hz-20kHz0.02%;100kHz±O.33%.Fluke 5215A AC PowerAmplifier 300Vrange:20Hz±O.12%;50Hz-20kHz±O.04%;

100kHz±O.l%Fluke 5450A ResistanceCalibrator 300Q-3MQranges±15ppm;30MQ±32ppm;

Valhalla 2500E300MQrangem5ppm

AC-DC CurrentCalibrator 300J.l-3Aranges±.03%DC, ±O.l%AC to 5kHz(atfull scaleoutout)

4-1


PERFORMANCEVERIFICATION

4.5 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES

Thefollowing paragraphscontainproceduresfor venryingtheoneyearaccuracyspecificationsof the instrument,at5'hdresolution,for eachof the five measuiingfunctions:DCvolts,TRMSAC volts,ohms,TRMS AC amps,andDCamps.Theseproceduresareintendedfor useonlybyquali-fied personnelusingaccurateandreliabletestequipment.If theinstrumentis outof sFecificationsandnotunderwar-ranty, refer to Section6 for calibrationprocedures.

WARNINGThe maximum common-mode voltage (voltagebetween input low and chassis ground) is SOOV.Exceeding this value may cause a breakdown ininsulation, creating a shock hazard. Some of theprocedures in this section may expose the userto dangerous voltages. Use standard safetyprecautions when such dangerous voltages areencountered.

4.5.1 DC Volts Verification

With the Model 196setto-5V,d resolution,verify the DCvolts function asfollows:

CAUTIONDo not exceed 300V between the input HI andLO terminals or damage to the instrument mayoccur.

1. Selectthe DCV function and autorange.2. Connectthe DC voltagecalibratorto theModel 196as

shownin Figure4-1.3. Setthe calibratorto OV andenablezeroon the Model

196.·Yerify that the display is readingooO.OoomY ±2counts.

seethat the readingfor eachrangeis within the limitslisted in the table.

7. Repeattheprocedurefor eachof therangeswith negativevoltages.

Table 4-2. Limits for DC Volts Verification

196 Applied Allowable ReadingsDCV Ranlte DC Yoltalte (18°to 28°q

300rnV 300.000mV 299.974to 300.0263 V 3.00000 V 2.99987to 3.00013

30 V 30.0000 V 29.9973to 30.0027300 V 300.000. V 299.970to 300.030

= HIj i. DC VOLTAGEI.....10- j

CAUBRATOR

ｧｑ｛Ｚ［Ｚ｝ｄLO MODEL 5HOA

MODEL 196

Figure 4-1. Connections for DC Volts Verification

4.5.2 TRMS AC Volts Verification

With the instrumentset to 51f2d resolution,performthefollowing procedureto verify the AC volts function:

CAUTIONDo not exceed 300V RMS 425V peak 10'V-Hzbetween the input HI and LO terminals or instru-ment damage may occur.

NOTELow measurementtechniquesshould be usedwhen checking the 300mV DC range. Refer toparagraph 2.6.5 for low level measurementconsiderations.

1. SelecttheACV functionandautorange.Do notusezeroto canceltheoffset in this procedure.Turn zerooff, ifit is enabled.

2. ConnecttheAC calibratorto theModel196asshowninFigure4-2.

3. Setthecalibratorto output290rnYatafrequencyof 20Hzandverify that the readingis within the limits listed inTable4-3.

4. Setthecalibratorto output +300mVandverify that the 4. Repeatthe290mVmeasurementat theotherfrequenciesreadingis within the limits listed in Table4-2. specifiedin Table4-3.

5. Disablezeroandleaveit disabledfor the remainderof . 5. Repeatthe procedurefor the 3V, 30V and300v rangesthe DCV verification procedure. by applyingtherespectiveAC voltageslistedin Table4-3.

Checkto seethat the readingfor eachrangeis within6. Checkthe 3V, 30\', and 300V rangesby applying the the limits listed in the table.

respectiveDCvoltagelevelslistedin Table4-2. Verify to

4-2


PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

Table 4-3. Limits for TRMS AC Volts Verification"-- .

196 Applied Allowable ｒ･｡､ｩｮｾ (18°C to28°C)ACV Ranlle AC Voitalle 20Hz 50Hz 200Hz 10kHz 20kHz 100kHz

300mV 290.000mV 284.100 289.030 289.465 289.465 288.640 283.900to to- to to to to

295.900 290.970 290.535 290.535 291.360296.100

3 V 2.9000OV 2.84100 2.89030 2.89465 2.894652.88930 2.85350to to to to to to

2.95900 2.90970 2.90535 2.90535 2.91070 2.94650

30 V 29.000OV 28.4100 28.9030 28.9465 28.9465 28.8640 28.5350to- to to to to· to

29.5900 29.0970 29.0535 29.0535 29.1360 29.4650

300 V 29O.00OV 284.100 289.030 289.465 289.465 288.640 *to to to to to

295.900 290.970 290.535 290.535 291.360

'Do not apply290V at 100kHzto the input. This exceedstheV'Hz limit of the instrument.MaximumTRMS AC volt inputat 100kHzis 10OV. On the300V range,allowablereadingswitl;! 100V @ 100kHz applied to the input are 98.200to 101.800.Seeparagraph2.6.7forclarification of the V'Hz specification.

4.5.3 Ohms Verification

Figure 4-2. Connections for TRMS AC VoltsVerification

,.CAUTIONDo not exceed 425V peak or 300V RMS betweenthe input HI and LO terminals or damage to theinstrument may occur.

=I !.1.....10·gQQO •

MODEL 1%

I HI POWER I AC VOLTAGEINPUT AMPLIFIER ICALIBRATOR

LO MODEL 5215A IMODEL 5200A

1. Selectthe ohmsfunction andautorange.2. UsingKelvin testleads(suchastheKeithleyModel1641)

connectthe resistancecalibrator to the Model 196 asshownin Figure4-3.

3. Setthecahbratorto theSHORTpositionandenablezeroon theModel 196.Verify that thedisplayreads000.000.

4. Set-the calibrator to output 19011 and verify that theL----------------------J·----readingis within the limits listed in Thble 4-4.

5. Disablezeroandleaveit disabledfor the remainderofthe ohmsverification procedure.

6. Utilizing Figures4-3 and 4-4, check the 3kll through300MIl rangesby applyingtherespectiveresistancelevelslistedin Table4-4. Verify that thereadingsarewithin thelimits listed in the table.

With theModel196setto 5'hd resolution,verify theohmsfunction as follows:

4-3


PERFORMANCEVERIFICATION

Table 4-4. Limits for Ohms Verification

Applied Allowable Readings196 Ranlle Setup Resistance (18°C to 28°C)

300 Q Figure4-3 190.000 Q 189.979to 190.0213kQ Figure4-3 1.90000kQ 1.89985to 1.90015

30 kQ Figure4-3 19.0000kQ 18.9985to 19.0015300 kQ Figure4-4 190.000kQ 189.958to 190.042

3MQ Figure4-4 1.90oo0MO 1.89958to 1.9004230MQ Figure4-4 19.0oo0MQ 18.9808to 19.0192

300MO Figure4-4 loo.0ooMO 97.998to 102.002

,- ---,_4.5.4DC Current Verification

OUTPUT HI

=I I SENSE HI RESISTANCEI.....10

ｉＧ CALIBRATORｧｑｾ •SENSE LO I< MODEL S+SOA

MODEL 196

OUTPUT LD

Figure 4-3. Connections for Ohms Verification(300Q-30kQ Range)

=f\I !.

1.....10· OUTPUT HI

ｧｑｾｄ'JI

SH IELDEDMODEL 196 CABLE

h

RESISTANCEｉＧ CALIBRATOR

I< MODEL 5+50AOUTPUT LD

Figure 4-4. Connections for Ohms Verification(300kQ-300MQ Ranges)

4-4

With the instrumentsetto 5'hd resolution,verify theDCcurrentfunction as follows:

CAUTIONDo not exceed 3A to the AMPS and LO input ter-minals or the rear panel current fuse will blow.

1. Selectthe DCA function andautorange.2. ConnecttheDC currentcalibrationsourceto theModel

196 asshownin Figure4-5.3. Setthe cah"brationsourceto output +300jLA andverify

that the readingis within the limits listed in Thble4-5.4. Repeattheprocedurefor the3mA, 3OmA, 300mAand

3A rangesby applyingthe respectiveDC currentlevelslistedin Thble4-5. Checkto seethatthereadingfor eachrangeis within the limits listed in the table.

5. Repeat the procedurefor each of the ranges withnegativecurrentlevels.

Table 4-5. Limits for DC Current Verification

Applied Allowable Readings196 Ranlle DC Current (18°C to 28°C)

300 (LA 300.000(LA 299.710to 300.2903mA 3.00000mA 2.99840to 3.00160

30mA 30.0oo0mA 29.9840to 30.0160300mA 300.oo0mA 299.840to 300.160

3 A 3.00000 A 2.99720to 3.00280


PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

2 C e ttheAC currentcalibrationsourceto theModel

mmals or the rear panel current fuse Will blow.

onn c196asshownin Figure4-6.

= 3. Setthecalibrationsourceto output300/<A at a frequen-I I•• LO OUTPUT cy of 20Hzandverify that thereadingis within thelimitsI····.10 •ｑｑｾ

listed in Table 4-6.- HI OUTPUT 4. Repeatthe300/<A measurementat theotherfrequencies

MOOEL 1% specifiedin Table 4-6.

L5. Repeatthe procedurefor the 3mA, 30mA, 300mA and

3A rangesby applyingthe respectiveAC currentlevelsCURRENT LO LO OC VOLTAGE listedin Table4-6. Checkto seethatthereadingfor each

CALIBRATOR INPUT CALIBRATOR rangeis within the limits listed in the table.'-- MODEL 2500E MODEL 5HOAHI HI

-

Figure 4-5. Connections for DC Current Verification = ｾI I •• LO OUTPUTI.....10.

4.5.5 TRMS AC Current Verificationｑｑｾ HI OUTPUT

MODEL 1%

With the instrumentsetfor 51f>d resolution,verify the AC

[ CURRENTcurrentfunction as follows: LO LO AC VOLTAGE

CALIBRATOR INPUT CALIBRATORCAUTION '-- MODEL 2500E MODEL 5200AHI HI

Do not exceed3A to the AMPS and LO input ler-. .

1. Seledthe ACA functionandautorange.Do not usezeroto cancel the offset in this procedure.

Figure 4-6. Connections for TRMS AC CurrentVerification

Table 4-6. Limits for AC Current Verification

196 Applied Allowable Readines(18°C to 28°qRanee AC Current 20Hz 45Hz 5kHz300 p.A 290.000p.A 284.100 287.290 287.290

to to to295.900 292.710 292.710

3mA 2.900ooiriA 2.84100 2.88160 2.88160to to to

2.95900 2.91840 2.91840

30mA 29.0000mA 28.4100 28.8160 28.8160to to to

29.5900 29.1840 29.1840

300mA 290.000mA 284.100 288.160 288.160to to to

295.900 291.840 291.840

3 A 2.90000 A 2.84100 2.88160 2.88160to to to

2.95900 2.91840 2.91840

4-5/4-6


SECTION 5PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

Onthe300mVand3V ranges,thesignalis routedthroughrelayK5 andbufferU28A. Onthe3V range,thesignalpro-ceedsthroughanalogswitchU21CandbufferU26Bbeforebeingappliedto thelRMS converter(U27). Onthe300mVrange,thesignalis detouredthroughanalogswitchU21Ato U28B which is configured as a XlO amplifier. TheamplifiedsignalthenproceedsthroughanalogswitchU21Bandbuffer U26B to the lRMS converter(U27).

ACV

On the30V range,Q13 is on andQ3 is off routing the in-putSignalin themultiplexer(Q35).Onthe300vrange,Q13is off andQ3 is onroutingtheinput signalto themultiplex-er (Q35). On the 300mV and3V ranges,the input signalis removedfrom theresistordividernetwork(Q13andQ3off) andappliesdirectly to themultiplexerthroughKl andR13.

Thebasicstepsinvolvedin ACV conditioningareasfollows:

1. RelayK4 appliestheACV input to thegaincircuitry. Herethe signalundergoesa gain factor of 10 (300mV range),1 (3V range),1/10 (30V range)or 1/100(300V range).

2. Thesignalis thenappliedto the lRMS converter(U27)wherethe AC signal is convertedto a DC signal.

3. The DC signal is thenappliedto the multiplexer.

5.1 INTRODUCTION

5.2 OVERALL FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Divided by 10 on the 30V range.Divided by 100 on the 300V range.

This sectioncontainsan overall functional descriptionof-the Model 196. Detailedschematicsandcomponentloca-tion drawings are locatedat the end of this instructionmanual.

Theanalogsectionconsistsof thesignalconditioningcir-cuits,multiplexer,inputamplifier, AID converterandcon-trol circuitry. The heart of the digital section is 68B09microprocessorthatsupervisestheentireoperationof theinstrument.Additionaldigital circuitry includesthedisplayandIEEE-488interface.

A simplified block diagramof the Model 196 is showninFigure 5-1. The instrumentmay be divided into two sec-tions: analoganddigital circuitry. The analoganddigitalsectionsareelectricallyisolatedfrom eachotherby theuseof pulse transformersfor control and communicatlo_ns.Separatepowersuppliesfor theanaloganddigital sectionsensureproperisolation.

The detailedcircuitry of the Model 196 analogsectionislocatedon schematicdiagramnumber196-126.

5.3 ANALOG CIRCUITRY

5.3.1 Input Signal Conditioning

Signalconditioningcircuitry modifiestheinput to a signalthatis usableby theModel 196andappliesthatsignal tothe multiplexer.

In the 30V range,the signal is appliedto U26A. BecauseanalogswitchU23Cis openon this range,amplifierU26Ahasa feedbackresistanceof l18kO (R32) which resultsina gain factor of 1/10. The divided signal is then routedthroughanalogswitchU23B andbufferU26B to thelRMSconverter(U27).

DCV

. .. . . On the300V range,thesignalis appliedto U26A. BecauseSignal condilI?mng.fo.r the 30V and300V rangesIS per- analogswitchU23Cis closedonthis range,amplifierU26Aformedby resIStordiVIder ｮ･ｾ＿ｲ R17. On ｴｾ･ｳ ranges, hasa feedbackresistanceof l18kO (R32) in parallel withK1 ｾ K2 areopen,andthediVIder networkIS cOnl:,ected 13kO(R24), resultingin a gainfactorof 1/100.Thedividedto Slgn.algroundt:rrough.Qll ｾｕｾ ThefOllOWIng at---signalis thenroutedthroughanalogswitchU23B andbuf-tenuationof the mput slgnallsprOVIded: fer U26B to the lRMS converter(U27).

5-1


PRINCIPLESOF OPERATION

I'" - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -'-.,

I INPUT CONDITIONING II - .... -- II CURRENT DCA I

AMPS; SHUNTS II II II , ACA I---- ｾ

I . II II

AC ATTENUATI ONII

IH

ACV, ACA II AC-DC I,

CONVERSIONI II'I' II ACV I

HI' I DCV, OHMS IDCV INPUT AID ｾ-, IATTENUATI ONI : IMULT IPLEXER

LO' I n REF RESISTORS AMPLIFIER CONVERTER-, I I , ,

TL - - - - - ---1'- - - - ----"

ICONTROL_

-- - - - - --- - ---- -- -- - - -- ------ -- - ＭＱ - - - --- ＭＺｦｾｌｩａｾＭＭＭＭＭIEEE-488

MICROCOMPUTERJE--rINTERFACE FRONT PANEL IBUTTONS-1

DISPLAY

--,.. - - "

VU REF HI - Vll REF LO

R..-F°(VU SENSEHI - VU SENSEill)Rx =--------,-------

By measuringthe four inputs to the AID convertertheunknown resistance can be computed by themicroprocessorusingthis equation:

Figure 5-1. Overall Block Diagram

300kll range:R17A B R17C (lOOkll)3MU range:R17A II R17B (lMll)30Mll and300Mll ranges:R17C (10MU)

OHMS

Resistancemeasurementsaremadeusingthe ratiometrictechnique(seeFigure5-2). When the resistancefunctionis selected,a seriescircuit is formed betweenthe ohmssource,a referenceresistorand the external unknownresistance.A currentflows throughthereferenceresistorandtheunknownresistance.Sincethiscurrentis commonto both resistances,the valueof the unknownresistancecan be calculatedby measuringthe voltage acrosstpereferenceresistor and the voltage acrossthe unknownresistance.

Thefollowing ohmsreferenceresistorsareused(seeFigure5-3).

For the3000rangeV!l SENSEHI andVU SENSELO areactually multipled by a factor of 10 in the input buffercircuit.

300U and3kU ranges:R26 (2kU)30kll range:R23 (30kll)

5-2


Protectionon theohmsrangesis accomplishedbyRU Q9andQ16. For an input voltageappliedto the {) input ter-minals, Q9 and Q16 clamp the voltage to the referenceresistorsto asafelimit. RTI limits thecurrentto Q9andQ16.

TheModel 196is equippedto make2- or 4-terminalresis-tancemeasurements.Generally,4-terminalmeasurementsshouldbemadeon the 30011rangebecausethe relatively1aIge outputcurrentcandevelopasignificant-voltageacrossthe test leads,affectingmeasurementaccuracy.

Figure5-2showstheequivalentcircuit of theinput circuit.Rx is theunknownmeasuredresistanceandRl, R2, R3 andR4 representthe testlead resistance.R2 andR3 arecon-nectedonly during4-terminalmeasurements.Whenusinga2-terminalconfiguration,all thecurrentflows throughthetestleadsRl andR4. If Rx hasa low value,the amount-ofvoltagedevelopedacrossthetest leadscanbesignificant.

PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

Sincethevoltageis sensedacrossthecombinedresistanceof R" Rx andR.; considerableerrorcanbeintroducedintothe reading.To usea 4-terminalconnection,a secondsetof leads (R2 and R3) are connectedto the unknownresistance.The amountof currentthroughR2 andR3 ismuchsmallerthanthecurrentthroughRl andR4. Thus,the voltageseenby the instrumentis muchcloserto theactualvalueacrossthemeasuredresistance,minimizingtheerror.

DCA and ACA

TheresistorcurrentshuntnetworkR28isconfiguredsothata full scalecurrentinputwill resultin a300mVdropacrossthe networkon all currentranges.For DCA, this voltageis routedto themultiplexerthroughanalogswitch U24B.ForACA, thesignalis routedthroughU21DtoXlO amplifierU28B. The amplifier signal then travels through analogswitchU21B andbuffer U26B to theTRMS converter.TheconvertedDC signal is then routed to the multiplexer.

- . -- --

I vn ,I II ,

FRONT PANEL I I vn REF HICONNECTOR I .). I

INPUT: : RREF I

ａｾｾI

HI I I". I

:vnREF LOI

Ｚ RsI Ir---,SENSEI I

r I Ｎｾ I HI I I• ... I ,

vnIHERHI I:SENSE HI

Vx •=R ICONN.l I

X I ONL Y I I I

4 I R3 I I I, AU ,

L_Y.!"- "SENSEI I vnLO I Ｚ R

ISENSE LO

I < S IR4 I I... , I...

I NPU TI

ｾI

LO I II II I, ,

RREF. Cvn SENSE HI - vn SENSE LtDRx = vn REF HI - vn REF LO

- - - -- ""-_. ,,,.

Figure 5-2. Input Configuration During 2 and 4-Terminal Resistance Measurement

5-3



+5V

DI2

REFERENCE{ ｾ R17ARESISTORS ,>lOMn

• R17B Ｎ Rl1C Ｎ R23.. 1.IlIMn .> 1I0.95kn .-IOkn

n REF HI, TO 035 0 F'MUL T IPLEXER

":; R26::; 1.002kn

n REF LO , TO U2+A OF(30kn) MULT IPLEXER

INPUT, HI,

Ｎ ..

013 03 ｾｕＲＲ

011

n REF LO ,TO U240 OF

(300n n) 'MULTIPLEXERｾｾ • 3k

U220

n REF LO , TO 034 OF

(300kn-300Mn) 'MULTIPLEXER

ＧＧＧＭＭＭＭＭＮＮＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭ ,-r n SENSE HI 7 TO 03D OF MULTIPLEXER

RX ｾｾｾ｟ＧｲＭＺｮＺＺＮＮＮＮＺｓＺＮＺｅｾｎｆｓＮＺＺｅＭＮＺＺＮｌＺＮ ------4, TO U22B OF MULTIPLEXER

ＺINPUT

• LO

5.3.2 Multiplexer

RREF. (vn SENSE HI - vn SENSE LO)RX = ＭＭＭＭＭＭＮＮＺＮＮＺＮＺＮＮＮＮＮＺＺＮＮＺＺＺＮＺＮＮＺＮＮＺＺＭ］ＭＭＮＺＺＮＮＺＮＭＮＺＮＮＺＮＺＮＮＮＮＺＮＮＺＮＮＺＺＮＮＺＺＭ］ＭＭ

vn REF HI - vn REF LO

Figure 5-3. Resistance Measurement Simplified Circuitry

formed by the A/D converter,and the resultantdata isusedby themicroprocessorto calculatethe final reading.

Themultiplexercircuitry selects-amongthevarioussignalsthatarepartof theModel196measurementcycleandcon-nectsthemto the inputbufferamplifier. Figure5-4showsa simplified schematicof the multiplexer circuitry. TheFront/Rear INPUTswitch detectorU25B is not part of ameasurementcycle.

Figure 5-5 shows the generalswitching phasesfor thevarioussignals.During eachphase,an integrationis per-

5-4

Theprechargeamplifier (U20B) is momentarilyselectedbyQ31justbeforesignalFET Q30is activated.The purpose?f the prechargea:nplifier is to get the signalseenby themput buffer amplifier closerto the actualinput-atsignalFETQ30.Theprechargeamplifier alsoprovidesthe driveto keeptheFETson until turnedoff by thecontrolcircuitry.



SIGNAL (aOOaVOC. avoc) Q30

n SENSE HI

PRECHARGE C31

SIGNAL (DCA)U248

SIGNAL (ACV. ACA)U24C

FRONT/REAR SWITCHU258

2.1V REFERENCEU25C

C32

ZERO (EXCEPT 30V)U250

TO INPUT

BUFFER

n REF LO ＨＳＰＰ 3kll) U24DAMPLIFIER

U25A

tl REF LO (30kn)U24A

II SENSE LOU228

ZERO (30V)U22A

033

Il REF LO (300k - 300MIl ) C34

SIGNAL (30VDC, 300VDC) C35

Il REF HI Q12

Figure 5·4. JFET MUltiplexer

5-5


PRINCIP\..ESOF OPERATION

J

REFERENCEPHASE

1SIGNALPHASE

J

ZEROPHASE

J

CALCULA TEA REAOING

I

A. TYPICAL VOLTAGE ANDCURRENT MEASUREMENTS

'"n REF HIPHASE

'"n REF LOPHASE

'"n SENSE HIPHASE

J

n SENSE LOPHASE

J

CALCULATEA REAOING

IB. TYPICAL RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS

Figure 5·5. Mutliplexer Phases

5·6


5.3.3 +2.1V Reference Source

Voltageandcurrentmeasurementsarebasedon compar-ing theunknownsignalwith an internal +2,lV referencevoltage source. During each measurementcycle, theunknownsignalissampledandthencomparedwith signalcommonandthe +2.1V referencevalues.


5.4 AJD CONVERTER

The Model 196 usesa: constantfrequency,variablepulsewidth, analog-to-digitalconverter.A simplifiedschematicof theAID usedin theModel 196 is shownin Figure5-6.

5.3.4 Input Buffer Amplifier

Thechargebalancephasebeginswhenthe inputenableldisableline is sethigh.This occursattheendof asoftware-

U34 providesa highly stable+6.95Vreference,while un generateddelayperiodthatallowsthesignalto settleafterand R10 provide a constantcurrent to minimize zener theappropriatemultiplexerFET is turnedon. Oncethein-voltagevariations.R36 andR37 divide down the +6.95V put is enabled,thesignalfrom thebufferamplifier is addedvalue to the final +2.1V referencevoltage. _ to the level shift curreniappliedthroughRllC andRllD

or RllC only. In this manner,the ±3.03Vbipolarsignalfromthebuffer amplifier is convertedto a unipolarsignal thatcanbe integrated.

Theinputbufferamplifierprovidesisolationbetweentheinputsignalandthe AID converter.Q41providesthelownoise,high impedanceFET input for amplifier U35. Theamplifiercanbeconfiguredfor Xl or X10 gainwith R41andR42 acting as the feedbacknetwork. When Xl gain isselectedby themic;roprocessor,feedbackis routedthroughpin 12 of the analogswitch U44A. At XlO gain, feedbackis routedthroughpin 13of themultiplexswitch.Amplifiergain configurationsfor the variousfunctionsandrangesare listed in Table5-1. _

Table 5-1. Input Buffer Amplifier (U35) GainConfiguration

Function ｒ｡ｮｾ Gain

DCV 300mV X103-300v Xl

ACV All Xl0 3000 XlO

3k-300MO XlDCA All X10ACA All Xl

Theintegratoris madeup of Q1, 019 andC32. Whentheinput to the integratoris applied, the integratoroutputrampsupuntil its voltageis slightly higherthanthevoltageappliedto theinvertinginputofthedutycyclecomparator(USA). Thechargebalancecurrent,whosedutycycleis pro-portional to the input, is fed backto the integratorinputthroughR8 andQ4. Sincethe chargebalancecurrent-ismuchlargerthanthesumof the inputandlevel shift-cur-rents, the integratoroutput now rampsin the negativedirectionuntil Q of U8B goeslow. The VIA thencountsthe total numberof pulsesthat occurduring the chargebalancephase.

At theendof thechargebalancephase,theoutputof theintegratoris restingat somepositivevoltage.Sincethe in-tegratoroutputis connectedto thenon-invertinginput ofthe final-slope comparator(USB), the final-slope com-paratoroutput remainshigh until the integratoroutputrampsin thenegativedirection.During final-slope,Q4 isturnedoff andthefeedbackis fed throughU16backto theintegratorinput.-Thefmal-slopecomparatoroutputis thengatedwith the3.84MHzclockandcounted.Oncethecom-paratoroutputgoeslow, the VIA stopscountingandthereadingcanbe computed.

5·7



U7.U6.UH

FEEDBACKCONTROLCIRCUIT

DUTY CYCLECOMPARATOR

FINAL SLOPECOMPARATOR

RUF

+5V

R9C

R9B

ｲＭＭＭＭＭＭＭ TO Tl02

3.84HHz U430

CLOCK

USB

ij D

aFINALSLOPE

CHARGE CURRENTBALANCE U16BCURRENT

RilE

RIID

LEVELSHIFT

CURRENT

Figure 5-6. AID Converter Simplified Schematic

5.5 CONTROL CIRCUITRY 5.6 DIGITAL CIRCUITRY

The signalsfor the circuitry that providescontrol of thevariousFETs, relays,analogswitchesandlogic levelsaresuppliedby theshift storeregistersU29,U30, U31, andU32(see schematic 196-126, page 3). CWCK, DATA andSTROBEsignalsaresentfrom the VIA (U109) acrossthepulse transformersTI03, Tl04 and TIOS (see schematic196-106).Thepulsetransformersprovide500visolationbe-tweenthe analoganddigitill sectionsof. ｴｨｾｪｮｳｴｲｵｭ･ｮｴDXfA is serially loadedinto the shift storeregistersandaSTROBEpulsecausestheregistersto ｳｩｭｵｬｴ｡ｮ･ｯｵｳｬｹｾｭｴ

put the appropriatelogic levelsto the PET,analogswitchandrelay drivers.

TheModel196is controlledby aninternalmicrocomputer.This section briefly de.scribes the operation of themicrocomputerand associateddigital circuitry. Refer toschematicdiagramnumber196-106for circuit details.

5.6.1 Microcomputer

The microcomputer centers around the 8-bit 68B09microprocessor.The MPU has direct control over thedisplay,front panelswitches,AID converter,IEEE-488bus,

5-8


aswell as theVOlTMETER COMPLETEdutputandtheEXTERNAL TRIGGER Input. Timing for the micro-processoris accomplishedby the useof YlOl; an 8MHzcrystal.Internally, this frequencyis divideddownby fourto obtain a busoperatingfrequencyof-2MHz.

Instrumentoperationsoftwareis storedin EPROMsUI05andUI06. Therevisionlevel of this softwareis displayedby Program0 (Menu). Calibration constants,Translatorwords and instrumentset up conditions are ·storedinE'PROM(V108). U107is theRAM. Partialaddressdecodingis usedin this system.Thefunction selectedis determineedby thestateof All, A12,A13,A14andA15 addresslines.Theseaddresslines determinewhich is selectedby thedecoders(UlOl). Only onedevice(ROM, RAM, VIA, etc)will haveaccessto the databus at anyonetime.

Theheartof theIEEE-488circuitry is theGPIBA (V112).TheGPIBA is capableof performingall IEEE talker-listenerpro-tocols.The bidirectionaldatalinesDO throughD7 permitthe transferof databetweenthe microprocessorand theGPIBA. The ｴｲ｡ｮｾ｣･ｩｶ･ｲ Ul13 andUll4 areusedto drivethe output. Data is buffered by Ul13 and U114 and istransmittedto the bus via connectorJ15.


5.6.2 Display CircUitry

Thedisplayinformationis sentthroughdisplaylatchesU110andU111.Uponeachdisplayupdate,newsegmentinfor·mationis presentedto thedisplaylatchesandaclockpulseis sentonPAD. Theclockpulseto U4andU5 (seeschematic196-116) shifts a digit enablebit to the next digit to beenabled.Every 10 times the display is updated,a digitenableit is generatedat PAl andgoesto thedatainput oftheshift register.U128throughU131 arethedriversfor theLED segmentsof thedisplaydigits andtheLED indicators.

5.7 POWER SUPPLIES

Themainpowersuppliesof theModel 196arelocatedonsheet1of 2 of schematicdrawingnumber196-106.FuseFlOlis theline fusewhich is accessiblefrom therear panel.5102is the POWERON/OFFswitch and 5101 selects115V or230V operationby placingthe transformerprimarywind-ingsin parallelorseries.Thepowertransformer,TIOl, hasthreesecondaryWindings;onefor the +5V digital supply,onefor the +5V analogsupplyandonefor the ±15Vanalogsupply.CR10l,CR102andCRl03providefullwave rectifica-tionfor thethreesupplies,while VR101throughVR104pro-vide the regulation.

5·9/5·10


6.1 INTRODUCTION

SECTION 6MAINTENANCE

Table 6·1. Line Voltage Selection

This sectioncontainsinformationnecessaryto mamtain,calibrate,andtroubleshoottheModel196.Fusereplacementand line voltageselectionproceduresarealso included.

WARNINGThe procedures included in this section are foruse only by qualified service personnel. Do notperform these procedures unless qualified todo so. Many of the steps in this section may ex-pose you to potentially lethal voltages thatcould result in personal injury or death if nor-mal safety precautions are not observed.

6.2 LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION

The Model 196 may be operatedfrom either105-125Vor210-25OV50 or 60Hz powersources.The instrumentwasshippedfrom the factory set for an operatingvoltagemarkedontherearpanel.To changetheline voltage,pro-ceedasfollows:

WARNINGDisconnect the line cord and all other equip-ment from the Model 196.

1. Placetheline voltageswitch, locatedonthe rearpanel,in the desiredposition. SeeThble 6-1 for the correctposition.

2. Installa powerline fuseconsistentwith theline voltage.Seeparagraph6.3.1for thefusereplacementprocedure.

CAUTIONThe correct fuse type must be used to main-taIn proper instrument protection.

3. Mark theselectedline voltageontherearpanelfor futurereference(to avoid confusion,erasethe old mark).

Line Line SwitchVoltaee Freouencv Settinl';

105V-125V 50Hz-60Hz 105V-125V21OV-25OV 50Hz-60Hz 210V-25OV

6.3 FUSE REPLACEMENT

The Model 196 has two fuses for protection in caseofoverload.Theline fuseprotectstheline powerinputof theinstrumentandthecurrentfuseprotectsthecurrentfunc-tion from excessivecurrent.Thefusesmaybereplacedbyusingtheproceduresfound in thefollowing paragraphs.

WARNINGDisconnect the instrument from the power lineand from other equipment before replacingfuses.

6.3.1 Line Fuse

To replacethe line fuse, proceedas follows:

1. Turnoff thepoweranddisconnecttheline cordandallother testcablesfrom the instrument.

2. Placetheendof aflat-bladescrewdriverinto theslot intheline fuseholderontherearpanel.Pushin androtatethe fuse carrier one-quarterturn counterclockwise.Releasepressureon the holderand its internalspringwill pushthe fuse and the carrierout of the holder.

3. Removethe fuse and replaceit with the proper typeusingThble 6-2 as a guide.

CAUTIONDo not use a fuse with a rating higher thanspecified or Instrument damage may occur. Ifthe instrument repeatedly blows fuses, locateand correct the cause of the trouble beforereplacing the fuse.

4. Install thenew fuse and the carrierinto the holderbyreversingthe aboveprocedure.

6-1


M"'IN.TEN."'N.CE

Table 6·2. Line Fuse Replacement

Line KeithleyVoltaj1;e Fuse'I'vPe PartNo.

90V-125V 114A,250V,Slo-Blo,3AG FU-17180V-250V 1/8A,250V,Slo-Blo,3AG FU-20

6.3.2 Current Fuse

Thecurrentfuseprotectsthe300pAthrough3A rangesfroman input currentgreaterthan3A. To replacethe currentfuse, performthe following steps:

1. Turn off the poweranddisconnectthe powerline andtest leads.

2. Placetheendof a flat-bladescrewdriverinto theslot inthefuseholderon the rearpanel.Pressin slightly androtatethefusecanierone-quarterturn counterclockwise.Releasepressureand removethe fuse carrierand thefuse.

3. Removethedefectivefuseandreplaceit usingTable6-3as a guide.

CAUTIONUse only the recommended fuse type. If a fusewith a higher current rating is installed, instru-ment damage may occur.

4. To replacethefusecarrierwith thefuse,reversethepro-cedurein step2. '

Table 6-3. Current Fuse Replacement

ｾ･ＲＵｾ･ＳａｇＬｎｯｲｭ｡ｬ｟ｂｬ I ｋ･ｩｴｨｬｲｩｊ｟ｾｾｎｏ 'I

6.4 CALIBRATION

Calibrationshouldbeperformedevery12months,or if theperformanceverificationproceduresin Section4showthattheModel 196is out of specification.If anyof thecalibra-tion proceduresin this sectioncannotbe performedpro-perly, refer to thetroubleshootinginformationin this sec-tion. 1£ theproblempersists,contactyourKeithleyrepresen-tative or the factory for further information.

NOTECheckthattheinstrumentis setto theproperlinefrequencybeforeproceedingwith calibration.

Theentirecalibrationproceduremaybeperformedwithouthavingto makeanyinternaladjustmentsifhigh frequency(70kHz)hasbeenverified, asexplainedin paragraph6.4.10,step5. Calibrationcanbeperformedfrom thefront panel(Program36) or over the IEEE-488bus.

NOTEA "CONFLICT" error will be displayed,and theCONFUCTerrorbit in theU1 statusword will besetwhentrying to calibratethe instrumentwhileit is in an improper state (Le. dB). Also, if-an"UNCAl:' error occurs,be sureto checkthe linefrequencysettingbeforeperformingcalibration.

6.4.1 Recommended Calibration Equipment

Table6-4lists recommendedcalibrationequipment.Alter-nateequipmentmaybeusedaslongasequipmentaccuracyis at leastasgoodasthe specificationslisted in the table.

Table 6-4. Recommended Calibration EqUipment

... "," . - -'. ., -,. ,. ... " '" ".

MfJ>; Model Description _._- SpecificationsFluke 5440A DC VoltageCalibrator 3OOmV, 3Y, 3oY; 300V ranges±15ppmFluke 5200A AC Voltage Calibrator 300mY, 3V, 30V ranges;20Hz ±0.1%;

50Hz-20kHz0.02%; 100kHz ±0.33%Fluke 5215A AC PowerAmplifier 300V range;20Hz ±O.12%; 50Hz-20kHz

±0.04%; 100kHz ±0.1%Fluke 5450A ResistanceCalibrator 300ll-3MO ranges;±15ppm; 30MO

±32ppm; 300MO ±225ppmValhalla 2500E CurrentCalibrator 300pA-3Aranges±0.025%

6-2


6.4.2 Environmental Conditions

Calibrationshouldbeperformedunderlaboratorycondi-tions havinganambienttemperatureof 23°C ±loC andarelative humidity of lessthan 70%.

6.4.3 Warm-Up Period

Tumon theinstrumentpowerandallow it to warmupforat least two hoursbeforebeginningthe calibrationpro-cedure.If the instrumenthasbeensubjectedto extremesof temperatureor humidity, allow at leastoneadditionalhour for the instrumentto stabilizebeforebeginningthecalibrationprocedure.

6.4.4 CAL ENABLE Switch

A switch, accessiblefrom the front panel, disablesorenablesfront panelandIEEE-488buscalibration.Whentheswitch is in theDISABLE position, calibrationcannotbeperformed.Thefollowing messagewill bebriefly displayedwhenattemptingto enterthecahbrationprogramwhile theswitch is disabled:

CAL LOCKED

Calibrationcanonly beaccomplishedwith thecalibrationswitch in the ENABLE position.

The switch operatesin the samemanneras the powerswitch andis accessedfrom the front panelwith a smallbladedscrewdriver.In the "out" position, calibration isdisabledand in the "in" position, calibrationis enabled.

6.4.5 Front Panel Calibration

Thefollowing informationprovidesthebasicprocedureforcalibratingtheinstrumentfrom thefront panel.A detailedcalibrationprocedureis locatedin paragraph6.4.Z

1. Placethe calibrationswitch to the ENABLE positionto enablecalibration.Theswitch is accessedfrom thefront panelof the instrument.

2. Selectthe function and rangeto be calibrated(DeY,AeY, 0, DCA or ACA)'

3. Selectthe front panelcalibrationprogramasfollows:A. PressthePRGMbutton.Thefollowing messagewill

be displayed:

PROGRAM?

MAINTENANCE

B. EnterProgram36 by pressingthe3 and6 buttons.The following messagewill be displayedbriefly:

CAL=

C.The default-calibrationpoint, which is a high endreadingfor theselectedrangeandfunction,will nowbe displayed.For-example,if the 3V DC rangewasselectedin step2, thefollowing calibrationpoint willbe displayed:

3.000000VDC

4. If a differentcalibrationpoint is to beused,enterthenew valueusingthe databuttons(0 through9). Eachpressof a databuttondisplaysthenumberat thecur-sorlocation(identifiedby thebright flashingdigit), andmovesthecursorto thenext'digit.If thecursoris movedpasttheleastsignificant-digit,it-will movebackto themost-significantdigit.

5. Connectthe calibrationsignal to the instrument.6. Pressthe ENTERbutton.The following messagewill

be displayedfor severalseconds:

WORKING

Z The low endcalibrationpoint will now be displayed.Forthe3VDCrange,thefollowing calibrationpointwillbe displayed:

0.000000VDC

Note: Calibrationcanbe abortedwith eitherthe firstor secondcalibrationpointpromptdisplayedby press-ing the PRGM button. The instrumentwill leavethecalibration program without changingthe previouscalibrationconstants.

8. If acalibrationpoint otherthantheonedisplayedis to'beused,thenchangethe displayto the desiredvalueas explainedin step4.

9. Setthe level of thecalibrationsignalto agreewith thedisplayedcalibrationpoint:-

10. Pressthe ENTERbutton.The following messagewillbe displayedfor severalseconds:

WORKING

11. Thetwo calibrationpointswill bestoredin PPROMandthe instrumentwill now exit thecalibrationprogram.Selectthenextrangeandfunctionto becalibratedandrepeatsteps3 through10.

NOTE: If the calibrationsourcehasan ｯｦｦｳ･ｴ set thecalibrationpointsto agreewith theactualoutputof thesource.For example,if thesourcehasa l/LV DC offseton the 300mVDC range,setthecalibrationpointsfor3oo.oolOmVand Ooo.OOlOmV.

6-3


HP·85ProgrammingExample-Thefollowing simplepro-gramdemonstrateshowto calibratetheModel1% overthebus.Theprogramassumesthatthe instrument'sprimaryaddressis at7.

.Th run theprogram,presstheHP-85RUN key. At thefirstsetof prompts,applya full range(or nearfull range)cahbra-tion signal to the instrument,type in the correspondingcalibrationcommandandpressthe returnkey. Thecom-puterCRT will thendisplay the calibrationvalue. At thesecondsetof prompts,applyazero(or nearzero)cahbra-tion signal to-the ｩｮｳｴｲｵｄｬｾｮｴ type in the correspondingcalibrationcommandandpressthe returnkey. Thecom-puter will display the calibration value and store bothcalibrationconstantsinto E'PROM.

MAINTENANCE

6.4.6 IEEE-488 Bus Calibration

IEEE-488buscalibrationis performedin a mannersimilarto front panelcalibration,exceptthatcalibrationconstantsaretransmittedoverthebusinsteadof beingenteredfromthefront panel.By combiningappropriateIEEE-488com-patiblecahbrationequipmentwith asuitabletestprogram,calibrationof the Model 196 could be performedon anautomatedbasis.Referto Section3 for completeinforma-tiononusingtheIEEE-488bus.Thefollowing informationprovidesthebasicprocedurefor calibratingtheinstrumentovertheIEEE-488bus.Thedetalledcalibrationprocedurestartswith paragraph6.4.7.

Use the following basicprocedurewhen calibrating theModel 196 over the IEEE-488bus:

1. Placethecahbrationswitchto theENABLE position.Theswitchis accessedfrom thefront panelof theModel196.

2. Programthe desiredrangeand function over the bus.For example,to selectthe300V DC range,sendFOR4X.

3. Thehighendof therangeis calibratedfirst. Apply a fullrange(or nearfull range)calibrationsignalto theinputof the instrument.For example,for the300VDC range,apply 300v DC to the instrument. .

4. Sendthe requiredcalibrationvalueprecededby the Vcommandletterandfollowedby theCOcalibrationcom-mand.Forexampleto calibratethe300vDCrangeatthe300V calibrationpoint, sendV300xCOX.

NarE: Calibrationcanbe abortedat this time by sen-dinganSDCorDCL con:unandoverthebtis.Thecalibra-tion constantsentin step4will notbestoredin E'PROM.

PROGRAM

10 REMOTE 70720 FOR 1=0 TO 130 DISP , , APPLY CAll

BRATION SIGfJAL' ,40 D1SP , 'ENTER CAll

BRATIONCOMMAND' ,

50 INPUT A$

60 OUTPUT 707; A$

70 ENTER 707; B$80 DISP B$90 NEXT I

100 END

COMMENTS

Sendremoteenable.Setprogramfor oneloop.Prompt·for calibrationsignal.Promptfor command.

Input commandstring fromkeyboard.Sendcommandstring to196.Get a reading.Display reading.Loop backone time.

5. Thelow endof therangeis calibratednext.Apply azero(or nearzero) cahbrationsignal to the input of the in-strument.Forexample,for the300V DCrangeapplyOVto the instrument.

6. Sendtheappropriatecalibrationcommandsfor thesec-ondcalibrationpoint. For example,to calibratethezerocalibrationpoint of the 300V DC rangesendVOXClX.Note that C1 is usedfor the secondcalibrationpoint.

7. Storageof the two calibration points into E'PROMautomaticallyoccurswhenthe secondcalibrationcom-mandis sent.

8. Repeatsteps1-7for theremainingrangesandfunctions.

6-4

6.4.7 Calibration Sequence

Cahbratethe Model 196 in the order presentedin thefollowing paragraphs.The basicsequenceis:

1. DC Volts calibration2. Ohmscalibration3. AC Volts calibration4. DC Currentcalibration5. AC Current-calibration


6.4.8 DC Volts Calibration

To calibratethe DCV function, proceedasfollows:

NOTEForfront FaneLcalibratioo,_o_mil_step4of thefollow-ing procedure.For IEEE-488buscalibration,omitstep3.

LSelectthe DCV function and the 300mV range.2. ConnecttheDC calibratorto the instrumentas-shown

in Figure6-1.

NOTELow levelmeasurementtechniquesshouldbeusedwhen calibrating the 300mV DC range.Refer to-paragraph2.6.5 for low level measurementcon-siderations.

3. For front panelcalibration,selectProgram36 andpro-ceedas follows:A. With the 300.0oo0mVDC calibrationpoint displayed

on the Model 196, set the DC calibrator to output+0.30oo000v.

B. After allowingsufficienttimefor thecalibratorvoltageto settle, pressthe ENTER button. The followingmessagewill be displayedfor severalseconds:

WORKING

C. With the Ooo.OOOOmVDC calibrationpoint displayed,set the DC calibratorto outputO.ooOOOOOV.

D. After allowingsufficienttimefor thecalIbratorvoltageto settle, pressthe ENTER button. The followingmessagewill be displayedfor severalseconds:

WORKING

MAINTENANCE

E. The instrumentwill exit thecalibrationprogramandreturn to the 300mVDCrange.

F. Repeattheproceduresin step3 for theremainingDCVrangesusingTable6-5 as a guide.

4. For IEEE-488bus calibration,proceedas follows:A. SettheDC voltagecalibratorto output +0.300oo00v.B. After allowingsufficienttimefor thecalIbratorvoltage

to settle,sendthefollowing commandsoverthebus:V300E-3XCOX.

C. Set the DC voltagecalibratorto outputO.OOooooOV.D. After allowing sufficienttimefor thecalibratorvoltage

tosettle,sendthefollowing commandover thebus:VOXClX. Both calibration constants will beautomaticallystoredin EZPROM.

E. RepeatstepsA throughD for the remainingDCVrangesusingTable6-5 as a guide.

= HII I. DC VOLTAGEI.....100I

DIVIDER CALIBRATORQQQDc- OUTPUT

HODEL 5+401.HODEL 19& LD

Figure 6-1. DC Volts Calibration Configuration(300mV and 3V Ranges)

= HII _J. DC VOLTAGEI••• • Ｎｉｄ

I OUTPUT CALIBRATORQQQD 0

MODEL 5+401.MODEL 19& LO

Figure 6-2. DC Volts Calibration Configuration(30V-300V Ranges)

Table 6-5. DC Volts Calibration

196 DCV 196 Calibration DC Calibrator IEEE-488ｾ Set-Up Point (DCY) ｓ･ｴｴｩｮ Bus Command300mV Figure6-1 3OO.o000mV .30oo000v V3ooE-3XCOX

ooO.oooOmv .00000OOV VOXClX3 V Figure6-1 3.000000 V 3.000000v V3XCOX

0.00000o V O.OOOOOOV VOXClX30 V Figure6-2 30.00000 V 30.oo000v V3OXCOX

00.00000 V OO.oooOOV VOXClX300 V Figure 6-2 300.0000 V 300.oo00v V30OXCOX

000.0000-V OOO.OOOOV VOXClX" - _..

6-5


MAINTENANCE

6.4.9 Resistance Calibration

To calibratethe ohms(0) function, proceedasfollows:

NOTEForfront panelcalibration,omitstep4 of thefollow-ing procedure.For IEEE-488buscalibration,omitstep 3.

1. Selectthe ohmsfunction andthe 3000range.2. Connectthe resistancecalibratorto the instrumentas

shownin Figure6-3.3. Forfront panelcalibration,enterProgram36; andpro-

ceedasfollows:A. With the190.00000calibrationpoint displayedon the

Model 196, set the resistancecalibratorto 1900.B. After allowing sufficient time for the calibrator

resistanceto settle, pressthe ENfER button. Thefollowing messagewill be displayed for severalseconds:

WORKING

C.With the000.00000calibrationpointdisplayed,settheresistancecalibrator to SHORT(00). .

D. After waifuig sufficient time for the calibratorresistanceto settle, pressthe ENTER button. Thefollowing messagewill be displayed for severalseconds:

WORKING

E. The instrumentwill exit thecalibrationprogramandreturn to the 3000range.

F. Repeatthe proceduresin step 3 for the remainingohmsrangesusingThble 6-6 as a guide.

4. For IEEE-488buscalibration,proceedas follows:A. Set the resistancecalibratorto 1900.B. After allowing sufficient time for the resistance

calibratorto settle,sendthefollowing commandsoverthe bus: V19OXCOX. . .

C. Setthe resistancecalibrator to SHORT(00).D. After allowing sufficient-time for the resistance

calibratorto settle,sendthefollowing commandoverthe bus: VDXClX. Both calibrationconstantswill be:automaticallystoredin PPROM.

E. RepeatstepsA throughD for fue remainingohmsrangesusingTable6-6 as a guide.

OUTPUT HI= II I SENSE HII.....10 RESISTANCE

QG:U;:::;]O ｾｾ CALIBRATOR

MODEL 19& SENSE LO MODEL 5450A

OUTPUT LO

Figure 6-3. Four-Wire Resistance CalibrationConfiguration (300l"l-30kl"l Ranges)

Table 6-6. Resistance Calibration

.. ｾｾ

Resistance196 Calibration Calibrator IEEE-488

196 Range Set-Up Point Setting Bus Commands300 0 Figure6-3 190.0000 0 1900 V190CXOX

000.0000 0 Short (00) VOXClX3kn Figure6-3 1.900000kn 1.9kO V1.9E3XCOX

0.000000kO Short (On) VOXClX30 kO Figure 6-3· 19.00000kO 19kO V19E3XCOX

00.00000kO Short (00) . VOXClX300 kO Figure6-4 190.0000kO 190kO VI90E3XCOX

000.0000kO Short (00) VOXClX3MO Figure6-4 1.900000MO 1.9MO V1.9E6XCOX

O.oooOOOMO Short (00) VOXClX30MO Figure6-4 19.00000MO 19Mn VI9E6XCOX

OO.OOOOOMO Short (on) VOXClX300Mn Figure 6-4 100.000MO 100MO V100E6XCOX

OOO.OOOMO Short (00) VOXClX

6-6


MAINTENANCE

= f\I II... · .10- OUTPUT HI

G!QG::;]O • ....SHIELDED

HODEL 196 CABLE

4:;- - -...,

!: RESI STANCE ICALIBRATOR

I HODEL 5+50AIOUTPUT LO ___-1

Figure 6-4. Two-Wire Resistance CalibrationConfiguration (300k!l-300MflRanges)

6.4.10 TRMS AC Volts Calibration

A full calIbrationof theACV function includestwo inter-nal, manualadjustments.However, if high frequencyischeckedandfoundtobewithin thespecifications,thentheinternal adjustmentson the 30VAC and 300VAC will nothaveto be done.Thefollowing procedureincludesthesechecks.Theflowchartin Figure6-5helpsclarify thecalibra-tion procedure.

NOTEForfront panelcalibration,omit step4of thefollow-ing procedure.For IEEE-488buscalibration,omitstep3.

1. Selectthe ACV function and the 300mV range.2. Connectthe AC calibratoras shownin Figure6-6.

3. For front panelcalibration,selectProgram36 andpro---ceedasfollows:

A. With the 300.0oomVAC calibrationpoint displayedon the Model 196, set the AC calibrator to output3oo.000mVat 500Hz.

B. After allowingsufficienttimefor thecalIbratorvoltageto settie, pressthe ENTER button. The followingmessagewill be displayedfor severalseconds.

WORKING

C. With the 030.000mVAC calibrationpOint displayed,set the AC calibratorto output30.0oomVat 500Hz.

D. After allowing the calibratorvoltageto settle,pressthe ENTER button. The following messagewill bedisplayedfor severalseconds:

WORKING

E. Theinstrumentwill exit thecalibrationprogramandreturn to the 3GOmV AC range.

F. Repeatthe proceduresin step3 for the remalningACV rangesusingTable 6-7 as a guide.

4. For IEEE-488buscalibration,proceedasfollows:A. Setthe AC voltagecalibratorto output300.000mVat

500Hz. .Bo-After allowingsufficienttime fcir thecalibratorvoltage

tosettie,sendthefollowing commandsoverthebus:WOOE-3XaX. .

C. Set the AC calibratorto output30.000mVat 500Hz.D. After allowingsufficienttime for thecalibratorvoltage

to settle,sendthefollowing commandoverthebus:V30E-3XClX. Both calibration constants willautomaticallybe storedin E'PROM.

E. RepeatstepsA through D for the remalningACVrangesusing.Table 6-7 as a guide.

Table 6-7. TRMS AC Volts Calibration

196 ACV 196 Calibration AC CalibratorVoltage IEEE-488Range Point Setting@ 500Hz Bus Commands300mV 300.000mV 300.000mV WOOE-3XCOX

030.000mV 30.000mV WOE-3XClX3 V 3.00000 V 3.00000 V WXCOX

0.30000 V .300000 V WOOE-3XClX30 V 30.0000 V 30.0000 V WOXCOX

3.0000 V 3.00000 V V3XClX300 V 300.000 V 300.000 V WOOXCOX

30.000. V 30.0000 V WOXClX

6-7


MAINTENANCE

5. High FrequencyCheck(70kHz):A. With the ACV function, autorangeand51f2d resolu-

tion selected,connecttheAC calibratorto the ｩｮｳｴｲｵ

mentas shownin Figure 6-6.B. SettheAC calIbratorto output1OO.000vata frequency

of 70kHzandallow sufficienttime for the measure-ment to settle.

C. If thereadingis not1OO.000v±1500counts,thenomitstepsD throughE andproceedto step6.

D. SettheAC calibratorto output1O.0000vat 70kHzandallow the measurementto settle.

E. If thereadingis not lO.OOOOV ±1500counts,thenhighfrequencywill haveto beadjustedas explainedin thefollowing procedure(step6). If the high frequencyreadingswerewithin the definedrange,step6 doesnot have to be performedand ACV calibration iscompleted.

6. High FrequencyAdjustment:A. Remove the top cover to gain access to the

｡､ｪｵｳｴｭ･ｮｴｳ

B. With theACV functionandS'l/2dresolutionselected,connecttheAC calibratorto theinstrumentasshownin Figure6-6. .----

C.SettheModel 196to the300Vrangeandsetthe AC-calibratorto output1OO.000vat-afrequencyof 70kHz.

WARNINGSome procedures require, the use of highvoltage. Take care to prevent contact with livecircuits which could cause electrical shockresulting In injury or death. The shield on theanalog board Is at Input low potential and mayhave up to 500V on it. Use an insulated align-ment tool to make the following adjustments.

D. After allowing sufficient time for the measurementto settle,useaninsulatedalignmenttool to adjustC49(seeFigure6-7) for a displayreadingof 1OO.000v±250counts.

E. Set the Model 196to the30V rangeandset the ACcalibratorto output1O.OOOOVat 70kHz.

F. After allowing themeasurementto settle,adjustC48for a display readingof 1O.0000v±250 counts.

G. RepeatstepsC throughF until no otheradjustmentsneedto be made.

H. Put the top coverbackon.

6-8

PERFORM FRONTPANEL OR IEEECAll BRATI ON.STEP 3 OR ...

CHECK HIGHFRECUENCY

(100KHz). STEP 5

ADJUST TRIMCAPACITORS

STEP 6

Figure 6-5. Flowchart of AC Volts CalibrationProcedure

0:::::::::1

I II..•• .10ｧｇｊｇ］ｾｊｉ［ＺＺＺＺ［ＺＺＺＺ［ｾ

HODEL 196

I HI POWER T AC VOLTAGEAMPLIFIER ICALU:lRATOR

LO MODEL 5215A I MODEL. 5200A

Figure 6-6. TRMS AC Volts CalibrationConfiguration


MAINTENANCE

ANALOG BOARD SHIELD

300VAC RANGEHIGH FREQUENCY ADJUST

30VAC RANGEHIGH FREQUENCY ａｄｊｕｓｔｾＭＭｯｾｾ

ANALOG BOARD

Figure 6-7. TRMS AC Volts High Frequency Calibration Adjustments (30V & 300V Ranges)

6.4.11 DC Current Calibration

Performthe following procedureto calibrate-DCA:

NOTEForfront panelcalibration,omit step4 of thefollow-ing procedure.For IEEE-488 buscalibration,omitstep3.

1. Selectthe DCA function andthe 300pA range.2. ConnecttheDC current-calibratorto the instrumentas

shownin Figure ＶｾＸ

3. For front panelcalIbration,enterProgram36 andpro-ceedas follows:A. With the3OO.000pADC calibrationpoint displayedon

the Model 196, set the currentcalibratorto output+300.000pA. ' -

B. After allowing sufficient time for them.easurementto settle, pressthe ENTER button. The followingmessagewill be displayedfor severalseconds:

WORKING

C. With the OOO.OOOpADC calIbrationpoint displayed,set the currentcalibratorto outputOOO.OOOpA.

D.. After allowing sufficient time for the measurementto settle, press the ENTER ｢ｵｴｴｯｮ The followingmessagewill be displayedfor sevdalseconds:

WORKING

E. Theinstrumentwill exit thecalibratiotrprogramandreturn to the 300fLA, range.

F. Repeatthe proceduresin step3 for the remainingDCA rangesusingTable6-8 as a guide.

4. For IEEE-488bus calibration,proceedas follows:A. Setthe currentcalIbrator to output300.000fLA,.B. After allowing sufficient time for the calibratorcur-

rentto settle;sendthe following commandover thebus: V300E-6XCOX.

C. Setｴｨ currentcalibrator to outputOOO.OOOpA.D. After allowing sufficient-time for the calibratorcur-

rent to settle,sendthefollowing commandoverthebus: VOXClX. Both calibration constants willautomaticallybe storedin EZPROM.

E. RepeatstepsA throughD for the remainingDCArangesusingThble 6-8 as a guide.


MAINTENANCE

Table 6-8. DC Current Calibration

196 DCA 196 Calibration DC Current IEEE488Range Point CalibratorOutput Bus Commands300flA 300.000pA 300.000"A V300E-6XCOX

000.000pA 000.000"A VOXClX3mA 3.00000mA 3.00000mA V3E-3XCOX

O.OOOOOmA O.OOOOOmA VOXClX30mA 30.0000mA 30.0000mA V30E-3XCOX

OO.OOOOmA OO.OOOOmA VOXClX300mA 300.000mA 300.000mA V3ooE-3XCOX

OOO.ooOmA OOO.OOOmA VOXClX3 A 3.00000 A 3000.00mA V3XClX

0.00000 A OOOO.OOmA VOXClX

_. -

=LO OUTPUTidE·. . .. HI OUTPUT

MOOEL 19&

L CURRENT La INPUT LO DC VOLTAGECALIBRATOR CALIBRATOR

- MOOEL 2S00E HI INPUT HI MODEL SHOA

Figure 6-8. DC Current Calibration Configuration

6.4.12 TRMS AC Current Calibration

Perform the following procedureto calibrate the ACAfunction:

NOTEForfront panelcalibration,orilit step4of thefollow-ing procedure.For IEEE-488buscalibration,omitstep_3.

1. Selectthe ACA function and the 300pA range.2. ConnecttheAC currentcalibratorto the instrumentas

shownin Figure6-9.3. For front panelcalibration,enterProgram36 andpro-

ceedasfollows:A. With the300.000pAAC calibrationpointdisplayedon

the Model 196, set the currentcalibratorto output300.oo0pAat a frequencyof 500Hz. -

6-10

. --:6. After waiting sufficierit time for themeasurementtosettle, press the ENTER button. The followingmessagewill be displayedfor severalseconds:

WORKING

C. With the030.000pAAC calibrationpointdisplayed,setthe currentcalibratorto output030.oo0pAat-500Hz.

D. After allowing the measurementto settle,presstheENTER button. The following messagewill bedisplayedfor severalseconds:

WORKING

E. The instrumentwill exit thecalibrationprogramandreturn to the 300pA range.

F. Repeattheproceduresin step3for theremainingACArangesusingThble 6-9 as a guide.

4. For IEEE-488buscalibration,proceedas follows:A. Set the current calibrator to output300.0oopA at

500Hz.B. After allowing sufficient time for the calibratorcur-

rent tosettle,sendthe following commandover thebus: V300E·6XCOX.

C.Set the current calibrator to output 030.0oopA at500Hz.

D. After allowing sufficient time for the calibratorcur-rent to·settle,sendthefollowing commandover thebus: V30E-6XClX. Both calibration constantswillautomaticallybe storedin E'PROM.

E. RepeatstepsA through D for the remainingACA_rangesusingTable6·9 as a guide.

NOTEAfter completingthe calibrationprocedure,placethecalibrationswitchin thedisable(out) position.Also, it is a goodideato placea datedcalibrationstickerQver the switch accesshole.


MAINTENANCE

Table 6-9. TRMS AC Current Calibration

- -_.- ..•__.-196 ACA 196 Calibration CurrentCalibrator IEEE-488Range Point [email protected] Bus Commands300pA 300.000pA 300.000I'A V300E-6XCOX

03O.0001'A 030.000pA V30E-6XClX3mA 3.00oo0mA 3.00000mA V3E-3XCOX

0.30000mA. 0.30000mA V300E-6XClX30mA 30.0000mA 3O.0000mA V30E-3XCOX

03.0000mA 03.0000mA V3E-3XClX300mA 300.000mA 300.000mA V300E-3XCOX

03O.000mA 030.ooomA V30E-3XClX3 A 3.00000 A 300o.oomA V3XCOX

0.30000 A 0300.oomA V300E-3XClX

= - -----

I I 00 LO OUTPUTI.....10 0

gGJr;:;]O HI OUTPUTMODEL 196

- ------_.-

L CURRENT La INPUT La AC VOLTAGECALIBRATOR CALIBRATOR

'""- MODEL 2500E HI INPUT HI MODEL 5200A

Figure 6-9. AC Current Calibration Configuration

6.5 DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

If it is necessaryto removeor replacea component,usethefollowing procedureandrefer to Figures6-10and6-11to disassembletheModel 196. Note that eachstepoUheprocedureis dependentuponperformingthe stepbeforeit. To reassemblethe instrument,reversethe proceduralsteps.

WARNINGTo prevent a shock hazard, always turn the in-strument off and disconnect the line cord andall other instrumentation from the unit beforeremoving the top cover.

1. Top coverremoval:A. Removethe top two retainingscrewslocatedat the

rear of the instrument.B. Graspingthetop coverat therear,carefullylift it off

of the instrument;

Note: When installing the top cover make sure thatthethreetabsatthefront of thecoverengagein thefrontpanelassembly.Also makesurethat the groundclipsat the rear of the instrumentmakecontactto the topcovershield.

2. Analog boardremoval:A. Remove the two screwssecuringthe shield and

analogboardto the mountingplate.B. Carefully lift the shieldoff the analogboard.C. Disconnectthe front andrearpanelinput terminal

wires Ol-JlO) at the analogboard.D. Unplugtheconnector017) thatconnectstheanalog

boardto themotherboard.This connectoris locatedat the front of the analogboard.

E. Carefullylift the analogboardoff of themountingplate.

3. Analog boardmountingplate removal:A. Removethefour screwssecuringthemountingplate

to the case.B. Carefully lift the mounting plate off the four

standoffs.4. Motherboardremoval:

A. Pull out the four standoffs used to support theanalogboardassembly.

B. Removethetwo screwsattherearpanelthatsecurethe rear panelto the case.

C. IYIsconnecttheribboncablethatconnectsthedisplayboardto the motherboard.

D. Graspthe rear paneland the motherboard, andgentlylift themotherboardup andoutof thecase.

Note:Wheninstallingthemotherboard,makesurethe ground clips make contact with the bottomshield, and the display ribbon cable is properlymatedto the motherboardconnector.

5. Display boardremoval:

6-11


MA.INTENA.NCE

A. Removethe two screwsthat securethe front panelassemblyto thecase.Thesescrewsarelocatednearthe boltom edgeof the displayPCboard.

B. Slidethefront panelassemblyup andoutof thecase.C..Removethetwo screwsthatsecurethedisplayboard

to the front panel.D. Separatethe displayboardfrom the front panel.

Note:Wheninstalling thefront panelassemblyin thecase,makesurethe boltom edgeof thedisplayPCboardis positionedbetweenthe cardguidesat theboltom of the case.

J7 •••• J8J6J9

•JIO

CONNECTOR WIRENO. COLOR

JI GREENJ2 REOJ3 BLACKｊ GREY ANALOG BOARD

J5 WHITEJ6 GREENJ7 REOJB WHITEJ9 BUCK

JIO GREY

ｊｾｊ J2 JIJ5- •• • •

JI7

10000000'..

Figure 6·10 Analog Board Connectors

6·12

6.6 SPECIAL HANDLING OF STATIC·SENSITIVE DEVICES

CMOS devicesoperateat very high impedancelevelsforlow powerconsumption.As aresult,anystaticchargethatbuildsup onyourpersonor clothingmaybesufficient todestroythesedevices,if they are not handledproperly.Static-sensitivedevicesareflaggedin thereplaceablepartslists in Section7. Whenhandlingthesedevices,use thefollowing precautionsto avoid damagingthem.

1. Thedeviceslistedin thereplaceablepartslist shouldbetransportedand handledonly in containersspeciallydesignedto preventstaticbuild-Up.Typically, thesepartswill bereceivedin anti-staticcontainersof plasticor foam.Keep thesedevicesin theiroriginalcontainersuntil readyfor installation.

2. Removethedevicesfrom theirprotectivecontainersonlyat a properly groundedwork station. Also groundyourselfwith a suitablewrist strap.

3. Handlethedevicesonly by thebody; do not touchthepins.

4. Any printedcircuit boardinto which thedeviceis to beinsertedmustalsobe groundedto the benchor table.

5. Useonly anti-statictype soldersuckers.6. Use only groundedtip solderirons.7. Oncethe deviceis installedon thePCboard,it is nor-

mally adequatelyprotectedand normal handlingcanresume.

6.7 TROUBLESHOOTING

Thetroubleshootinginformationcontainedin this sectionis intendedfor useby qualified personnelhavinga basicunderstandingof analog and digital circuitry. The in-dividual shouldalsobe experiencedat usingtypical testequipmentaswell asordinarytroubleshootingprocedures.Theinformationpresentedherehasbeenwrilten to assistin isolatinga defectivecircuit or circuit section.Isolationof thespecificcomponentis left to thetechnician.Notethatschematicdiagramsand componentlocation drawings,which areanessentialaid in troubleshooting,arelocatedat the end of Section7.


u

Figure 6-11. Model 196 Exploded View

MAINTENANCE

ANALOG BOARD

STANDOFFS(f)

MOTHER BOARD


MAINTENANCE

6.7.1 Recommended Test Equipment

Successin troubleshootingcomplexequipmentlike theModel1%dependsnotonly ontheskill of thetechnician,but relieson the useof accurate,reliabletestequipment.Table6-10 lists the equipmentrecommendedfor trouble-shootingthe Model 196. Otherequipmentsuchas logicanalyzersand capacitancemeterscould also be helpful,especiallyin difficult situations. ｾｾ -

6.7.2 Power Up Self Test

Uponpowerup, theinstrumentwill do a numberof testson itself. Testsareperformedonmemory(ROM, RAM andE'PROM).Wheneveroneof thememorytestsfails, thein-strumentwill lock upandmustberepaired.If all thetestspass,thenthecurrentIEEE addressandsoftwarerevisionlevelof theinstrumentwill be displayed.ImmediatelyafterturningontheModel196,thefollowing sequencewill takeplace:

1. A digital checkwill beperformedon theROM circuitry.If the test fails, the instrumentwill lock up with thefollowing messagedisplayed:

0000000000

ReplacingU105 and U106 may resolvethe problem.2. If theROM testpasses,adigital self-testwill thenbeper·

formedon theRAM circuitry. If theRAM testfails, theinstrumentwill lock upwith thefollowing errormessagedisplayed:

AAAAAAAAAA

ReplacingU107 may resolvethe problem.

3. Finally, theE'PROMcircuitry wherethecalibrationcon-stants, IEEE addressand line frequency settingsarestoredwill be checked.If this test fails, the followingmessagedisplayed:

UNCAL

Pressinganyfront panelmomentarybuttonwill returnｾ theinstrumentto normaloperationhowever,acompletecalibrationwill haveto beperformed,andthe IEEE ad-dressandline frequencysettingshouldbe checked.Ifthe test still fails after calibration, try replacingU10Sbeforerecahbratingthe instrumentagain.

4.The instrumentwill then go to the powerup defaultfunction.

6.7.3 Program 33 • Self Diagnostic Program

This front paneiprogramperformsa displaytest-andthesamememorytestsperformeduponpowerup. Also in-cludedis a troubleshootingtestmode,that is designedtoswitchonvariousswitchingFETsandrelaysto allow signaltracingthroughtheinstrument.Performthefollowing pro-cedureto utilize Program33:

1. Pressthe PRGMbuttonandthenthe 3 and3 buttons.First is the-display test. Segmentsof the displaycharacterswill be sequentiallydisplayedfor a shortperiodof time.Thefront panelLEDswill alsobeondur-ing this test. This test allows the operatorto note in-operativedisplay segmentsor LEDs. Self test-on theROM, RAM, andE'PROMwill thenbeperformed.Thesearethe sametestsrun on powerup andareexplainedin detail in paragraph6.7.2.

Table 6-10. Recommended TroUbleshooting Equipment

Equipment UseFive function DMM with 0.1% basicDCV accuracy,10M Powersupply andDC voltagechecks;input impedance analogsignal tracingcontinuity, logic

levels.

Dual-trace,triggeredsweeposcilloscope,DC t050MHz Digital andanalogwaveformchecks.

Digital frequencycounter Checkingclock frequencies.

6-14


2. The Model 196 will now go into the trouoleshootingmodewith thefirst N modebeingdisplayedasfollows:

NOI

The instrumentis still on thesamefunction andrangeas it was beforeProgram33 was run.

3. UsingTable6-11, referencethe N modeto the currentfunction and range to determinethe properworkingstatusof the listed circuit components.

4. To changethe N mode, usethe ENTER button.5.Xo troubleshoot-adifferent function andlor range;exit

theprogramby pressinganyfront panelmomentarybut-ton (exceptENTER), selectthedesiredfunction and/orrangeandagainrun Program33.

MAINTENANCE

6.7.4 Power Supplies

Table6-12 showsthe variouschecksthat can be madetothepowersuppliesof theModel196.In additionto thenor-mal voltagechecks,it is a goodideato checkthe varioussupplies with an oscilloscope for signs of noise oroscillations.

6.7.5 Signal Conditioning Checks

Thesecircuitscanbecheckedby usingthediagnosticpro-gram(Program33) as explainedin the paragraph6.7.3.

6.7.6 Digital and Display Circuitry Checks

Thedigital anddisplaycircuitry canbecheckedoutby us-ing thetroubleshootingdatafound in Tables6-13and6-14.

Table 6-11. Model 196 Troubleshooting Mode

Function Input& Measurement Buffer Relays RangeSwitches Multiplex

RanJ;:e Phase NMode Gain Closed Closed SwitchesClosed

300mV OC SIG ZERO 01 XIO Kl Q1.1, U22A Q34CAL ZERO 02 Xl Kl Q11, U22A U250, Q32

CAL 03 Xl Kl Q11, U22A U25C, Q32SrG 04 XIO Kl Q11, U22A Q30

3VDC SrG ZERO 01 Xl Kl Q11, U22A Q34CAL ZERO 02 Xl Kl Q11, U22A U25D,_Q32

CAL 03 Xl Kl Q11, U22A U25C, Q32SrG 04 Xl Kl Q11, U22A Q30

30V OC SrG ZERO 01 Xl - Q13, Q11,U22A Q33CAL ZERO 02 Xl - Q13, Qll, U22A U250, Q32

CAL 03 Xl - Q13, Q11,U22A U25C, Q32SrG 04 Xl - Q13, Qll, U22A Q35

300v DC SrG ZERO 01 Xl - Q3, Q11, U22A Q34CAL ZERO 02 Xl - Q3, Q11, U22A U250, Q32

CAL 03 Xl - Q3, Q11, U22A U25C, Q32SrG 04 Xl - Q3, Q11, U22A Q35

300mV AC ZERO 01 Xl K4, K5 U21A, U21B U250, Q32CAL 02 Xl K4, K5 U21A, U21B U25C, Q32SrG 03 Xl K4, K5 U21A, U21B U24C, Q32

No Test 04 - - - -

3V AC ZERO 01 Xl K4, K5 U2lC. U25D, Q32CAL 02 Xl K4, K5 U2lC U25C, Q32SrG 03 Xl K4, K5 U21C U24C, Q32

No Test 04 - - - -

6-15


MAINTENANCE

Table 6-11. Model 196 Troubleshooting Mode (Cont.)

. -. .. .-- ｾ

Function Input& Measurement Buffer Relays RangeSwitches Multiplex

Ranj1;e Phase N Mode Gain Closed Oosed SwitchesOosed

30Y AC ZERO 01 Xl K4 U23B U25D, Q32CAL 02 Xl K4 U23B U25C, Q32SIG 03 . Xl K4 U23B U24C, Q32

No Test 04 - - - -300v AC ZERO 01 Xl K4 U23C, U23B U25D, Q32

CAL 02 Xl K4 U23C, U23B U25C, Q32SIG 03 Xl K4 U23C, U23B U24C, Q32

No Test 04 -- - - -

3000 SENSE10 01 X10 K2,K3 Qll, U22D, ｕＲＴｄ U22B, Q32REF HI 02 Xl K2,K3 Qll, U22D, U24D Q35, Q12REF 10 03 Xl K2,K3 Qll, U22Dr U24D U25A, Q32

SENSEHI 04 XlO K2,K3 Qll, U22D, U24D Q30

3k SENSE10 01 Xl K2,K3 Qll, U22D, U24D U22B, Q32REF HI 02 Xl K2,K3 Qll,U22D, U24D Q35,Q12REF10 03 Xl K2,K3 Qll, U22D, U24D U25A, Q32

SENSEHI 04 Xl K2,K3 Qll, U22D, U24D Q30.

30k SENSE10 01 Xl K2,K3 Qll, U22C, U24A U22B, Q32REF HI 02 Xl K2,K3 Qll, U22C, U24A Q35, Q12REFLO 03 Xl K2,K3 Qll, U22C, U24A U25A, Q32

SENSEHI 04 Xl K2,K3 Qll, U22C, U24A Q30

300K SENSE10 01 Xl K2,K3 Q12, Q3, U22c, U24A U22B, Q32REF HI 02 Xl K2,K3 Q12, Q3, U22C, U24A Q35REF 10 03 Xl K2,K3 Q12, Q3, U22C, U24A Q34

SENSEHI 04 Xl K2,K3 Q12, Q3, U22C, U24A Q30

3M SENSE10 01 Xl K2,K3 Q12, Q13, U22C, U24A U22B, Q32REF HI 02 Xl K2,K3 Q12, Q13, U22C, U24A Q35REF10 03 Xl K2,K3 Q12, Q13, U22C, U24A Q34

SENSEHI 04 Xl K2,K3 Q12, Q13, U22C, U24A Q30

30M SENSE10 01 Xl K2 Q12, U22C, U24A U22B, Q32REF HI 02 Xl K2 Q12, U22C, U24A Q35

SENSEHI 03 Xl K2 Q12, U22Cr U24A Q30No 'lest 04 - - - -

300M SENSE10 01 - Xl K2 Q12, U22C, U24A U22B, Q32REF HI 02 Xl K2 Q12, U22C, U24A Q35

SENSEHI 03 Xl K2 Q12, U22C, U24A Q30No Test 04 - - - -

3ooi<A DC SIG ZERO 01 X10 - U23A U25D, Q32CAL ZERO 02 Xl - U23A U25D, Q32

CAL 03 Xl - . U23A U25C, Q32SIG 04 XlO - U23A U24B, Q32

6-16


Table 6-11. Model 196 Troubleshooting Mode (Cont.)

MAINTENANCE

.Function Input

&< Measurement Buffer Relays Range Switches MultiplexRanl:e Phase NMode Gain Closed Closed SwitchesClosed

3mAOC SIG ZERO 01 X10 - Q29, Q36 U250, Q32CAL ZERO 02 Xl - Q29, Q36 U250, Q32

CAL 03 Xl - Q29, Q36 U25C, Q32SIG 04 XlO - Q29, Q36 U24B, Q32

30mA OC SIGZERO 01 XIO - Q28, Q37 U250, Q32CAL ZERO 02 Xl - Q28, Q37 U250, Q32

CAL 03 Xl - Q28, Q37 U25C, Q32SIG 04 XIO - Q28, Q37 U24B, Q32

300mA OC SIGZERO 01 XlO - Q26, Q38 U250, Q32CAL ZERO 02 Xl - Q26, Q38 U250, Q32

CAL 03 Xl - Q26, Q38 U25C, Q32SIG 04 XIO - Q26, Q38 U24B, Q32

3AOC SIG ZERO 01 XIO - Q39, Q40 U250, Q32CAL ZERO 02 Xl - Q39, Q40 U250, Q32

CAL 03 Xl - Q39, Q40 U25C, Q32SIG 04 XlO - Q39, Q40 U24B, Q32

Ｓｏｏ AC ZERO 01 Xl - U23A, U21O, U21B U250, Q32CAL 02 Xl - U23A, U21O, U2lB U25C, Q32SIG 03 Xl - U23A, U21O, U21B U24C, Q32

No Test 04 -- - - -

3mAAC ZERO 01 Xl - Q29, Q36, U21O, U2lB U250, Q32CAL 02 Xl - Q29, Q36, U21O, U2lB U25C, Q32SIG 03 Xl - Q29, Q36, U210, U21B U24C, Q32

No Test 04 - - - -

30mAAC ZERO 01 Xl - Q28, ｑＳ U21O, U218 U250, Q32CAL 02 Xl - Q28, Q37, U21O, U218 U25C, Q32SIG 03 Xl - ｑＲＸＬｑＳ U21O, U218 U24C, Q32

No Test 04 - - - -

300mA AC ZERO 01 Xl - Q26, Q38, U21O, U2lB U250, Q32CAL 02 Xl - Q26, Q38,U21O, U2lB U25C, Q32SIG 03 Xl - Q26, Q38,U21O, U218 U24C, Q32

No Test 04 - - -

3AAC ZERO 01 Xl - Q39, Q40, 0210, U218 U250, Q32CAL 02 Xl - Q39, Q40, U21O, U2lB U25C, Q32SIG 03 Xl - Q39, Q40, U21O, U2lB U24C, Q32

No Test 04 - - - - -

6-17


MAINTENANCE

Table 6·12. Power Supply Checks

-- - ._. -_. . _... - .._. -

Step Item/Component RequiredCondition Remarks1 5101 Line Switch Set to ＱＱＵ or 230V as required. Line voltageselection2 FlOl Line Fuse Checkfor ｾ continuity. Removefuse to check3 Line Power Pluggedinto live receptacle;

poweron.4 +5V Digital SupplyVRlOl, pin 3 +Sv, ±S% Referencedto digital common5 +5V Analog SupplyVRI02, pin 3 +Sv, ±S% Referenceto analogcommon6 ±15V Analog SuppliesVRI03, pin 3; +15V, -15V, ±0.75V 0 Referencedto analogcommon

VRI04, pin 3

Table 6-13. Digital Circuitry Checks

Step Item/Component RequiredCondition Remarks1 VIOS, VI06, U107, VI08 - ｾ .

PassRAM, ROM andPPROM Display will lock if failureself-teston powerup. occurs

2 U109, pin 2 (PAO) TTL level pulsesevery lmsec VIA clock3 U109, pin 3 (PAl) TIL level pulsesevery 15msec Data4 VI09, piri6.(PA4) Switch data (+5V or OV) Data input to VIA5 VI09, pin 7 (PA5) Switch data (+5V or OV) Data input to VIA6 VI09, pin 8 (PA6) Switch data (+5V or OV) Datafuput to VIA7 U109, pin 9 (PA7) Switch data (+5V or OV) Data input to VIA8 U109, pin 19 Variablepulsetrain (OV to +5V) VIA DataLine9 U120, pin 6 Variable pulsetrain (OV to +5V) Dataoutput

10 U43, pin 13 Variable pulsetrain (OV to +5V) Output-of-AID converter11 UI09, pins 12 through16 Variable pulsetrain (OV to +5V) Analog datato VIA12 U104, pin 3 1kHz pulses IRQ line13 U104, pin 37 +5V, ±5% Resetline14 U112, pin 9 +5V signalpulsedOV to +5V !NT line

every lmsec15 VI12, pin 19 +SV (Logic "1") RESETline16 Ul12, pin 18 ZMHz squarewaveat OV to +SV oock17 Ul12, pin 28 Shouldgo false (+5V) when ATN line

commandis sent18 U112, pins 28 (ATN), 24 (NDAC), Refer to FigureD-2 for required Handshakesequence

25 (NRFD), 26 (DAV), and the data conditionslines

6-18


Table 6-14. Display Circuitry Checks

MAINTENANCE

.... ..- . ", . -.,'-'

Ste]) Item/Component Required Condition Remarks1 U4 and US, pins 2, 9 and 14 +S\', ±S%. +SV supply2 Pl6, pins 6, 11 through24 Variablepulses Segmentdrivers3 Ul, pins 10 through15; Variablepulses Digital drivers

U2, pins 13 through164 US, pins 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11 and12; lmsecnegativegoing pulseevery

U4, pins 1, 3, 4, S 10msecS P16, pin 7 (50) Depress51, 52, 53, 54 or 55 button Pulsepresentwhenbutton

pressed6 P16, pin 5 (51) Depress56, 57, 58 or 59 button Pulsepresentwhenbutton

pressed7 P16, pin 3 (52) Depress510, 511, 512, 513 or 514 Pulsepresentwhenbutton

button pressed

6-19/6-20


SECTION 7REPLACEABLE PARTS

7.1 INTRODUCTION

This sectioncontainsreplacementpartsinformation,com-ponentlocationdrawingsandschematicdiagramsfor theModel 196.

7.2 PARTS LIST

Partsarelisted alphanumericallyin orderof their circuitdesignations.Thble7-1 containspartslist informationforthedisplayboard.Thble7-2containspartslist informationfor thedigital board.Table7-3 containspartslist informa-tion for the analogboard. Table 7-4 containsa miscel-laneousparts list for the Model 196.

Devicesthatarestatic-sensitiveareflaggedin thepartslistdescriptionswith theabbreviationSSD.Specialhandlingof thesedevicesis explainedin paragraph6.6.

7.3 ORDERING INFORMATION

To placean orde!; or to obtain information concerningreplacementparts,contactyourKeithleyrepresentativeorthe factory. Seeinside front cover for addresses.Whenorderinginclude the following information:

1. InstrumentModel Number2. InstrumentSerialNumber3. PartsDescription4. Circuit Designation(if applicable)5. Keithley PartNumber

If anadditionalinstructionmanualis required,orderthemanualpackage(Keithley PartNumber196-901-00).Themanualpackagecontainsaninstructionmanualandanyapplicableaddenda.

7.4 FACTORY SERVICE

If the instrumentis to bereturnedto thefactory for ser-vice, pleasecompletetheserviceform which follows thissectionandreturn it with the instrument.

7.5 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ANDCOMPONENT LOCATION DRAWINGS

Schematicdiagramsand componentlocation drawingsfollow the appropriatereplaceablepartslist for that par-ticular board.

7·1/7·2


Table 7-1. Display Board. Parts List

REPLACEABLE PARTS

Circuit KeithleyDesitt. Description Part No.

Cl Capacitor,1O,.E 25V, Aluminum Electrolytic C-314-1DC2 Capacitor,D.l¢', 5W C-365-.1C3 Capacitor,D.l¢', 5W C-365-.1C4 Capacitor,D.l¢" 50V C-365-.1C5 Capacitor,D.l¢" 50V

-_.-

C-365-.1

DSI-DS:i LED, Display, Dual 14-Segment DD-39DS6-DS16 LED, Pilot, Red PL-71

P16 Connector,Display Cable CA-27-6

51-514 Switch SW-435

Ul IC, DarlingtonTranslatorArray, 2003, SSD IC-206U2 IC, DarlingtonTranslatorArray, 2003, SSD IC-206U3 IC, Hex Inverter, OpenCollectorOutput, 74LSD5, SSD IC-l41U4 IC, 8-Bit Serial In/ParalleLOutShift Register,74HCI164 IC-456U5 IC, 8-Bit Serial In/ParallelOut Shift Register,74HCTI64 IC-456

7·3


";"I.....cCiS''g

i

ino3'8:sC1l::J-

cｾ .ZP.....CDQ)

ｾ....o

ZONE LTR ECO NO. REVISION ENG. DATE

B //24-3 R€t.£/9:O:;SD 3-7-86C 1/584 REVISE/) ｾ S-s:'8b

ｉ

• • • .J••••••••••••• Pi6 •• • ••••••••••••• •

•••••••••• - ••••••••••••••••••• ••••••••• •••••••••• • ••OS1 : . •• • ••os; •• OS4 DS5.• OS2 • .-.. • •-. • • • •• -• -. -. -••••••••• ••••••••• •••••••••• ••••••••• •••••••••

• · -. ﾷﾷＨｩｰﾷﾷ -.. !! ＺＺｾＭ ·•OS6 osi -OS9· ｏｓＱｾ 0:1; ｾＺＺＺｵｬＺＺｉ｟ u2:::1 ｾＹｓＱ

ｬｾｮｾｾｾｾﾧ :rn· ｾｾ53 54 85 Sr 89· ·814·13 812

ｏｓｂｾｾｇｊｾｃｅＺｾｓＱｾｏＺＱｾｾ@ ｾＱＴ • - • @ ｾ

..ｾＶｾｬｾＶＶ

PUSHBUTTON SELECTION CHARTSCHEMATIC DES. PART NO •

51,83 THAU 59 29465-5

ｓＲＮｓＱ iHRJ 514 29465-6

INSTALL MK-22-3 MOUNTING KITSUNDER ALL PL-71 PILOT LIGHTS(OS6 THRU 0516) . .

NOTE: FOR COMPONENT INFORMATIONAEFER TO BILL OF MATERIALＪＱＹＶＭＹｊｾＹｊＭＱＰ .

REPLACEABLE PARTS

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

o

c

'-

1 ｾ

,.

-

I Uj

11

5 tiS3

16 :u

-

• 0iJ13

'6

-

11

- -

1 CJ2

16 '11

-

1 2

o

c

B

SCHoHATIC. OISPLAY BOARO

2

ｾＱｾｾ ll>16 ｾｾｾＱｾＱｾｾｾｬｾｾＱｾｾＱ 9" ｾｪｾoJ K A 8 N e: F m D M H P D. p. C ..

NOT'ES:1. ALL PUS1H!ll)fTCNS !!Ih'ITCHES AAi: SIi.OMN l H lti€.

PUSHBUTTO .. OUT PQSITION'_

2. VOENOTES DISPLAY COMHOt4.

,I J.-,3. \f ｄｾｎｏｔＭｅ OUnT AL ｾｏｍｈｄｎ

<4. 0 OENOTE;S l="f10NT - PANEL CONTROL.

3

r -sl---------n ..-5V'.1\8 !fU!peAT - 31

!

ｾｪＶｃｉｊ82 [)] SPLA Y C01'llolOH

4

S12..CL

0--

ｏｾｕｔ

SIS!

-=-0--

ｏｚｅｾ

511

-=-0>---00.

S14

ｾ0 ...

ｾＱ••

5

ｌｾｯＭＭO°CV

6

l4113

l-- -'"'-j 6

LSli5

"1I3'-- ""11, 19

., L'S¢S

ｃｾ C\'BV

ｾ｟ＧｬｪＢ I ,

ｾｾｾＱ 16 ｾ }"16 ｾGLOCK 'BV DATA DIGITAL COMMON'

7

'BV

UNUSED GArE::S

8

A

B

Figure 7-2. Display Board, Schematic Diagram, Dwg. No. 196-116

7·5/7.6


REPLACEABLE PARTS

Table 7-2. Digital Board, Parts List

Circuit Keithleyｄ･ｳｩｾ Description

ｾｾ

Part No.

ClOl Capacitor,10,ODO"F, 25V, Aluminum Electrolytic ｃｾＳＸＷＭＱＰＬＰＰＰ

CI02 CapaCitor,lO"E 2SY, Aluminum Electrolytic C-3l4-10a03 Capacitor,l5OOI'E 25Y, Aluminum Electrolytic C-314-1500CI04 Capacitor,10J<f, ZSV; Aluminum Electrolytic C-314-10ClOS Capacitor,620"F; 3SY, Electrolytic C-309-680CI06 Capacitor,620/'E 25V, Electrolytci C-309-680Cl07- Capacitor,10J<f, 25V, AluminumElectrolytic C-314-10ClOS Capacitor,lO"E 25Y, Aluminum EIectrolytic C-314-10Cl09 Not UsedC110 Capacitor,0.1/'E SOV C-365-.1 --

Clll Capacitor,O.l/'E Sovｾ

C-365-.1C112 Not Usedcm Capacitor,O.lJ<f, SOV C-36S-.1C114 Capacitor,0.11'f, SOV Cc36S-.1Cll5 CapaCitor,O.ll'f, Sov - - -- - - ---- C-36S-.1C1l6 Capacitor,0.11'f, SOV C-36S-.1C1l7 Capacitor,O.1I'f, SOV C-36S-.1CllS Capacitor,0.11'f, Sov ｾ C-36S-.1C1l9 Capacitor,0,11'f, SOV C-36S-.1C120 Capacitor,0.11'f, Sov - - --- C-36S-.1C12l Capacitor,O.1I'f, SOV ｃｾＳＶｓＭＮ

C122 Capacitor,0.11'f, Sov C-36S-.1cm Capacitor.0.11'f, SOV

.,...C-36S-.1

C124 Capacitor,15pF, 1OODV; CeramicDisc C-64-15pC125 Capacitor.15pF, loOOV, CeramicDisc

'-'-- .'.C-64-15p

C126 Capacitor,0.1/'E SOV C-36S-.1C127 Capacr1or.lOJ<f, 25V, Aluminum Electrolytic C-314-lOC128 Not UsedC129 Not UsedC13U Not Used - -

C131 Not Used032 Not UsedC133 Capacitor,0.11'f, SOV C-365-.1C134 Not UsedC135 ｎｯｴｾｕｳ･

C136 ｎｯｴｾｕｳ･

C137 Capacitor,0.11'f, SOV C-36S-.1C138 Capacitor,0.11'f, SOV C-36S-.1C139 Capacitor,4700p,l000v, CeramicDisc - C-64-4700pCl40 Capacitor,10"F, 25Y, Aluminum Electrolytic C-314-lOCl41 Capacftor,0.11'f, SOV

- --- _.. -

C-36S-.1C142 Capacitor,0.11'f, SOV C-36S-.lCl43 Capacitor,0.11'f, SOV

- -

C-365-.lCl44 Capacitor,0.11'f, SOV C-36S-.1Cl45 Not UsedCl46 Capacitor,O.l"F, SOV

-

C-36S-.1Cl47 Capacitor,lO"E 25V, Aluminum Electrolytic C-314-10cm Capacitor,0.11'f, 50V C-365-.1Cl49 Not UsedC150 Capacitor,0.011'f, SOOV, CeramicOisc C-22-.01Cl51 Not Used - -- - - -.'_.

7-8


Table 7-2: Digital Board, Parts List (Cont.)

CircuitDesig. Description

REPLACEABLE PARTS

KeithleyPart No.

J13 Connector,3-pin, MaleJ14 Connector,AC LineJ15 Connector,Right Angle IEEE Mount ReceptacleJ16 .. Connector,26-pin, Male

C152C153.

CRlO1CRl02CR103CR104CR105CRl06CR11J7CRI08

Fl01FlO1

P17

R101R102Rl03Rl04Rl05R106R11J7R108R109R110RlllRl12R1l3RU4Rll5R116Rll7R1l8RU9R120R121Rl22R123R124R125R126R127R128

Capacitor,O.liLE 50VCapacitor,O.liLE 50V

Diode, Bridge Rectifier, 5A,·PE05Diode, Silicon, 1.5A, 4OOV, W04MDiode, Silicon, 1.5A, 4OOV, W04MNot UsedDiode, Silicon, IN4148Diode, Silicon, IN4148Not UsedDiode, Bridge Rectifier, lA, lOOPIV

Fuse, 'I ,.A, 25ov; 3AG, Slo-BIoFuse, '/,.A, 25ov; 3AG, SIo-BIo

Connector,Housing,8-pin, Himale-Connector,Contactfor P17

Resistor,Thick FilmResistor,Thick FilmResistor,Thick FilmResistor,Thick FilmResistor,Thick FilmResistor,60.4k, 1%, 'I.W, CompositionResistor,U.8k, 1%, 'I.W, CompositionResistor,26lkn, 1%, 'TaW, Comp.osition··Not UsedNot UsedResistor,1000,5%, 'AW, CompositionResistor,3.3kQ, 5%, 'AW, Composition.Resistor,lOOn, 5%, 'AW, CompositionResistor,1Mn, 10%, 'I<W, CompositionNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedResistor,lkn, 5%, 'AW, CompositionNot UsedResistor,2.4kn, 5%, 'AW, Compositioit-Resistor,lOOn, 5%, 'AW, Composition .Resistor,4711 5%, 'AW, CompositionResistor,47012, 5%, 'AW, CompositionResistor,10012, 5%, '/<W, Camp_ositionResistor,2.4kn, 5%, 'AW, CompositionResistor,lkn, 5%, 'I.W, Composition

C-365-.1C-365-.1

RF-48RF-46RF-46

RF-28RF-28

RF-52

FU-29FU-40

CS-288-3CS-388CS-51J7CS-389-3

CS-287-8CS-276

TF-141TF-141TF-77TF-77TF-140R-88-60.4kR-88-U.8kR-88-26lk

R-76-100R-76-3.3kR-76-100R-76-1M

R-76-lk

R-76-2.4kR-76-100R-76-47R-76-470ｒＭＷＶｾＱＰＰ

R-76-2.4kR-76-lk

7·9


REPLACEABLE PARTS

Table 7-2. Digital Board, Parts List (Cont.)

Circuit KeithleyDesig. Description PartNo.

R129 Resistor,470. 5%, '14W, Composition R-76-47R130 Resistor,10011,5%, '14W, Composition R-76-100·R131 Resistor,2.4kll, 5%, 'I.W, Composition R-76-2.4kR132 Resistor,1k!J, 5%, '14W, Composition R-76-lkR133 Resistor,470. 5%, ',I,W, Composition R-76-47R134 Resistor,Wall, 5%, '14W, Composition

. --

R-76-1ooR135 Resistor,2.4kO, 5%, '14W, Composition R-76-2.4kR136 Resistor,lkll, 5%, '!4W, Composition . R-76-lkR137 Resistor,470. 5%, '14W, Composition R-76-47R138 Resistor,47011, 5%, '14W, Composition R-76-470R139 Not UsedR140 Not UsedR141 Resistor,8211, 5%, '14W, Composition R-76-82R142 Resistor,8211, 5%, '14W, Composition R-76-82R143 Resistor,8211, 5%, '14W, Composition R-76-82

S101 Switch SW-318S102 Switch SW-466S103 Switch SW-469

1101 Transformer,Line, American TR-2491101 Transformer,Line, Japanese - .. .. TR-250T102 Transformer,Pulse TR-2311103 Transformer,Pulse TR-2311104 Transformer,Pulse TR-231T105 Transformer,Pulse TR-231

U101 IC, Octal la-Input ANDIOR/INVERT GateArray, PALlOL8, SSD IC-514U102 IC, Quad2-Input NOR Gate,74HCID2, SSD IC-51OUlO3 Not Used . -

..-

U104 IC, a-Bit MicroprocessingUnit, 68B09 LSI-65UlO5 IC, 16k x 8UV ErasablePROM, 27I28; SSD 196-801"U106 IC, 16k x 8 UV ErasablePROM, 27128; SSD 196-800"U107 IC, 8192Word x 8-Bit StaticCMOS RAM, 6264LP-15 151-66U108 IC, ProgrammableE'ROM, 2816A LSI-83U109 IC, VersatileInterfaceAdapter(VIA), 6522 LSI-45UllO IC, CMOS Tri-StateFlip-Flop, 74HCI374,SSD IC-397Ulll IC, CMOS Tri-StateFlip-Flop, 74HCI374, SSD IC-397Ull2 IC, GPIB Adapter,9914 •... LSI49Ull3 IC, Octal GPIB Transceiver,75160A IC-298Ull4 IC, Octal GPIB Transceiver,75161A IC-299Ull5 IC, MicropowerBipolar Monolithic, 82ll, SSD IC-177Ull6 Not UsedUll7 Not UsedUll8 Not UsedUll9 Not Used

*Order samesoftwareaspresentlyinstalled.For example,if the softwarerevisionlevel is B8, thenorder196-800-B8and 196'801-B8. .

7-10


Table 7·2. Digital Board, Parts List (Cont.),

REPLACEABLE PARTS

.. _.. ＭＭｾ . ;- ... . - ....

Circuit KeithleyDesig. Description

ＭＭＮＭｾＭＭ- -- , Part No.

UUO IC, Quad2-Input NAND Gate, 74HCOO, SSD IC-351UUl Not UsedU122 Not UsedU123 IC, Dual 4-Bit Decadeand Binary Counter,74LS393,SSD IC-213UU4 IC, Comparator,L1311A, SSD - - IC-526U125 IC, Voltage Comparator,1M311, SSD IC-173UU6 IC, Voltage Comparator,IM311, SSD IC-173U127 IC, Voltage Comparator,LM311, SSD IC-173UU8 Ie, TransistorArray, MPQ3906 IC-396UU9 IC, TransistorArray, MPQ3906 IC-396U130 Ie, TransistorArray, MPQ3906 IC-396U131 Ie, TransistorArray, MPQ3906 IC-396

VRlOl Regulator,IC, +5V, 309 IC-34VRl02 Regulator,IC, +5V, 7805 IC-93VRW3 Regulator,IC, +15V, 78M15 . 32472-1VRl04 Regulator,IC, -15V; 79M15 32472-2VRW5 Regulator,Diode, Silicon, 1N702A DZ-33VRW6 Regulator,Diode, Silicon, 1N702A DZ-33

YJ.01 Crystal, 8MHz CR-24-1,,'u .. ,,- ,

7·11


o

-@}-

D '"orn -miiU- ¥

-lmrn--=-ｾｾｯ

@) :ozpｾ

CDenｾoo

OJga.ｾ

g3'Do;a

1.

R o

FIBI1/4'"SlI-I2SVIJIIAＱｾｏＭＲｓｉｬ

III

JI4

tlSI

ｒｅｐｌａｃｅａｂｕ PARTS

ｾ｟ＭＭＭＭＭﾣｉ［ＭＭＭ｟ＭＭｌ｟ＭＭＭＭＧＭｆ｟ＭＭ｟ＮＭｌＮＮＮＭＭＭＭｃｬｾｾｬｩｬｩｩ

ｐＭＭＭｲＭＭｾＭＭ＼ _5V OI_tTIlL

.1::1112•• lH

r---,-----<) +5V ｒｎｉｊＭｾｉ

.nMIe

ｉＢＭＭＫｾＮＮＮＮ｟ＭＭＭＭＭ _15V AHl\L06

ｉＢＭＭ ......ｾＭＭＭＢ -lSV {llRLOG

UOIt'S,1. RU. Il£'il<ifIl< VRLUI!:5 ｒｒｉ OI!HS lJII..ESS ｾｔＱｉｏｬＧｯＧ｛ｓ t\J1ftIQlJ IK-KIL0III5, "-I'EGllHHSI.2, fU [fll'!lCITll! ｖｾ｛ _ 1M ｍ｛ WLESS OJJ£RVI5Elm£O (pF-PICllFRIIRU:;I.ｾ W tIENOTtS ol'nl'll. CDHIIllIl.

ｾ V DElI0TE5 DISPLAY ｴｴｗｬｬｬｾ

5. ｾ Df:llQTES IWlLlIG SIGI*l. [(I\I1llIl.

G. mIlt:W1E5 CtJI'''''' tlHIECTlOtL

7, (j] ｏｆｬｬＮｉｊｔｾ HfJI"'F'RPJ'IIE GR.Ot»Il SCii:E'II ..

8, • 0£I;\]1t'5 1'lt0llT f'lll£L COOTRtt..

9, IIONOIES REM I'1Hl. MIJ\RH I ....

61:E11IUY 1N5TO\01EkfS '-NL

m.&-:=::..=-- --j

196 OM POVER SU'PLY

Figure 7-4. Digital Board, S.chematic Diagram. Dwg. No. 19;6-106 (sheet 1 of 3)

7..13/7-14


REPLACEABLE PARTS

R c r ｟｟ｾ｟ＭＭ］ｾ｟ＭＬＭＭ ....f" _

t:t:t"""," •

DI ＱｾＱ SEt 1'1.6( THRtt

DL5M.AY D1GLT ｾ tf!1VEr<5.

TO DISPLAY llDARD RIBSIIl l:AIll£ lllTERClllilOCf ｲｬｾ

'f-

2

r ;:l JIB7

I

.5V

5 S S /I tB 1 2 A L

r 0R I:

ｾ

----< TO *ET I. Plij l Of ｕｬｾﾷ

AID COONTS

---< 70 SIiOr7 1. PlK III ｾ tllft9

.svsoov ＱＵｾｮｔｉｏ

<! ｃｉＩｉＮＧｗｬＭｦｬｉｬｑＨＮ +-__--.

fJ----El ,·15'1

ｾＭＱＵ

Ｈ +51' IW/IU. ｒｬｾｾ 471l

tlHTIB

+5'1RI28

ｾII:

5

cLCtt:

+5VmlI.Oli

ｔｏｂｬｊｒｒｏｾ (2PH DATA

+!Y

ＭＭ

SilllOOE

19H.C.

9ｾｬｂ

ｾＱＱｬＮ 19I! DlS1'LIlY ｾ COltt.f'tID ra.sE XfRlIIS •

.ＭＭＭｾｾＭＭｾＭＭＬＬＭＭＭＭＮＮＮＮＮＬＮＮＮＭＭＭ c E I I H

Figure 7-4. Digital Board, Schematic Di8gram, Dwg. No. ｴＹＶｾＱＰ (sheet 2 of 3)

7-15f7-16


REPLACEABLE PARTS

c I n I

tNFlIIII/iESETFfLSE VRITtFROTECTllll/.

E I I

- I--

-

-

L

BU5

IEEE,88

I.

.--""""'"KE'=I"'T...,tl.EY---:--cIU5TRUI'.ENT===S:-::IIC=-._-i6

ｾＧ］ＺＺＺI''''''MOOEI. 196 DI.HIlL BDleI

I

L-.L--'""""7 T4l UIIl9, FIN 39

TO SHEET 2. 19S-106

"c"

-0-

",,'

ｈＮ｣ＮｾＧｮｈＮｃＮＭＺＡ

t--------"i8 ,IlS21----7:iRSl1------"16 RS4lＱＭＭＭＭＭＭＺｾｬｩｩＧｉ1----'I51m£'r

[7 D7[S 0015 OS

14 0'ｉＭＭＭＭｊＢｪ 00

12 D2Il 01U oo

-.-.. .,...-

I

IIcu:

7#ICT374s38lIIl-s3llff

ｾ 5 "0" J ,1;7 r'7lIII r2,--"!!.o"__+

ｌｾ］］］］ｾｾｩｩｬｬｬｕｪｪｊｾｪＱ｛ｦｬｬｅｋｾＫＭＬｌｾｾ］､Ｍ POI/Ell-U' OISl'LAY" Il£l.RY. lifTlCIR..- :=n:Jut

ｾＺｉｦＧＨＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＧＧＧＧＧ］•

t--._-=2B"lY""

fl211 UlIl

fo·1 18t---'---=-jGllDｉＭＭＮＮＬＮＭＮＭｾｴｴ i

IB 0711 0014 OS[3 04

1--'----'8"l03t----7'"102t-----42j01t-----3""llJll

.11ClI:

UI200I f

ElZ ｾｈＮｴ00 IS ,

115 ISg( 121l!l1:9:-- ...,""'e':-"_-}112 ES'- "c'f...,"_-7

al f.5:-- ｾ __...,"::'1-="--}00 l-'2'- "-'ec.."_-7

ｦｾ 9 '-----..... H.t.',....,.., ｾPR61-:8:-- ｾｾｾ｟］ｓＲＧＭＭＮ｟｟｟

ｐａｓｾＷＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＵｾＱＺ｟｟Ｍ (PR4"'8'- ＮＮＮＮＮＬＮＮＬ］ＭＢＢＧ］］ｾＭＭＭＭＭＭＢＧｳ｡ＧＭＭ

5 CAl. flR!LEll)ISRBl.EI'R3 =-- 5183. r--1 (fRONT PRHEL)PR2 ｐＧＭＭＧＭＭｬＭＢＧＭＭｾｾ W .PAL ＱＺＳＧＭｬＺＺＺＭ］ＺＭＺＺＺ［ＭＭＭＷｩｩｩｲＮＬＬ｟ﾷＭＭｾＭＭＭｾｬｬｒｾｬＧｉ［［ＺＧ［［ _ ___7ｰ 2 0.00:; ::, ｾﾻＮＡｾｾｌ＼Ｚ｟ＰＱＱ -l------,D::li'l;==-----7

ＮＵｖ -

E

L

J7 Pil7

ｾｐＸＸｉ PBSｾｐﾣＱｾｐｂ

12 P82

cJJ Pil[

f..l!!Poo

3S RS3 I36 85237 ASI3S Rsa21m$41132B 07 18 D727 05 17 00:2B os HIlS29 04 [3 043S D3 8 033[ 02 0232 01 4 '0133 00 3 :00

2ll Vr:.c 2B V=

CllS UIll9 Cll9 UllB

8.11 Yss

6.1 18

--I:Qdl

'-- DE

! "

ｾ mt--f---,,22"l1lli IIS22

$2IMIGI-S2FFf

..1! CS[

I

Ｍ CIl2L..j---t--"''"'''lCRI

.--_-\-_+-::18:!jC61.---+----I1-:--'1"l9C82

2lJ 18DE m

CI17 Uloo

0.1 12 V's

[7 0116 0015 OS

14 0'13 0311 0218 01

t----"19 118

1---r--...2,"IV""

I $2llIlll-S27ffI '

ｉＭＭＭＭＭＧ｛ｾｾ RI822 R9ZlA8

r----:-tl A7t-------O.j2 RSt-----"lJ AS

, ［ｴＭＭＭＭＭＭｾＴａr---"-l5 R31-__--'6'1R2f-__ ｾ A[

t-----"l8 A8

I

826's__SlfFf

N.C...! H.C.ｈＭＭｾＲＢｬｒｉ

H--7Zl:!jAllH--...21'-jRI8

2' R9ｾ RB

H---3"iA1H---':':lR6H Ｕｾｦｬ

H---6"jR4H 7'-1R3H----'8:!jR2H---c9"1m

[8 All

19 0718 OS[7 OS[8

04IS D313 D2

1-__",2,0111 00

C

19 D718 11617 05IS 0415 0313 0212 01!loo

II

2B 22 A28 22rr OE rr DE

Ｂｾｾ m 1-__---.:2=qlI'mR15il; IV' 21C1lra ＲＱｃＱｾｒＱＴ Kllllll-$ffff UIBHefff

ｉｴ｜ＳＱｾＲｾＱ｟ＭＭｊＭＫＭｈＭＭＮＡＲＶｾｒｉ t-----..,2S"'lRI3ｭ 2ll 2 R12 t-- ｾ RI2Ri11 19 23, All ' f----.-:23:':'1All, , I [8 21 RI0 1-------.:2':11 A[Bｾｾ 4ｾ [S 2' R9 i, 2 Mｾｾｾ 25 U

: Ai [5 3 R7 3'R7Ju 'RS 4 ASRS 13 5 RS, 5 AS

I R4 12 8 114, SR'F13 11 7 RS 7 A3

, R2 18 B R2' e R2Al 9 9 Al 9 A[ｾｷｲｮ

01 2( 19 07. ＰＶｦＮＧｾＢＬ -,I"'le 08

OS 2S 17 OS0( 27 ISO(

. 03 28 15 0302 29 13 02

, 01 38 12 01,DB 3[ II OS

R

ClUBS1t/914

:!P26 8

Rlll6 ,&11, J ｾr2HYST ｹ 1C['9

68.41: RIIJ8 8211 JIIIIlIlpｃｉｾｔｾＧＺＭＭＭI -'';'' - 2B[K UII5 ,..,ｾ +N.C. C[53 C 5·TO REAR

[Ii'll( t------'---"-j3 TIflfSv_ I-'-H.C. 8.1 PlWEL HO!M£D U/!;. ｾ

CI27 RI81 L.-......11;:'-!S---' [ 'j'+5YTIBuf 11.81: w£'--------' TD PINS B1A12. UI211 CLOCK [(

-& ｾ［ TO 5l£ET 2 TO pINS 84,85. UI28 DRTR RI29 ｾｾｾ UIZlV""2 ＮｾｾＱ

PilVER-DOVlI RESET DET£OIOH 19S-1ll6 TO FINS 18,11. UI2I!I STROBE lK ｾTO PIN 7, UI24 -E/_-"RIlJ'-"-"'COO=HT"S'--_--jI-__--t__....1<l10: gO 6

1lCP-ｾ 2 llJl oof±-ｾ｛ｴｌｒ DRS

ｲＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＱｌｾＬＮＮＬｎｄ］ＮＬＮＮＬＬＭＭ｟ＮＮＮＮ r'it7 74LS393

,SVo--r----/ r= 7 I ｾ rO"

(113 U184 (114 r-------'- VppDIllS

il ';'1!--- ＬｙＢＢｉＭＧｉｾ｟Ｍ｜Ｎｉｾ｟ﾷﾷＭｬｬｬＱ V""

<7 IEl TIlL XTAl.3ll 39

Gｈｄｾ SYSTEM MR5TER(12( 8.'\l:l2 (125 ｄｓｃｉｌｕｬｔｾ

ISif T TISif DIVlrE BYW W ((21otlz1.

2, i

5

e

-

-

Figure 7-4" Digital Board, Schematic Diagram, Dwg" No. 196·106 (sheet 3 of 3)

7-1717·18


Table 7-3. Analog Board, Parts List

REPLACEABLE PARTS

Circuit KeitWeyDesig. Description Part No.

0 Capacitor,330p,SOV C-64-,330pCZ Capacitor,O.ll'!', SOV C-36S-.1C3 Capacitor,O.ll'!', SOV C-36S-.1C4 Capacitor,O.ll'!', SOV C-365-.lCS Capacitor,O.ll'!', SOV C-365-.lC6 Capacitor,O.ll'!', sov C-365-.lC7 Not UsedC8 Capacitor,O.ll'!', SOV C-36S-.lC9 Capacitor,O.ll'!', SOV C-36S-.lClO Capacitor,O.l",F, SOV C-36S-.lCll

.

Capacitor,O.ll'!', SOV C-365-.lC12 Capacitor,O.ll'!', SOV C-36S-.1 .

C13 Not Used04 Capacitor,0.1i<F, 50V C-36S-.1OS Capacitor,O.ll'!', SOV C-36S-.l06 Capacitor,O.ll'!', SOV C-365-.lC17 Capacitor,O.ll'!', 50V C-365-.lC18 Capacitor,O.ll'!', 50V C-365-.lC19 Capacitor,O.ll'!', 50V C-365-.lCZO Capacitor,O.ll'!', 50V C-365-.lCZl Capacitor,O.ll'!', SOV C-365-.lC22 Capacitor,O.ll'!', 50V C-365-.lC23 Capacitor,O.ll'!', 50V C-365-.lCZ4 Not UsedC25 Capacitor,O.ll'!', SOV C-365-.lCZ6 Capacitor,O.ll'!', SOV C-365-.lC'27 capacitor,O.ll'!', SOV C-36S-.lC28 Not"UsedCZ9 Capacitor,82pF, lODOV, CeramicDisc C-64-82p00 Capacitor,lSpF, 1000\!, CeramicDisc C-64-lSpC3l Capacitor,lSOpE 1ODV; Ceramic C-372-lS0p02 Capacitor,0.0047I'!', lOO\!, MetalizedPolypropylene C-306-.004703 Capacitor,101'!', 25V, Aluminum Electrolytic C-3l4-l0C34 Capacitor,33pF, lOOO\!, CerainicDisc C-64-33p05 Capacitor,33pF, 1000\!, CeramicDisc C-64-33p06 Capacitor,330pF, lOOO\!, Ceramic"DiSi:" C-64-330p07 Capacitor,330pF, 1000\!, CeramicDisc C-64-330p08 Capacitor,680pF, 50OV, Polystyrene C-138-680p09 Not UsedC40 Capacitor,O.ll'!', 63OV, MetalizedPolyester C-364-.1C4l Capacitor,lOpF C-372-l0pC42 Capacitor,l5pF, 50V, Tubular Ceramic C-282-l5pC43 Capacitor,nOpE 500\!, Mica C-278-ll0pC44 Capacitor,lSI'!', 2OV, Tantalum C-204-lSC45 Capacitor,21'!', 10OV, Polyester C-294-2C46 Capacitor,0.47",F, SOV, MetalizedPolyester C-350-.47C47 Capacitor,II'!', SOV, MetalizedPolyester C-3S0-1C48 Capacitor,Trimmer, 2.SpFto 6pE 500V C-359C49 Capacitor,Trimmer, 4pF to 4OpF, 500V C-345CSO Capacitor,O.lSl'!', 20OV, Polycarbonate C-22l-.0lSCSl Capacitor,O.lSl'!', 20OV, Polvcarbonate C-22l-.0lS

7-19


REPLACEABLE PARTS

Table 7·3. Analog Board, Parts List (Cant.)

Circuit KeithleyDesig. Description Part No.

C52 Capacitor,100pF,l000V,CeraiiilcDlsc .. ｃｾＭｉＰＰ

C53 Capacitor,68pF,SOOV,Polystyrene C-138-68pC54 Capacitor,15pF,lOOV, Ceramic C-372-15pC56 ｃｾＭＴＷ

C57 . C-64-22p

CRl-eR5 Diode,Silicon, IN4148 RF-28CR6 Diode,BridgeRectifier,PE05 RF-48CR7 Diode,Silicon,MRSOl RF-34CR8-CRll Diode,Silicon,Diffused,IN4149 RF-60CR12 Diode,Silicon, IN4148 RF-28

Fl NotUsedF2 Fuse,3A,250V,Normal-Blo FU-82

J17 Connector,Male,6-Pin C5-288-8

KI-K2 Relay RL-99K3-KS Relay RL-70

Ll Not UsedL2-L3 Choke 1R-245

Ql Transistor,Ql, Q4,R7, R8andR57area matchedset,SSD 196-602Q2 NotUsedQ3 Trartsistor,N-ChannelFET,PN4392,SSD 31841Q4 Transistor(seeQl) -Q5-Q9 Transistor,N-ChannelFET,PN4392,SSD 31841QI0 NotUsedQll-Q13 Transistor,N-ehannelPET,PN4392,SSD 31841Q14-Q15 NotUsedQ16-Q17 Transistor,N-ChannelFET,PN4392,SSD 31841Q18-Q19 Transistor,NPN,Silicon,2N3904 TG-47

7-20


Table 7-3. Analog Board, Parts List (Cant.)

REPLACEABLE PARTS

._, . ... ｾ .", . " . _.... .", .. ｾ "."'''', ' ｾＢＢＺ-Circuit KeithleyDesi!\. Description Part No.

Q20 Not UsedQ21 Not UsedQ22 Transistor,NPN, Silicon, GE55818 TG-138Q23 Not UsedQ24 Not UsedQ25 Not UsedQ26 Transistor,N-ChanneIFET, BUZ71, 550 580-601Q27 Not UsedQ28 Transistor,N-ChanneIFET; BUZ71, 550 580-601Q29 Transistor,M05 PowerN-ChannelPET; 2N7000,550 TG-195Q30 Transistor,N-ChanneljFET, PF5301,55D 193-603Q31 Transistor,N-Channel]'FET; PF5301,5SD TG-139Q32 Transistor;N-ChannelFET; PN4392,550 31841Q33 Transistor;N-ChannelFET; PN4392,550 193-603Q34 Transistor,N-ChannelPET; PN4392,550 31841Q35 Transistor,N-ChannelFET; PN4392,550 193-603Q36 Transistor,MOS PowerN-ChannelFET, 2N7000,SSD TG-195Q37 Transistor,N-ChanneIFET; BUZ71, 550 580-601Q38 Transistor;N-ChannelFET; BUZ71, SSD 580-601Q39 Transistor;MOSFETPower,PA75N855T;550 580-601Q40 Transistor,M05FET Power,PA75N855T;SSD 580-601Q41 Transistor,MP842, SSD TG-175

R1 Resistor,lMlJ, 10%, '4W, Composition R-76-lMR2 Resistor,lMlJ, 10%, '4w, Composition R-76-lMR3 Resistor,lklJ, 5%, '4w, Composition R-76-lkR4 Resistor,82lJ, 5%, '4W, Composition R-76-82R5 Not UsedR6 Resistor,142.8ldl, 0.1%, 'I.W, Fixed R-176-142.8kR7 Resistor,(seeQ1) -R8 Resistor,(seeQl) -R9 Resistor,Thick Film TF-39RlO Resistor,Thick Film TF-211Rll Not UsedR12 Resistor,100klJ, 1%, lW, Metal Film R-344-100kR13 Resistor;100klJ, 1%, lW, Metal Film R-344-100kR14 Resistor,lOOklJ, 1%, lW, Metal Film R-344-100kR15 Resistor,lOOldl, 1%, lW, Metal Film R-344-lOOkR16 Resistor;560lJ, 10%, '4W, Composition R-76-560R17 Resistor,Thick Film TF-214R18 Resistor,Thick Film TF-177-3R19 Resistor;Thick Film TF-177-3R20 Resistor,Thick Film TF-177-3R21 Resistor,lOOldl, 1%, 'I.W, Composition R-88-100kR22 Not UsedR23 Resistor,30kll, 1%, 'I"W R-348-30kR24 Resistor;13kll, 0.1%, 'I,.W, Metal Film R-263-13kR25 Resistor,lMlJ, 1%, 'I.W, Composition R-88-lMR26 Resistor,2kll, 1%, 'I,.W R-348-2kR27 Resistor;1.002kll, 0.1%, 'l,oW, Metal Film R-263-1.002kR28 Resistor;Thick Film

Ｎ ..__ . TF-168-1

7-21


REPLACEABLE PARTS

Table 7-3. Analog Board, Parts List (Cont.)


-

R29 Resistor,0.8981l, 0.1%, 5W, Wire Wound R-310-.898R30 Resistor,o.m, 0.1%, 7.5W, Wire Wound R-262-.1R31 Resistor,22M1l, 10%, l/zW, Composiiton R-1-22MR32 Resistor,118kll, 0.1%, '/,W, Metal Film R-168-118kR33 Resistor,1.17MIl, 0.25%, 34W, Metal Film R-352-1.17MR34 Resistor,20kll, 5%, Wire Wound R-336-20kR35 Resistor,9.09kll, 0.1%, '/,.W, Metal Film R-263-9.09kR36 Resistor,R36 and R37 are a matchedset R-293R37 Resistor,R36 and R37 are a matchedset R-293R38 Resistor,Thick Film TF-213R39 Resistor,13kll, 0.1%, '/sW, Fixed R-176_13kR40 Resistor,13kll, 0.1%, '/sW, Fixed R-176-13kR41 Resistor,R41 and R42 area matchedset R-292R42 Resistor,R41 andR42 area matchedset R-292R43 Resistor,lOll, 5%,'4W, Composition R-76-10R44 Resistor,lOll, 5%, '4W, Composition R-76-10R45 Resistor,IMIl, 10%, '14W, Composition R-76-IMR46 Resistor,IMIl, 10%, '4W, Composition R-76-lMR47 Resistor,lMll, 10%, '14W, Composition R-76-lMR48 Resistor,IMIl, 10%, '14W, Composition R-76-lMR49 Resistor,lMn, 10%, '4W, Composition R-76-lMRSO Resistor,IMIl, 10%, %W, Composition R-76-lMRS1 Resistor,IMn, 10%, %W, Composition R-76-lMRS2 Resistor,IMIl, 10%, '/.W, Composition R-76-lMRS3 Resistor,4701l, 5%, '4W, Composition R-76-470RS4 Resistor,32.4k1l, 1%, '/,W, Composition R-88-32.4kRS5 Resistor,20kll, 0.1%, '/,.W, Metal Film R-263-20kR56 Resistor,20kll, 0.1%, '/,.W, Metal Film R-263-20kRS7 Resistor,(seeQ1) -

R58 Resistor,15.8kll, 1%, '/,W, Composition R-88-15.8kRS9 Resistor,7.78kll, 1%, '/.W, Composition R-88-7.87kR60 Resistor,5601l, 5%, '4W, Composition R-76-560kR61 Resistor,18.2kll, 1%, '/.W, Composition R-88-lK2kR62 Resistor,8.15kll, 1%,.'/.W, Composition R-88-8.15kR63 Resistor,14k1l, 1%, '/,W, Composition R-88-14kR64 Resistor,lOkll, 1%, '/.W, Composition R-88-10k

RTI Thermister,FTC, 12201l, 15.5mA RT-9-2

Sl Switch, Pushbutton SW-468

TP1 TestPoint CS-553TP2 TestPoint CS-553TP3 TestPoint CS-553TP4 TestPoint CS-553

U1 Not UsedU2 IC,QuadComparator,LM339 IC-219U3 IC, QuadComparator,LM339 IC-219U4 IC, QuadComparator,LM339 IC-219US IC, QuadComparator,LM339 IC-219

7-22


Table 7-3. Analog Board, Parts List (Cont.)

REPLACEABLE PARTS

- .,-_. .. ＧｾＧ - ""-,,,...,..,,,., ,


U6 IC, Quad2-Input NAND Gate,74LCOO;SSb IC-351U7 IC, Dual D Flip-Flop, 74HC74,SSD IC-337U8 IC, Dual D Flip-Flop, 74HC74,SSD IC-337U9 Not UsedUlO Not UsedUll IC, GeneralPurposeOp Amp, MP5502,SSD IC-413U12 IC, GeneralPurpuseOp Amp, MP5502, SSD IC-413U13 IC, GeneralPurposeOp Amp, MP5502, SSD IC-413U14 Not Used

..

U15 Not UsedU16 IC, Triple 2-ChannelAnalog Multiplexer, Selected,SSD 31847-1U17 IC, Dual 4-Bit Decadeｃｯｵｮｴ･ｲＬＷＴｈｃＳｾ SSD IC-500U18 IC, Dual 4-Bit Counter,74HCI393 IC-462U19 IC, Inverting High SpeedOp Amp, MP5501, SSD IC--414U20 IC, Dual Low PowerJFET Op Amp, Selected,SSD 196-601U21 IC, QuadMonolithic SPSTCMOS Analog Switch, DG211, SSD IC-320UTI IC, QuadMonolithic SPSTCMOS Analog Switch, DG21l, SSD IC-320U23 IC, QuadMonolithic SPSTCMOS Analog Switch, DG211, SSD IC-320U24 IC, QuadMonolithic SPSTCMOS Analog Switch, DG211, SSD IC-320U25 IC, QuadMonolithic SPSTCMOS Analog Switch, DG211, SSD IC-320U26 IC, Wide Bandwidth)FET Input Op Amp, LF353 IC-246U27 IC, lRMS-to-DC Converter,AD637, SSD IC-352U28 IC, Dual)FET Input Op Amp, LF412, SSD IC-504U29 IC, 8-StageShift-StoreRegister,409;1;-SSD IC-251U30 IC, 8-StageShift-StoreRegister,4094, SSD IC-251U31 IC, 8-StageShift-StoreRegister,4094, SSD IC-251U32 IC, 8-StageShift-StoreRegister,4094, SSD IC-251U33 IC, DarlingtonTransistorArray, 2003, SSD IC-206U34 IC, PrecisionReference,Selected 196-600U35 IC, Linear Op Amp, LM30BA IC-203U36 IC, Wide Bandwidth)FET Input Op Amp, LF35lN IC-176U37 IC, Wide Bandwidth)FET Input Op Amp, Selected 30477U38 Not UsedU39 Not UsedU40 Not UsedU41 Not UsedU42 IC, QuadComparator,LM339 IC-219U43 IC, Quad2-Input NOR Gate,74HC02,SSD - IC-412U44 IC, Triple 2-ChannelAnalogMultiplexer, 4053, SSD IC283U45 IC, Triple 2-ChannelAnalog Multiplexer, 4053, SSD IC-283

VR1 Regulator,ZenerDiode, 4.3\', IN749A DZ-63VR2 Regulator,Diode, IN702A DZ-33VR3 Regulator,ZenerDiode, 6.S\', IN4577 DZ-SSVR4 Regulator,ZenerDiode, 6.3\', IN4577 DZ-SS

WI Jumper J-3

Y1 Crystal, 3.84MHz CR-13- --- - .

7·23


2

4

3

I

5

Etil. DnTe;M!!I ::!i-7-(a:

G

G

196-120F

F

C 11-461 .REUISED-

o L1S!H'J AElJISED

Ufi 1HDOE1.. HEX' A15iEM.Bl.'t OfT 6

USE:O OH

Ii: lil"c-OO .U£'UISILDF' 1 ...039 ｭｩＮﾷ｣ＺＺＧｾ fR"?' 'IV • " to .-.Cll PU,

02 1189G REUIS£O

L fA. ECO ｴｩｾ RF.;UISllJ!'i

B 11243 RELEASfLD

ｉＧｬｊｬｉｗａｾｅ ",cue. 6-'"" FI.HI5H

E

E

IQ';wt.t.:I ｾｩｬ ...Ｎｴ DFtH. SA2

ｲｴ＼ｅｉｮＭ｣ｅｙｉｾｾｾｾｾｾＺＬＺｴｊ｡ｬﾷｬﾣｘｘＭ .••:!S rR1l.Cl....tl ..64 KATe:IUflL

DcB

B

'OH

A

."Gc(i

'i'"pi

ｾｾl»0(Q

m 50-72

0I REG'O

II)

a.003"C0ｾC1I::I-Ii" ｡

C-o'ｾ

ciSO(Qｾ

C

ｾ .Zｾ..I,

ｾQ)

ｾI\)0

02t-96T:::I

1

4

5

2

,6

REPLACEABLE PARTS

8 7 6 4 3 2 1.

c

:D

8

RSO1l'1

Rlｬ

1M

"I..$U ..... 1SI1)

ｯｾｾPRG[ ｾＬｬｏｎ Oi!

R25

1M

G2 .

ｾＢＧｾｾ 3,20N" a' 0 liM ＵﾣｾＵｾ _

U4

ＧｬＡＮｾｬＩｻ［［Ｇ＾ＭＭＭＭＧｉＭｾｾｾｾ

,3

0-

+:JUR

, R20A 0L5

ｾＭｾＮＳ

ｾＮＳ \

Rio ＭＱｾ

-'SI!

-i!ilJ

2

D +2,"&1) a

ＭｾＮｾＬｾ, D "OK ｓ｣ｾＢＮｅＬＬＭ --+-f-------"-l,t". fll1B£ 3., +15V 1:::l i!ON£ Cl

-+----' lit;

ｓｾｉｦｃ

Sl.

11

. t'l1-l61!:' 1 I i!!C1HE 1:2

D_AOY ｊｾｐｕ

pnGE ｾＭ :2o"e: DB

J1

f)

SchematicDesignation

Input Terminal Front Rear,

VOLTS OHMS HI P2 J6VOLfS OHMS ill P4 J9OHMS SENSEill Pl J7OHMS SENSELO P3 J8AMPS P5 JID

INPUT TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION

2

t-2. lB) "".f-"---""'l

56

ＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭＭｾｾ

78

Figure 7-6. Analog Board, Schematic Diagram, Dwg. No. 196-126 (sheet 1 of 4)


REPLACEABLE PARTS

A

8

ｾ I'

, 'ii

c

1

o

+1st!

ＤｃｈｾｬＱｦｬｔｊｲｾ｢ｉａｌｾｇ f]nARU

CVRREnT.·,u

FAat. L. 20NE: D:i!

10 K

ｾ R18H 8

ll1L£

C47

ｔ

2

23

+151J

mil

ｾa

&.+-' .Ｍｉｾ

4 3ｯｾ

2. __

C(00 t-lrJ1 IHSERT J

3tI1'FC41

IQ""

R32..C43

ＭＰｾｓｬＬ

(DO t-lOT XHSERT 1

+15U+lSU

"""131) +-1SV

69

5

-15U -tl$t,!

1.17M

6

R28FlｾｄＨ

-.II); :!tQqye.. 0PAGE 3. i!DNE C1

0

J''i¥

7 6 5 4

7

3 RIUC: • "SV

1001'.

• RISOn ....u

lOOl'.

l..- J

F2

ｄ｟ＮＮＺＮａＺ［Ｚｃ［Ｍ｣ｕＭＬｾＢＬｍＭＢＬｐＭＬｕＢＬ __

8

ｾｯ｟｡ＧｕａｃｾＨｬｪｏｏＮ

ｰｬＭｬ･ :! ,2mu: B1

ｄＭｾＢｐｕ LO

f"A6E 1 ＬｩＡｑｈ 136

:PAGE ;\ ,l.:!rJN.E: 8'1 K1ｃＩＭＭＬａＢＬｃｾｕＺＭｬＧｾＢＭｾｌＢＬＬＬＬＬＭｖＧＭＭＭ｟ＮＮｌＮＨｹｖＢＧＰＭｾＭ＼Ｂ -t!:lV

ＬＮＮＡＮ ....U3D ＾ＡＮＺＱｾｾｬＭ｟ＭＭｦ

ＢＩＭＭＢｴｾｉＢＬｑＬＭＬｋ｟ＭＧＺＺＺｲｮＢＬａＧｴＭＭＭＬｌｾｾPPlrJjr: ｾ I ｾＨＩｈ Cl 1

I'.:,) -'L5U

+15tl P

8 ｾ.£".. 15 .6 1 OK ,

U3BｴＳＧｑｖａｐＭＳ .!A.z U1339

+PARi; :1 .2.0HIi: A2 12

"""lSI)

0

RtEH) ｬ ... ＱｾＱ

100te

r> 3A S

ｦＧｾＶ 3.i!OHE 81

ｾｾＬａﾣＢ IHPUT

R F{l(jii J .Z,DNI£ Sil

c

o

Figure 7-6. Analog Board, SehemalicDiagram, Owg. No. 196-126 (sheet 2 of 4)

7-27/7-28


REPLACEABLE PARTS

4 3 2 1

Pfi6E 1, ｩｬ｣ｾｩ BS

ｐｾｂＧ 1.i!'Ot-U:, 84

P"S6 i Ｎｾｏｎｾ

PAGE 1.efJl1E Botgt,PF)G!t" Ｔｾｬｏｈ］

PAGE 1, tDK! D3 Dｾｾｾｅ 4 I i![]Jie C:::l

PAae. 1 ｾ｣｡ｈ u}

PAGE 2) Ｇｏｈ e'

iJI.nBIi e, lOMS: BB00

PAGE 2 ｾｩＡｏｈ 04

PAGE "', ｾＱＮｬＺｍＸ

ｦＸｨｦＳｾｾｚ｛ＩｬＱｅ 07ｐｾｇｾＬＲＰｈ .aｐＢＺｕＺＡｩｾｾＬｩＮ ZONIi: ｩＺＺＶ

ｦｉＧｾｇ［ＺｌＧ cIJNE: IB,PAel;;: aI ｩＺＡｏｎ U8 CPAI3Ii , j ｉＡＨ｝ｎｅｬｾｐｾｯＨＧ［｛ ,2'1 i!ONE. 07,

pJ:lI!r;'. 2;i!Lmt Ｈｪ

t

f1,:1r.il;: 1t,i!ON«. A8

PRIiiE $,2DIU; C6

p([G[" l,zaN£: CE.

PfJ.GE 1. ｩＡＮｑｾ leaPAGE: 1,r:OHE. 1;1

SOr-t£MrlT:Ic J AMR1.DG BURAI)

A------------1

2345

"-_." 0ICAl

0.117 , .117 2.117 , .117 5.11;>

GJ17_rJ17 6+!!.'I,I 1"2&:RO .-;

err .1

O.!.lA' ｩＥｲＮ

J ｄｾｔｾ ,e ST"<J-Ii q! ｾｾ .. I

..D·

-15U OlKｾＮｲｾｾ

ｉｦＢｉＢｾ SlOPIL aD

-t-!SU3 '" 0

!'- __..=.1SVNO

U,.i:llJｾ n """ 0: "U

＼ＧＧｾｦｬ ,tt V" ｏｾｬ He , INT

0Ｋｾ .. ...,D--

LＢ40S"!

'--- _. 1M0, I.

Iｾｾ

, /SEMst LO 0, Ｎｮ

" 'U31 ]r --.'［ｩｾ｡ｊ gE::NGIi:"

0lk ..ＢＮｾ 1l'}t3"oOmA a, • 1 ｾｾＭﾥ

e ｾｾＫＺＱＰＰ

CJII'-----j-'10m <c - 5ｉｈｲ］ＮＭＳｾｆ

C1ｉｲｾｾｾQ' ｎ IiI< ＮＧＳＢｉｬＮＮ

CJi f O!----"--; l....--- f)t] OAC a, +t!.95V -a --I 30

ＫＱｾＱ I ------<J,

!13.... RC

ｾ- ----, 0

ｾＬｾｉ 1311{J'UAt-30O.A0,J1 - , 1U13 • , R10e. lAC P,1Tli;fi0

Ｇｾ t.e·n:

lC21 'hi'IUOB

ＱｬｴＺｾＲｉＧｾｷ［［R311 ｾ6.-1911: O,lUF

Ｇｾ..".\:0(:2 ｾ .. ,rAC

RElAV<J.Of ;i ｾ .. ｾＢ• I

11

' "

U31 9 RCU MEL"n'",""," r ' ,SO) JoTA m 6 !3U RnA-bRiOA '!1l"- . 1+0" 01 ｾ -j"':r • Q' 1 He ＢＵｾＭＭＭ

" . L-, .. ,:1lIlM ｒｾｌａ 0.'- ", ｉ

ｾ - ＭｾＵｾｎＵ HJ;.-,

!, fLL \>-.- ｾ -<....J! ｾＢ • s

I ReFERENCE: I,

ＱｦＱＧｉｴＺｾ 61-1ITCHcJ, +:!v ｲ ..J X106"', .. ｾ 0

lAC

Ｚ - "' IOOfl 0I

I ｾ 0 f.+- .-----. a,

r': ＺＬnUX (l

ＮＬ:ｯﾷｈ

ｏＺＡｾｈ .--- l"RF.. (J'-----

11M SEH5E 0;

ｾPAU

PP.G( ",lONE 01

6

1Q

R44

-l:iU

7

ｕｾ［＾

11

Ｑ

R39SHOK

11

ｾ __-_'ｾ｟ｕＬＮｕＭＢｩｒｽＬＳＸｊ｜ｆＧｲＴＭ __-,

17.<K

8

81

RO:;ｗＧＧＧＧＧ '>'!:.......----t""""-'v\I'v---1

.,500.ｾＬＬＢｈｾｒＬＬＳｦ｜｡ｦ｜ｅＺＧＭＢＭ 1 -j--_'I-""-I"

8;

c

Figure 7-6. Analog Board, Schematic Diagram, Dwg. No. 196-126 (sheet 3 of 4)

7-29/7-30


REPLACEABLE PARTS

8 7 6 5 4 :3 2 1

c

D

BI.

... SUR

5O.Jl.F

Tf'.i

SCHf:t1PoTlC .AHALOG ｡ｏａｾ

R63

,---"n!./o"--,I"H",P,,,U.>.T_-("l ｐｦｈＵ 3,EONE 05

+tSV

ＱＭｾＫＭＭｬＭＭＭＭＭｦＭＭＭＭＭｬＭＰ -. o...R

2

10K

ｒＶ

RSl(190-EliOe)

3

13 He

+1'SU

USD11 ｾ

,a

1<4 Nt

4

UNUSED GATES

H5V

C30

5

Ｍｉｾ .s RilE la

'OK

p.

67

t;

R3

. Ｋｾ

8

111

r- ＭＱｹｬ 1-_-+__---,

ｾＮＸＴｴＱｩ

_5...

PAGE 3 j cDHE Ot

ｾＺＺ］［ＺＺ［［ＺＺＺ］］］］］］］］］］］］］］Ａｾ］］］［］］］］］］］ｩ］Ａ］［］］］］］］ｉｴ］ｾ］］］ｾＺＢＭ｟ＭＭＭＭＭｦ｟］］］ｦ］］ｪＭＭ］ｩｬＭｾＺＮPASE 3.i!CltiE: 01I S C

ｾ

A

B

o

Figure 7-6. Analog Board, Schematic Diagram, Dwg. No. 19'6-126 (sheet 4 of 4)

7-31/7-32


Table 7-4. Model 196 Miscellaneous Parts List

REPLACEABLE PARTS

QtvKeithley

Description Part No.

Bottom CoverAssembly1 Bottom Cover 617-3181 Shield 617-3211 Tilt Bail 305441 DressPanelfor Tilt Bail 305871 Drive Pin for Tilt- Bail FA-143-14 Foot FE-14

Top Cover Assembly1 Top Cover 305401 Shield 617-322

Front PanelAssembly1 Front Panel 196-3021 Display Window 196-3031 Front PanelOverlay 196-3122 BananaJack,Black BJ-12-02 BananaJack,Red BJ-12-21 BananaJack,White BJ-12-98 Pushbutton,Light Brown 228-317-56 Pushbutton,Brown 228-317-61 Pushbutton,Red 29465-3

RearPanelAssembly1 RearPanel 196-3082 GroundClip 775-3062 BNC Connector CS-5202 BananaJack,Black BJ-12-02 BananaJack,Red BJ-12-21 BananaJack,White BJ-12-9 -1 Pushbutton,Red 29465-31 Line Cord CO-7

Circuit Board AssembliesL Analog Board Shield 196-3061 Analog BoardMounting Plate 196-3044 Spacer(SupportsPlateof Mother Board) 31843-1

7-3317-34


APPENDIX AASCII CHARACTER CODES AND IEEE-488 MULTILINE INTERFACE COMMAND MESSAGES

Decimal Hexadecimal ASOI IEEE-488Messages'

0 00 NUL1 01 SOH GTL2 02 STX3 03 ETX4 04 EaT SOC5 05 ENQ PPC6 06 ACK7 07 BEL

8 08 BS GET9 09 HT TCT10 OA LF11 OB VT12 OC FF13 00 CR14 OE SO15 OF SI

16 10 OLE17 11 DCl no18 12 DC219 13 DC320 14 DC4 DCL21 15 NAK PPU22 16 SYN23 17 ETB

24 18 CAN 5PE25 19 EM gPO26 1A SUB27 1B ESC28 lC FS29 10 GS30 IE RS31 IF US

• Messagesentor receivedwith ATN true.

A-1


APPEN.DIX A

ASCII CHARACTER CODES AND IEEE-4BB MULTILINE INTERFACE COMMAND MESSAGES

Decimal Hexadecimal ASCII IEEE-488Messages'

32 20 SP MLAO33 21 ! ·MLA 134 . 22 " MLA235 23 # MLA336 24 $ MLA437 25 % MLA538 26 & MLA6

39 27 MLA740 28 ( MLA841 29 ) MLA942 2A * MLA 1043 2B + MLA 1144 2C MLA 1245 2D MLA 1346 2E ｾｌ 1447 2F I MLA 15

48 30 0 MLA 1649 31 1 MLAV50 32 2 MLA 1851 33 3 MLA 1952 34 4 MLA 2053 35 .5__- MLA 2154 36 6 MLA2255 37 7 MLA23

56 38 8 MLA2457 39 9 MLA2558 3A MLA 2659 .3B MLA2760 3C < .. MLA 2861 3D ｾ MLA2962 3E > MLA 3063 3F ? UNL

* Messagesentor receivedwith PJNtrue. Numbersshownrepresentprimary addressresultingin MLA (My Listen Address).

A-2


APPENDIX A

ASCII CHARACTER CODES AND IEEE-488 MULTILINE INTERFACE COMMAND MESSAGES

Decimal Hexadecimal ASal IEEE-!88 Messages'

64 40 @ MTAO65 41 A MTA 166 42 B MTA267 43 C MTA368 44 D MTA469 45 E MTA570 46 F MTA6

71 47 G MTA772 48 H MTA873 49 I MTA974 4A J MTA 1075 4B K MTA 1176 4C L MTA 1277 4D M MTA 1378 4E N MTA1479 4F 0 MTA 15

80 50 P MTA 1681 51 Q MTA 1782 52 R MTA 1883 53 5 MTA 1984 54 T MTA2085 55 U MTA2186 56 V MTA2287 57 W MTA23

88 58 X MTA2489- 59 Y MTA2590 SA Z MTA2691 5B [ MTA2792 5C \ MTA2893 5D 1 MTA2994 5E n MTA3095 5F UNT

• Messagesentor receivedwith XfN true.Numbersshownareprimaryaddressresultingin MTA(My Thlk Address).

A-3


APPENDIX A

ASCII CHARACTER CODES AND IEEE-488 MULTILINE INTERFACE COMMAND MESSAGES

Decimal Hexadecimal ASCII IEEE-488 Messages'

96 60 MSA O,PPE'l7 61 a MSA 1,PPE98 62 b MSA 2,PPE99 63 c MSA 3,PPE100 64 d MSA 4,PPE101 65 e MSA 5,PPE102 66 f MSA 6,PPE103 67 g MSA 7,PPE

104 68 h MSA 8,PPE--105 69 i MSA 9,PPE106 6A j MSA 10,PPE107 6B k MSA 11,PPE108 6C I MSA 12,PPE109 60 m MSA 13,PPE110 6E n MSA 14,PPE111 6F 0 MSA 15,PPE

112 70 P MSA 16,PPD113 71 q MSA V,PPD114 72 r MSA 18,PPD115 73 s MSA 19,PPO116 74 t MSA 20,PPO117 75 u MSA 21,PPO118 76 v MSA22,PPO119 77 w MSA 23,PPO

120 78 x MSA 24,PPO121 79 Y MSA 25,PPO122 7A z MSA26,PPO123 7B I MSA 27,PPO124 7C MSA 28,PPO125 7D } MSA 29,PPO126 7E MSA 30,PPO127 7F OEL

'Messagesendor receivedwith ATN true. Numbersrepresentsecondaryaddressvaluesresultingin MSA (My SecondaryAddress).

A-4


APPENDIX BIBM PC/XT and MODEL 8573A PROGRAMMING

INTRODUCTION

This appendixcontainsgeneralprogramminginformationneededto controltheModel196usingtheIBM POXTper-sonalcomputervia theKeithleyModel8573AIEEE-488in-terface.Refer to the Model 8573A InstructionManualforcompleteprogramminginformation.

CONTROLLER HANDLER SOFTWARE

Beforea specificcontrollercanbeusedovertheIEEE-488bus, it musthavethe appropriateIEEE-488himdlersoft-ware installed. For the IBM computer, the necessaryhandlersoftwareis providedon diskette,along with theModel 8573A interface.

INTERFACE BASIC PROGRAMMINGSTATEMENTS

This sectioncoversthe Model 8573A statementsthat areessentialto Model196operation.A partiallist of program-ming statementsare listed in Table B-1. Each of thesestatementsusesthe IBM BASIC CALL statement,withvarious variablesas shown in the table. The commandwordssuchasIBCLR (InterfaceBus Clear)andIBSRE(In-terface Bus Send Remote Enable), are in fact BASICvariablesthemselves,whichmustbeinitializedat thestartof eachBASIC program.

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION

BeforeusingtheModel8573A,youmustconfigurethesoft-wareby usingthe procedurebelow. Note that thebinaryhandlerfIle called GPIB.COM and the systemconfigura-tion fIle calledCONFIG.SYSmustbepresenton theDOSboot disk, as describedin the Model 8573A InstructionManual.

1. Boot up your systemin the usual,mannerand enterBASICA. -- -

2. Placethe Model 8573A softwaredisk into the defaultdrive andloadtheprogramcalled"DECL. BAS". Modifytheprogramby changingthe XXXXX valuesin lines 1and2 to 16000.

3. Add the fo)lowing lines to the declarationfIle:7 HA$=' , GPI B0' , 'CALL I BF I HD ＨｾＬａＤＬｂｒｄＰ［ｾ

8 ｉＧｾａＤ］ D[I.,'0" •CALL IBFfHD(HA$-"MI96%;'9 1)/;=7' CALL I BPAD 011 90.%,1):·0

4. Now savethe modified declarationfIle for future use.Rememberthatyou mustload andrun this shortpro-grambeforepwgrammingtheModel 196over thebus.Also; do not usetheBASICCLEAR or NEW commandafter running this program.

Note: An exampleprogramusingtheIBM POXT andtheModel 8573A canbe found in Appendixe.

Table B-1. BASIC Statements Necessary to Send Bus Commands

Action Model 8573A StatementTransmitstring to device7. CALL I BURT O't 196:;, CMD$)Obtain string from device7. CALL IBRD (MI9o.%, RD$)SendGTL to device7. CALL I BLOC: 0'11 96%;'SendSDC to device7. CALL lI:CLR 0'1196:0SendDCL to all devices. Cf'1D$=CHR$ ＨｾＬ 14;' 'CALL lI:CMD ＨｂｒｄＰＺｾ Cf'1D$;'Sendremoteenable. 1)%=1' CALL IBSRE<BRD0:" I.);;)

Cancelremoteenable. ｾｊ［［］Ｐ CALL IBSRE(BRD0:" \):0Serialpoll device7. - CMD$=CHR:t C8,H 11;' • CALL I BCMD (Bf':D0/;, CMD$)SendLocal Lockout. CALL I BR8P ＨｾＱＱ 96%, 8B/;;'SendGET to device. CALL IBmG 0'11 %%)Send!Fe. CALL IB8IC (BRD0;;)

-, .-

8-1/8-2


APPENDIX CCONTROLLER PROGRAMS

Thefollowing programshavebeensuppliedasa simpleaid to the userandarenot intendedtosuit specificneeds.Eachprogramallowsyou to senda device-dependentcommandstringto theinstrumentand obtainanddisplayan instrumentreadingstring.

Programsfor the following controllersareincluded:

• ffiM PC or XT (with Keithley Model 8573A IEEE-488Interface)• Apple II (equippedwith the Apple II IEEE-488Interface)• Hewlett-PackardModel 85• Hewlett·PackardModel 9816• Hewlett"PackardModel 9825A• DEC LSI 11• PET/CBM 2001

C·1


APPENDIX C

IBM PC OR XT (KEITHLEY MODEL 8573A INTERFACE)

The following programsendsa commandstring to theModel 196from an IBM PC or XT comeputeranddisplaysthe instrumentreadingstring on the CRT. The computermustbeequippedwith theKeithleyModel8573AIEEE-488InterfaceandtheDOS2.00operatingsystem.Model8573Asoftwaremustbe installedandconfiguredas describedin the instructionmanual.

DIRECTIONS

1. Using the front panelprogramfeature,set the primary addressof the Model 196 to 7.2. With the power off, connect·the Model 196 to the IEEE-488 interfaceinstalled in the IBM

computer.3. Type in BASICA on thecomputerkeyboardto get into the IBM interpretiveBASIC language.4. Placetheinterfacesoftwarediscin thedefaultdrive, tYPeLOAD''DE:Ct;andpressthereturnkey.5. Add the lines below to lines1-6 which arenow in memory.Modify theaddressin lines1 and

2, as descTIoedin the Model 8573A InstructionManual.6. Run the programand type.in the desiredcommandstring. For example,to placethe instru-

ment in the ACV function arid autorange,type in FlROX and pressthe return key.7. Theinstrumentreadingstringwill thenappearon thedisplay.Forexample,thedisplaymight

show NDCV+O.OOOOOOE+O.8. To exit the program,type in EXIT at the commandprompt and pressthe return key.

PROGRAM

10 CLS20 NA$=' 'GPIB0' , 'CALL IBFIND

O,A$, BRD0:;):1:.0 rlA$.= , , IIH.11 " 'CALL Il::F I ND

ＨｎａＤＬｍＱＹｦＧＮＬｾ

40 U;';=7 'CALL I BPAD <111 96:; ,1.,1:,;)

50 ｉＩＥ］ｾＬ 102' CALL I BPOKE ＨｂｒｄＰＬｾ Ii:·;)60 U:;=1 'CALL IBSRE(BRDI3::, U:O70 INPUT' ＧｃｏｍｴＱａｾ＼ STRING" ;CMD$80 IF OlD$= , , DU T' ' THE!, 151}90 IF CMD$=" " THEN 70

100 CALL IBWRT(to1196,;,CMD$)110 RD$=SPACE$ ( 100)120 CALL IBRD<ll196%, F.:D$)130 PRItH RD$140 GOTO 70150 l):;=0 ' CALL I BONL (M 196:'; ,I):U·160 CALL I BONU BRII0%, I),:)170 END

COMMENTS

Gear screen.Find boarddescriptor.

Find instrumentdescriptor.

Set primary addressto 7.Set timeouts.SetREN true.Promptfor command.Seeif programis to be halted.Checkfor null input.:Address196 to listen, sendstring.Defmereadinginput buffer.Address196 to talk, get reading.Display the string.Repeat.Closethe instrumentfile.Closethe boardfile.

NOTE: For conversionto numericvariable, makethe following changes:

130 ｒｄ］ｬＮｊａｌＰＱｉｄＤＨｒｄＤ 5,14)135 PRINT RD

C-2


APPENDIX C

APPLE II (APPLE II IEEE-488 INTERFACE)

The following programsendsa commandstring to the Model 196 from an Apple II computerand displaysthe instrumentreadingstring o_nthe computerCRT.

The computermust be equippedwith the Apple II IEEE-48B Interfaceinstalledin slot 3.

DIRECTIONS

1. Using the front panelprogramfeature,set the primary addressof the Model 196 to 7.2. With the poweroff, connectthe Model 196 to the IEEE-4BB interfaceinstalledin the Apple II

computer.3. Enter the lines in the programbelow, using the RETURN key after eachline.4. Runthe programandtypdnthedesiredcommandstringat thecommandprompt.For exam-

ple, to placethe instrumentin ACV andautorange,type in FlROX andpressthe return key.5. The instrument reading string will then appear on the CRT. A typical display is:

NDCV+O.OOOOOOE+O.

PROGRAM

10 Z$=CHR$(26)20 I1,PUT' ' COt1rlAND STRI NG ? ' , ; B$3(1 PR#340 m#350 PRIIH ' 'RA' ,60 F'RHJT' 'fH' ";Z$.,B$7'3 PRIIH "LF1"8(1 PRIHT "RDG" ; Z$; : HiPUT" ＢＮｾＭａＤ

90 PRIHT "UP'100PR#0110 IH#012(1 PRHJT A$-13(1 GOm 20

NarES:

COMMENTS

Terminator.Prompt for and entercommandstring.Set output to IEEE-4BB bus.Define input froriIIEEE-488 bus.Enableremote. _ .Address196 to listen, sendstring.-Line feed on.Address196 to talk, input data.UntaIk the 196.Define.output to CRT.Define input from keyboard.Display readingstring.Reeeat.

1. If conversionto numericvaria!:>le is required,makethe following changes:

12'3 A=IJAL 011 D$ (At, 5, 16»)125 PRIHT A

2. TheApple II terminatesoncommasin thedatastring. To avoidproblems,programtheModel196 for the BOGO or BOG1 dataformat to eliminatecommas.

C-3


APPENOIXC

HEWLETT-PACKARD MODEL 85

Thefollowing programsendsa commandstring to the Model 196from anHP-85computeranddisplaysthe instrumentreadingstring on the computerCRT. The computermustbe equippedwith the HP82937GPIB Interfaceandan 110 ROM.

DIRECTIONS

1. Using the front panelprogramfeature,setthe primary addressof the Model 196 to 7.2. With thepoweroff, connecttheModel196to theHP82937AGPIBinterfaceinstalledin theHP-85

computer.3. Enterthe lines in the programbelow, usingthe END LINE key after eachline.4. Pressthe HP-85RUN key andtype in the desiredcommandstring at thecommandprompt.

Forexample,to placetheinstrumentin AOIandautorange,typein FlROX andpresstheENDLINE key.

5. The instrument reading string will then appear on the CRT. A typical display is:NDOI+O.OOOOOOE+O.

PROGRAM

10 DIt1 AH251, B$[25120 REt10TE 70730 DISP" COMMAND STRING";40 INPUT A$50 OUTPUT 707; A$60 ENTER 707; B$70 DISP B$80 GOTO 3090 END

COMMENTS

Dimensionstrings.Place196 in remote.Promptfor command.Input commandstring.Address196 to listen, sendstring.Address196 to talk, input reading..Display readingstring.Repeat

NOTE: For conversionto numericvariable, changeline 70 asfollows:

70 DISP lJAL<B$[51)

C-4


APPENDIX C

ｈｅｗｌｅｔｔＭｐｾｋａｒ MODEL 9816

Thefollowing programsendsa commandstringto theModel 196from a Hewlett-PackardModel9816computeranddisplaysthe instrumentreadingstringon the computerCRT. Thecomputermustbe equippedwith the HP82937GPIB InterfaceandBASIC 2.0.

DIRECfIONS

1. Using the front panelprogramfeature,set the primary addressof the Model 196 to 7.2. With thepoweroff, connecttheModel196to theHP82937AGPIB interfaceinstalledin the9816

computer.3. Type EDIT and pressthe EXEC key.4. Enterthe lines in the programbelow, usingthe ENTER key after eachline.5. Pressthe9816RUN key andtypein thedesiredcommandstringat thecommandprompt.For

example,to placetheinstrumentin ACV andautorange,typein FlROX andpresstheENTERkey.6. The instrument reading string will then appear on the CRT. A typical display is:

NDCV+O.OOOOOOE+O.

PROGRAM

10 REMOTE 70715 DIt1 A$[25J, B$[25J20 INPUT" COMMAND STRING", A$30 OUTPUT 707 i A$40 ENTER 707.: B$50 PRINT B$60 GOTO 2070 END

COMMENTS

Place196 in remote.

Promptfor and input command.Address196 to listen, sendstring.Address196 to talk, input reading.Display readingstring.Repeat.

NOTE: For conversionto a numericvariable,changethe programas follows:

40 ENTER 707; B50 PRINTB

c·s


APPENDIX C

HEWL:ETT-PACKARD MODEL 9825A

Usethefollowing programto senda commandstring to-theModel 196from a Hewlett-PackardModel 9825A anddisplaythe instrumentreadingstringon the computerprinter. Thecomputermustbe equippedwith the HP98034AHPIB Interfaceanda 9872A extended1/0 ROM.

DIRECTIONS

1. Fro!!f the front panel,set the primary addressof the Model 196 to 7.2. With thepoweroff, connecttheModel 196to the98034AHPIB interfaceinstalledin the9825A.3. Enterthe lines in theprogrambelow, usingthe SIORE key aftereachline. Line numbersare

automaticallyassignedby the 9825A.4. Pressthe 9825ARUN key andtype-in the desiredcommandstringat thecommandprompt.

Forexample,to placetheinstrumentin AOIandautorange,typein FlROX andpresstheCONTkey.

5. The instrumentreadingstringwill thenappearon thecomputer printout. A typical displayis: NDOI+O.OOOOOOE+O.

PROGRAM

[, dim AH25l, B$[25l1 dev' .; 196' ｾ ,712172 rem'; Ii' 196' ," ent' , Cor1MAI·jD 8TF: IHG' , ,B$4 ｷｲｴｾＧ 196' ',B$5 red' .; 196' , ,A$6 prt A$7 gto :5

COMMENTS

Dimensiondatastrings.Define 196 at address7.Place196 in remote.Promptfor commandstring.Address196 to listen, sendstring.Address196 to talk, input data.Print datastring on printer.Repeat.

NOTE: For conversionto numericvariable, modify the programas follows:

6 prt vaIO::A$[5l)

e-6


APPENDIX C

DEC LSI 11

Thefollowing programsendsa commandstring to the Model 196from a DEC LSI 11 minicom-puteranddisplaysthe instrumentreadingstringon the DEC CRT terminal.The LSI 11 mustbeconfiguredwith 16K wordsof RAM andanIBV 11 IEEE-488interface.Thesoftwaremustbecon-figured with the IB softwareas well as FORTRAN and the RT 11 oJ2eratingsystem.

DIRECTIONS

1. Using the front panelprogramfeature,set the primary addressof the Model 196 to Z2. With the poweroff, connectthe Model 196 to the lBV 11 IEEE-488interfacecable.3. Enter the programbelow, usingthe editor underRT 11 and the nameIEEE.FOR.4. Compileusing the FORTRAN compiler as follows: FORTRAN IEEE.5. Link with the systemand IB libraries as follows: LINK IEEE,lBLIB.6. Type RUN IEEE andpressthe RETURN key.Z The display will read"ENTER ADDRESS".8. Type in 7 andpressthe RETURN key.9. The display will read"TEST SETUP".

10. Type in the desiredcommandstringand pressthe RETURN key. For example, toprogramthe instrumentfor ACV andautorange,type in FlROX and pressRETURN.

11. The instrumentdata string will appearon the computer display. A typical display is:NDCV+O.OOOOOOE+O.

PROGRAM

PROGRAM IEEEINTEGER.,2 ｐｒｉａｄｆLOGICAL.,l MSG(80),INPUT(80)D02 1=1.10CALL IBSTE":( 1,0)

2 CONTINUEｃａｌｌｉｂｓｔｅｒＨＱＵｾＵ

CALL IBTHI0(120)CALL IBTERM(10)CALL IBREN

4 T\'PE 55 FORt1AT (IX, 'EtHER ADDRESS",$)

ACCEPT 10,PRI ADR10 FORt1AT (12)12 TYPE 1515 FORt1AT ( ｬＺｾ ' TE'3T SETUP', , $)

CALL GETSTR (5, !'lSG, 72)CALL IBSEOI (MSG,-l,PRIADR)

18 I=IBRECU (INPUT,80,PRIADR)INPUT (1+1) = '3CALL PUTSTR (7, INPUT, "3' )CALL IBUNTGOTO 12EtjD

COMMENTS

Turn off merrorS.

Allow 5 error 15's.Allow 1 secondbus timeout.Setline feed as terminator.Turn on remote.

Input primary address.

Promptfor commandstring.Programinstrumento-Address196 to listen, sendstring.Get datafrom instrument.

Untalk the 196.Repeat.

e-7


APPENDIX C

PET/CBM 2001

The following programsendsa commandstring to the Model196Irom a PET/CBM 2001 com-puteranddisplaysthe instrumentreadingstringon the computerCRT. As the PET/CBM com-puterhasa standardIEEE-488interface,no additionalequipmentis necessary.

DIRECTIONS

1. Using the front panelprogramfeature,set the primary addressof the Model 196 to 7.2. With the poweroff, connectthe Model 196 to the PET/CBM IEEE-488interface.3. Enter the lines of the programbelow, using the RETURN key after eachline is typed.4. TypeRUNandpresstheRETURNkey. Typein the desiredcommandstringat thecommand

prompt.Forexample,to placetheinstrumentin ACV andautorange,typein FlROX andpressthe RETURN key.

5. The instrument reading string will then appear on the CRT. A typical display is:NDCV+O.OOooooE+O.

PROGRAM

10 OPEN 1,720 INPUT' , CDt1MAND STR I NG' , ; B$30 PRINT#l, B$40 INPUT#l, A$50 IF ST=2 THEN 4060 PRINT A$70 GOTO 20

NOTES:

COMMENTS

Openfile 1, primary address7.Promptfor, input commandstring.Address196 to listen, sendstring.Address196 to talk, input data.If bus timeout, input again.Display readingstring.Repeat.

1. If conversionto numericvariableis required,modify the programas follows:

70 A =l)AUMID$(A$, 5,15»80 PRINT' 'A=";A90 GOTO 20

2. ThePETterminatesoncommasin thedatastring.To avoidproblems,programtheModel 196for the BOGO or BOG1 dataformat to eliminatecommas.

C-s


BUS DESCRIPTION

TheIEEE-488bus,which is alsofrequentlyreferredto asthe GPIB (GeneralPurposeInterfaceBus),wasdesignedasaparalleltransfermediumto optimiZedatatransferwithaminimumnumberof buslines.In keepingwith thisgoal,thebushaseightdatalinesthatareusedbothfor dataandmanycommands.Additionally, thebushasfive manage-mentlines,which areusedto controlbusoperation,andthreehandshakelinesthatareusedto controlthedatabytetransfersequence.

A typical configurationfor controlled bus operationisshownin FigureB-1. A typical systemwill haveonecon-troller andoneor moredevicesto which commandsaregiven and, in most cases,from which data is received.Generally,therearethreecategoriesthat describedeviceoperation:controller, talker, andlistener.

Thecontrollerdoeswhatits nameimplies: it controlsotherdevicesonthebus.A talkersendsdata(usuallyto thecon-troller), anda listenerreceivesdata.Dependingon thein-strument,aparticulardevicemaybea talker only, alisteneronly, or both a talker anda listener.The Model 196 hasboth talker andlistenercapabilities.

Therearetwo categoriesof controllers:systemcontrollerandbasiccontroller.Bothareabletocontrolotherdevices,but only the systemcontrollerhasabsoluteauthority inthesystem.In asystemwith morethanonecontroller,onlyonecontrollermay be active at any given time. Certaincommandprotocolallows control to bepassedfrom. onecontroller to another.

Thebusis limited to 15 devices,includingthe controller.Thus,anynumberof devicesmaybepresenton thebusatonetime. Althoughseveralactivelistenersmaybepre-sentsimultaneously,only oneactivetalkermaybepresenton the bus, or communicationswould be scrambled.

APPENDIX DIEEE-488 BUS OVERVIEW

TO OTHER DEVICESｾ

DEVICE 1 .400 m1ABLE TO

ｾTALK. LISTENAND CONTROL E(COMPUTER) DATA BUS

OEVICE 2ABLE TO

ｾTALK ANO DATA BYTELISTEN I:::(196) TRANSFER

CONTROL

DEVICE 3ONLY ABLE :::lO LISTEN = GENERALPRINTER) INTERFACE

MANAGEMENT

DEVICE +:::ONLY ABLE

TO TALK =,--} 0101 ••• 8 DATA

'-- ( 8 LINES)

'-OAV}--NRFD HANDSHAKE-NDAC

"'}ATN BUSSRQ MANAGEMENTRENEOI

Figure 0-1. IEEE Bus Configuration

0·1


APPENDIX 0

A deviceis placedin thetalkor listenmodefrom thecon-troller by sendinganappropriatetalk or listencommand.Thesetalk andlistencommandsarederivedfrom anin-strument'sprimary address.The primary addressmayhaveany valuebetween0 and30 andis generallysetpyrearpanelswitchesor programmedin from thefront panel(as in the caseof the Model 196). The actuallisten com-mandvalue sentover the bus is derivedby ORing theprimary addresswith $20 (the $ symbol precedingthenumberdesignatesa hexadecimal,or base16 value).Forexample,if the primary addressis 7 (the default Model196value),theactuallistencommandbytevalueis $27($07+ $20 = $27). In asimilar manner,thetalk commandbyteis derivedby ORing theprimary addresswith $40. Witha primary addressof 7, the actual talk commandbytewould be $47 ($40 + $07 = $47).

The IEEE-488standardsalso includeanotheraddressingmode called secondaryaddressing.Secondaryaddressbytevalueslie in therangeof$60-$7F.Note, however,thatmanydevices,includingtheModel196,donotusesecon-dary addressing.

Oncethedeviceis properlyaddressed,bustransmissionsequencesaresetto takeplace.For example,if an.instru-ment is addressedto talk, it will usuallyoutputIts-datastringon thebusonebyteat a time. Theliste.ning ､･ｾ｣(frequentlythecontroller)will thenreadthiS informationas transmitted. 0

BUS LINES

ThesignallinesontheIEEE-48Sbusaregroupedinto threecategories:datalines, managementlines,andhandshakelines.Theeightdatalineshandlebusdataandmanycom-mands,while themanagementandhandshakelines en-sureorderlybusoperation.Eachbusline is activelow withapproximatelyzerovolts representinglogic 1 (true). Thefollowing paragraphsbriefly describethe operation oftheselines.

Data Lines

Thebususeseightdatalines to transmitandreceIve'datain bit-parallel,byteserialfashton.Theselinesusethecon-ventionDl01-DIOSinsteadof themorecommon00-07.DIal is the leastsignificantbit, while DlOS is the mostsignificantbit. Thedatalinesarebidirectional(with mostdevices),and,aswith theremainingbuslines, low is con-sideredto be true.

0·2

Bus Management Lines

The five bus managementlines ensureproperinterfacecontrol and management.Theselines are usedto send

o uniline commands.

ATN (Attention)-Thestateof ATN determineshow infor-mationon the datalines is to be interprete.d.

Il'C (InterfaceQear)-IFCallows the clearing of activetalkersor listenersfrom the bus.

REN (RemoteEnable)-RENis usedto placedevicesinthe remote mode:Usually, devicesmust be in remotebeforethey can be programmedover the bus.

EO! (End Or Identify)-EO! is usedto mark the endofa multi-bytedatatransfersequence.EOI is alsousedalongwith ATN, to sendthe IDY (identify) messagefor parallelpolling.

-SRQ(ServiceRequest)-SRQis usedby devicesto requestservicefrom the controller.

Handshake Lines

Threehandsh<li<elines that operatein an interlockedse-o quenceare used to ensurereliable data transmission

regardlessof thetransferrate.Generally,datatransferwilloccurat aratedeterminedby theslowestactivedeviceonthe bus. Thesehandshakelines are:

DAV (Data Valid)-The source(talker) controls the stateof DAV to indicate to any listenerswhendatais valid.

NRFD (Not ReadyFor Data)-Theacceptor(listener)con-trols thestateof NRFD. It is usedto signalthe transmit-ting deviceto holdoff thebytetransfersequenceuntll theacceptingdeviceis ready.

NDAC (Not DataAccepted)-NDACis alsocontrolledbythe acceptingdevice.The stateof NDAC tells thesourcewhetheror not the devicehasacceptedthe databyte.

Figure0-2 showsthe basichandshakesequen.cefor thetransmissionof ohe databyte. This sequenceIS usedtotrarISferdata,talk andlistenaddresses,aswell asmultllinecommands.


ｾＧ ---JX SOURCE

DATA SOURCE

APPENDIX D

BUS COMMANDS

Commandsassociatedwith the IEEE-488 bus can begroupedinto thefollowing threegeneralcategories.Referto Table D-l.

NRFO

NDAC

VALID

ACCEPTOR

IACCEPTOR

Uniline Commands-Thesecommandsareassertedby sel-ting the associatedbus line true. For example,to assertREN (RemoteEnable), the REN line would besetlow(true).

Multiline Commands-Generalbuscommandswhicharesentover the datalines with the ATN line true.

DATATRANSFER

BEGINS

DATATRANSFER

ENDS

Device-dependentCommands-Commandswhosemean-ingsdependon thedevicein question.Thesecommandsare transmittedvia the datalines while ATN is false.

Figure 0-2. IEEE Handshake Sequence

Table 0-1. IEEE-488 Bus Command Summary

StateofCommandType Command ATN Line" CommentsUniline REN (RemoteEnable) X Setsup devicesfor remoteoJ1eration.

EOI - X Marks endof transmission.\FC (InterfaceClear) X ClearsInterface.ATN (Attention) Low Definesdatabuscontents.SRQ X Controlledby externaldevice.

MultilineUniversal LW (Local Lockout) Low Locks out local operation.

DCL (Device Clear) Low Returnsdeviceto default.conditions.SPE(SerialEnable) Low Enablesserial polling.SPD SerialPoll Disable) Low Disablesserial polling.

Addressed SDC (selectiveDeviceClear) Low Returnsunit to default conditions.GTL (Go To Local) Low Returnsdeviceto local.GET (Group ExecuteTrigger) Low Triggersdevicefor reading.

Unaddressed UNL (Unlisten) Low Removesall listenersfrom bus.UNT (Untalk) Low Removesany talkersfrom bus.

Device-dependent High ProgramsModel 196 for variousmodes.

"Don't Care.

0·3


APPENDIX 0

Uniline Commands

Thefive unilinecommandsincludeREN, EO!, IFC, ATN,andSRQ.Eachcommandis associatedwith a dedicatedbus line, which is set low to assertthe commandinquestion.

REN (RemoteEnable)-RENis assertedby thecontrollerto set up instrumentson the bus for remoteoperation.WhenREN is true,deviceswill be removedfrom thelocalmode.Dependingondeviceconfiguration,all front panelcontrols except the LOCAL button (if the device is soequipped)maybelockedoutwhenRENis true.General-ly, RENshouldbeassertedbeforeattemptingto programinstrumentsover the bus.

EOI (Endor Identify)-EOImaybeassertedeitherby thecontrolleror by externaldevicesto identify the last byte.in a multi-bytetransfersequence,allowing datawordsofvariouslengthsto be transmitted.

IFC GnterfaceClear)-IFCis assertedby thecontrollertocleartheinterfaceandreturnall devicesto thetalkerandlisteneridle states.

.ATN (Attention)-ThecontrollerassertsATN while sen-ding addressesor multiline commands.

SRQ(ServiceRequest)-SRQis assertedby a deviceonthe buswhen it requiresservicefrom the controller..

Universal Multiline Commands

Universalmultiline commandsarethosecommandsthatrequiredno addressingaspartof thecommandsequence.All devicesequippedto implementthesecommandswilldo so simultaneouslywhenthecommandsaretransmit-ted.As with all multiline commands,thesecommandsaretransmittedwith fUN true.

LW (Local Lockout)-LLO is sentto instrumentsto lockout front panelor local operationof the instrument.

DCL (DeviceClear)-DCLis usedto returninstrumentsto some default state. Usually, devicesreturn to theirpower-upconditions.

SPE(SerialPoll Enable)-SPEis thefirst stepin theserialpolling sequence,which is usedto determinewhich deviceon the bus is requestingservice.

0-4

SPD(SerialPoll Disable)-SPDis usedby thecontrollerto removeall devicesonthebusfrom theserialpoll modeand is generallythe last commandin the serial pollingsequence.

Addressed Multiline Commands

Addressedmultiline commandsarethosecommandsthatmustbeprecededby anappropriatelistenaddressbeforetheinstrumentwill respondto thecommandin question.Note that only the addresseddevicewill respondto thecommand.Both thecommandandtheaddressprecedingit aresentwith ATN true.

SDC (SelectiveDeviceClear)-TheSDCcommandper-formsessentiallythesamefunctionasDCL exceptthaton-ly theaddresseddeviceresponds.Generally,instrumentsreturnto theirpower-updefaultconditionswhenrespon-ding to SDC.

GTL (Go To Local)-GTL is usedto removeinstrumentsfrom theremotemodeandplacethemin local. With manyinstruments,GTL mayalsorestoreoperationof front panelcontrolsif previouslylockedout.

GET (Group Execute'frigger)-GET is used to triggerdevicesto performa specificaction that will dependondeviceconfiguration(for example,performameasurementsequence).Although GET is an addressedcommand,manydevicesmay respondto GET without addressing.

Address Commands

Addressedcommandsinclude two primary commandgroups,andasecondaryaddressgroup.ATN is truewhenthesecommandsareasserted.Thesecommandsinclude:

LAG (ListenAddressGroup)-Theselistencommandsarederived from an instrument'sprimary addressand areusedto addressdevicesto listen.Theactualcommandbyteis obtainedby ORing the primary addresswith $20.

TAG (Talk AddressGroup)-Thetalk commandsarede-rivedfrom theprimaryaddressbyORingtheaddresswith$40. Talk commandsareusedto addressdevicesto talk.

SCG(SecondaryCommandGroup)-Commandsin thisgroup provide additional addressingcapabilities.Manydevices (including the Model 196) do not use thesecommands.


Unaddress Commands

Thetwo unaddresscommandsareusedby thecontrollerto removeanytalkersor listenersfrom thebus.AIN is truewhen thesecommandsare asserted.

UNL (Unlisten)-Listenersareplacedin the listeneridlestateby UNL.

UNT (Untalk)-Any previouslycommandedtalkerswillbe placedin the talker idle stateby UNT.

Device-Dependent Commands

Thepurposeof device-dependentcommandswill dependon instrumentconfiguration.Generally,thesecommands

APPENDIX D

aresentasoneor moreASCII charactersthatcommandthe deviceto performa specificaction.For example,thecommandstringROX is usedto controlthemeasurementrangeof the Model 196.

The IEEE-488bustreatsthesecommandsasdatain that-AIN is false when the commandsare transmitted.

Command Codes

Commandcodesfor thevariouscommandsthat usethedatalinesaresummarizedin Figure 0-3. Hexadecimalandanddecimalvaluesfor the variouscommandsarelistedin Table0-2.

0·5


D, X X X X X X X XD, 0 0 0 0 I I I ID5 0 0 I PR1MARY I PlUMM<Y 0 PR1MARY 0 1'1UMA11Y I ID. 0 COMMAND 1 COMMAND 0 ADDRESS 1 ADDRESS 0 ADDRESS 1 ADORESS 0 1

BrtS

II, D, D, D COLUMN_I I I I ROWI ll(A) O(B) l{A) ｉｾ .A) ,B) ｾａ 'lB) ｾａｾｂ .Al .Bl .A) 6(B) 7(A) Ｌｾ

0 0 0 B 0 NUL DLE ., 0 0 ｾ 0 D P W P

0 0 0 1 1 50H en. Del LI.O I 1 1 17 A 1 Q 17 · ,0 0 1 0 , SO< = · , ,

ｾ B , R ｾ b ,0 0 1 1 3 SO< DO , 3 3 " C 5 19 , •0 I 0 0 • £Dr 5DC DC. DCL • • • " D • T " , I

0 1 0 0 5 ENQ FPC" NAK PPU' • 5 5 n E 5 U " • "0 1 1 B , Act< 5YN • , ,

", , V " I •

0 1 1 1 , BEL trrB , ," G , W " g w

1 0 0 B 8 B8 GIiT CAN 5FE I 8 8 " " 8 X " b •1 B 0 1 9 HT = EM 5FD ) 9 9 " I 9 Y " i YI B 1 0 ｾ LP SUB ID 26 J ｾ Z 26 j •I 0 I 1 n VI ESC • n , Xl K n I Xl k (

I 1 0 0 12 FF FS 12 < " L 12 \ " 1

1 1 0 I ｾ CR G5 ｾ - " Io! D J " m I1 I 1 0 H 50 R5 H > '" N H n '" • -1 I 1 1 D 51 UB I D ? UNL 0 D - UNT • DEL

___11_-

"TllQ'cic?>g33III::Ja.gm ADDRESSED

COMMANDGROUP(ACG)

UNIVERSALCOMMAND

GROUP(UeG)

UtrrBNADDRESSGROUP('.AGJ

PR1MARYCOMMAND

GROUP(PCG)

ｓｅｃｏｾ

COMMANDGROUP(SDC)

I"

"FPC (pARALLEL POLL CONFIGURE). PPU (pARALlEL POLL UNCONFIGlJRE). ANDTCr (TAKB CONTROL) Nor IMPLEMENtED BY MODa 196.

NOTE: DO .. 0101 . ｾ .. 0108

X .. oomCARE

Table 0-2. Hexadecimal and Decimal CommandCodes

-Command Hex Value Decimal Value

GTL 01 1SDC 04 4GET 08 8LLO 11 17DCL 14 20SPE 18 24SPD 19 25LAG 20-3F 32-63TAG 40-5F 64-95SGC 60-7F 96-127UNL 3F 63UNT SF 95

Typical Command Sequences

For the various multiline commands,a specific bus se-quencemust takeplaceto properlysendthe command.In particular,thecorrectlistenaddressmustbesentto theinstrumentbeforeit will respondto addressedcommands.TableD-3 lists a typical bussequencefor sendIngan ad-dressedmultiline command.In this instance,the SDCcommandis beingsentto theinstrument.UNL is generallysentaspartof thesequenceto ensurethatno otheractivelistenersarepresent.Note that ATN is true for both thelisten commandand the SDC commandbyte itself.

Table 0-3. Typical Addressed Command Sequence

. --,- Ｍ

DataBusStep CommandATN State ASCII Hex Decimal

1 UNL Set low ? 3F 632 LAG* Stayslow

,T7 39

3 SDC Stayslow EOT 04 44 Returnshigh

*Assumesprimary address= 7.

ThbleD-4 givesa typical device-dependentcommandse-quence.In this instance,ATN is truewhile theinstrumentis beingaddressed,but it is set high while sendIngthedevice-dependentcommandstring.

APPENDIX D

Table 0-4. Typical Device-Dependent CommandSequence

DataBus

Step CommandATN State ASCII Hex Decimal1 UNL Set low ? 3F 632 LAG* Stayslow

,27 39

3 Data Sethigh R 52 824 Data Stayshigh 0 30 485 Data Stayshigh X 58 88

*Assumesprimary address= 7.

IEEE Command Groups

Commandgroupssupportedby theModel 196arelistedin TableD-5. Device-dependentcommandsarenot includ-ed in this list.

Table 0·5. IEEE Command Group

HANDSHAKE COMMAND GROUPDAC=DATA ACCEPTEDRFD=READY FOR DATADAV=DATA VALID

UNIVERSAL COMMAND GROUPATN =ATIENTIONDCL=DEVICE CLEARIFC=lNTERFACE CLEARLLO=LOCAL LOCKOUTREN=REMOTEENABLESPD=SERIALPOLL DISABLESPE=SERIALPOLL ENABLE

ADDRESS COMMAND GROUNUSTEN: LAG=USTEN ADDRESSGROUP

MLA=MY LISTEN ADDRESSUNL=UNLISTEN

TALK: TAG=TALK ADDRESS GROUPMTA=MY TALK ADDRESSUNT=UNTALKOTA=OTHER TALK ADDRESS

ADDRESSEDCOMMAND GROUPACG=ADDRESSEDCOMMAND GROUP.GET=GROUPEXECUTE TRIGGERGTL=GO TO LOCALSDC=SELECTIVECLEAR

STATUS COMMAND GROUPRQS=REQUESTSERVICESRQ=SERIALPOLL REQUESTSTB=STATUSBYTEEOI=BND

D-7/D-8


Device-Dependent Command Summary

Mode Command DescriptionExecute X Executeotherdevice-dependentcommands.Function FO DC volts

Fl AC voltsF2 OhmsF3 DC currentF4 AC currentF5 ACVdBF6 ACAdBF7 Offset-compensatedohms

RangeOffset

CompensatedDCV ACV DCA ACA Ohms AcY dB ACA dB Ohms

RO Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto AutoR1 300mV 300mV 300 ｾ 300 ｾ 300ll Auto Auto AutoR2 3 V 3 V 3mA 3mA 3kll Auto Auto 3k IIR3 30 V 30mV 30mA 30mA 30kll Aulo Auto 30kllR4 300 V 300 V 300mA300mA 300 kll Auto Auto 30kllR5 300 V300 V 3 A 3 A 3Mll Auto Auto 30kllR6 300 V 300 V 3 A 3 A 30Mll Auto Auto 30 kllR7 300 V 300 V 3 A 3 A 300Mll Auto Auto 30kll

Zero ZO Zero disabledZl Zero enabledZ2 Zero enabledusing a zero value (V)

Filter PO Filter disabledPn Filter on with a value of n (n=1 to 99)

Rate Resolution

OffsetCompensated

DCV ACV DCA ACA OHMS ACV dB ACA dB Ohms

50 3'kd 3Y,d 3'kd 3'kd 3'kd(Rl-R4) SV,d SV,d SY,dSV,d(R5-R7)

51 4V,d 4'hd 4'kd 4V,d 4V,d(Rl-R4) SY,d SV,d SV,d

SV,d(R5-R752 S'kd S'kd S'kd 5'kd S'kd 5

'M 5'kd 5V,d

53 6V,d SY,d 5'kd SY,d 6V,d(Rl-R6) 5V,d 5V,d 6Y,dSV,d(R7)

Integrationperiod: 3'hd=31Spsec,4Y2d=2.59msec,5'hdand 6'hd=Unecycle

Trigger Mode 10 Continuouson TalkT1 One-shoton ThlkT2 Continuouson GET1'3 One-shoton GETT4 Continuouson XT5 One-shoton XT6 Continuouson ExternalTriggerT7 One-shoton ExternalTrigger

ReadingMode BO Readingsfrom AID converterB1 Readingsfrom datastore


Device-Dependent Command Summary (Cont.)

Mode Command DescriDtionDataStoreSize IO Continuousdatastoremode

In Datastoreof n (n=1 to 500)DataStoreInterval QO One-shotinto buffer

Qn n=interval in milliseconds(lrnsecto 999999rnsec)Value V±nn.nnnnor Calibrationvalue, zero value

V±n.nnnnnnE+nCah"bration CO Calibratefirst point usingvalue (V)

Cl Calibratesecondpoint usinevalue (V)Default Conditions LO Restorefactory default conditions

L1 Storepresentmachinestatesas default conditionsDataFormat GO Readingwith prefixes

Gl Readingwithout prefixesG2 Buffer readingswith prefixesandbuffer locationsG3 Buffer readingswithout prefixesandwith buffer locationsG4 Buffer readingswith prefixesand without buffer locationsG5 Buffer readingswithout prefIXesand without buffer

locationsSRQ MO Disable

Ml ReadingoverflowM2 Data storefullM4 Datastorehalf fullM8 ReadingdoneM16 ReadyM32 Error

EOI andBus Hold-off I<D EnableEOI andbus hold-off on XK1 DisableEOI, enablebushold-off on XK2 EnableEOI, disablebushold-off on XK3 Disableboth EOI andbus hold-off on X

Terminator YO CRLFY1 LFCRY2 CRY3 LF

Status UO SendmachinestatuswordU1 Senderror conditionsU2 Sendtranslatorword.U3 Sendbuffer sizeU4 Sendaveragereadingin bufferU5 Sendlowest readingin bufferU6 Sendhighest-readingin bufferU7 Sene!currentvalueU8 Sendinput switch status(front/rear)

Auto/Cal Multiplex AO Auto/Cal Multiplex disabledAl Auto/Cal Multiolex enabled

Delav Wn n=delavperiod in milliseconds,(Ornsecto 6oooornsec)Self-test JO Test, ROM, RAM, E'PROMHit Button Hn Hit front panelbuttonnumbernDisplay Da Display up to 10 charactermessage.a=character

D CanceldlSplav modeInternalFilter NO Internal exponentialfilter off

Nl Internal exponentialfilter on


KEITHLEY

Service Form

_________SerialNo.ModelNo.

Namearid TelephoneNo.

Company

Date _

List all controlsellings,describeproblemandcheckboxesthatapplyto problem. _

o Intennittent

o IEEE failureo Frontpaneloperational

Displayor output(checkone)

o Driftso Unstableo Overload

o Analogoutputfollows display

o Obviousproblemｯｲ［ｾｰｯｷ･ｲＭｵ

o All rangesor functionsarebad

o Unabletozero---

o Will not readappliedinput

o Particularrangeor functionbad;specify

o BatteriesandfusesareOKo Checkedall cables

o Calibrationonly 0 Certificateofcalibrationrequired

o Datarequired(attachanyadditionalsheetsasnecessary)

Showa blockdiagramof your measurementsystemincludingall instrumentsconnected(whetherpoweris turnedonor not).Also, describesignalsource.

Whereis themeasurementbeingperformed?(factory,controlledlaboratory,out-of-<!oors,etc.)

What power line voltage is uSed?- Ainbient temperature? oF

Relativehwnidity? Other? _

Any additionalinformation.(If specia1modificationShavebeenmadeby theuser,pleasedescribe.)

Besureto ｩｮ､ｬｬ､ your nameand phonenumber on this serviceform.


Looking for more information?Visit us on the web at http://www.artisan-scientific.com for more information:• Price Quotations • Drivers· Technical Specifications. Manuals and Documentation

Artisan Scientific is ｙｯｵ Source for: Quality New and Certified-Used/Pre:-awned ECJuiflment• Tens of Thousands of In-Stock Items• Hundreds of Manufacturers Supported

• FastShippingand DelIve1y• Leasing / Monthly Rentals

• Equipment Demos• Consignment

Service Center RepairsExperienced Engineers and Technicians on staff in ourState-of-the-art Full-Service In-House Service Center Facility

InstraView Remote InspectionRemotely inspect equipment before purchasing with ourInnovative InstraView-website at http://www.instraview.com

We bUy used equipment! We also offer credit for Buy-Backs and Trade-InsSell your excess. underutilized. and idle used equipment. Contact one of our Customer Service Representatives todayl

Talk to a live person: 88EM38-S0URCE fB88-887-68721 I Contact us by email: [email protected] Visit our website: http://www.artisan-scientific.com

Documents

01DMM0196 - Keithley 196 Manual